Im33k03h20-50e - Alarm Management

Consolidated Alarm
Management Software
Reference
IM 33K03H20-50E
IM 33K03H20-50E
7th Edition
i
Introduction
This manual is written for use as a part of reference manual describing the functional details
of CENTUM VP. This manual describes Consolidated Alarm Management Software for HIS
(referred to as "CAMS for HIS"). CAMS for HIS is a dedicated software program to support
alarm monitoring operations.
You can read the required parts when you need the details of CAMS for HIS.
This manual consists of the following parts:
• PART-A Operation and Monitoring
A1. CAMS for HIS Overview
A2. Main Operations on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
A3. Operations to Acknowledge A&E Messages and Alarm Status Transition
A4. Making it Easy to Find Important Alarms
A5. Saving Text Files on the Details Pane while Monitoring Alarms
A6. Relationship between CAMS for HIS and HIS
A7. CAMS for HIS and Multiple Project Connection
A8. Displaying Historical Data
A9. Detecting and Displaying Differences in Alarm Setpoint Values
A10. Messages of CENTUM-XL and μXL
• PART-B Engineering with CAMS for HIS
B1. Engineering for Alarm Management with CAMS for HIS
B2. CAMS for HIS Engineering Setting Items
B3. Other Engineering Operations
Media No. IM 33K03H20-50E (DVD) 7th Edition : Aug. 2014 (YK) IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00
All Rights Reserved Copyright © 2011, Yokogawa Electric Corporation
ii
CENTUM VP Document Map

Installation
CENTUM VP License CENTUM VP
Installation Management Security Guide
IM 33K01C10-50E IM 33K01C20-50E IM 33K01C30-50E
Engineering
Field Control Stations Function Blocks Function Blocks Function Blocks

Reference Overview Reference Vol.1 Reference Vol.2
IM 33K03E10-50E IM 33K03E21-50E IM 33K03E22-50E IM 33K03E23-50E
Function Blocks Human Interface Human Interface Engineering

Reference Vol. 3 Stations Reference Vol. 1 Stations Reference Vol. 2 Reference Vol. 1
IM 33K03E24-50E IM 33K03F21-50E IM 33K03F22-50E IM 33K03G21-50E
Consolidated Alarm
Engineering Engineering Management Software Batch Management
Reference Vol. 2 Reference Vol. 3 Reference System Reference
IM 33K03G22-50E IM 33K03G23-50E IM 33K03H20-50E IM 33K03J10-50E
SEBOL Communication with Communication with Communication

Reference Subsystems Using RIO Subsystems Using FIO Devices Reference
IM 33K03K10-50E IM 33K03L10-50E IM 33K03L20-50E IM 33K03M10-50E
Optional Functions Communication with Compliance with Generic Subsystem

Reference PROFIBUS Systems FDA: 21CFR Part 11 Gateway Reference
IM 33K03N10-50E IM 33K03P10-50E IM 33K03Q10-50E IM 33K03R10-50E
System Integration Unified Gateway Engineering Test

OPC Station Reference Station Reference Vnet/IP Guide
IM 33K03R20-50E IM 33K03R30-50E IM 33K10A10-50E IM 33K10H20-50E
Engineering CENTUM FOUNDATION fieldbus

Tutorial APCS Data Access Library Reference
IM 33K02E10-50E IM 33K15U10-50E IM 33K15P10-50E IM 33K20T10-50E
FOUNDATION fieldbus
Engineering Guide
IM 33K20T20-50E
Operation and Monitoring
HIS Operation Operating Messages
IM 33K02D10-50E IM 33K02D20-50E
Hardware
Turbomachinery
Peripherals Field Control Stations Input & Output Modules I/O Modules
IM 33K50C10-50E IM 33K50E40-50E IM 33K50G10-50E IM 33K10U10-50E
Communication Devices Migrated-FCS(FIO)
IM 33K50D10-50E IM 33K55W10-50E
IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

iii
Safety Precautions for Use

n Safety, Protection, and Modification of the Product
• To protect the system controlled by the Product and the Product itself and to ensure safe
operation, please observe the safety precautions described in this Manual. Yokogawa
Electric Corporation ("YOKOGAWA") assumes no liability for safety if users fail to observe
the safety precautions and instructions when operating the Product.
• If the Product is used in a manner not specified in the User's Manuals, the protection pro-
vided by the Product may be impaired.
• If any protection or safety circuit is required for the system controlled by the Product or for
the Product itself, please install it externally.
• Use only spare parts that are approved by YOKOGAWA when replacing parts or consum-
ables of the Product.
• Do not use the Product and its accessories such as power cords on devices that are not
approved by YOKOGAWA. Do not use the Product and its accessories for any purpose
other than as intended by YOKOGAWA.
• Modification of the Product is strictly prohibited.
• The following symbols are used in the Product and User's Manuals to indicate the accom-
panying safety precautions:
Indicates that caution is required for operation. This symbol is labeled on the Prod-
uct to refer the user to the User's Manuals for necessary actions or behaviors in
order to protect the operator and the equipment against dangers such as electrical
shocks. In the User's Manuals, you will find the precautions necessary to prevent
physical injury or death, which may be caused by accidents, such as electrical
shocks resulting from operational mistakes.
Identifies a protective conductor terminal. Before using the Product, you must
ground the protective conductor terminal to avoid electric shock.
Identifies a functional grounding terminal. A terminal marked "FG" also has the
same function. This terminal is used for grounding other than protective grounding.
Before using the Product, you must ground this terminal.
Indicates an AC supply.
Indicates a DC supply.
Indicates the ON position of a power on/off switch.
Indicates the OFF position of a power on/off switch.
n Notes on Handling User's Manuals

• Hand over the User's Manuals to your end users so that they can keep the User's Man-
uals on hand for convenient reference.
• Thoroughly read and understand the information in the User's Manuals before using the
Product.
• For the avoidance of doubt, the purpose of the User's Manuals is not to warrant that the
Product is suitable for any particular purpose but to describe the functional details of the
Product.
• Contents of the User's Manuals are subject to change without notice.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of the User's Manuals to ensure the accu-
racy of their contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, contact

iv
us or your local distributor. The User's Manuals with incorrectly ordered pages or missing
pages will be replaced.
n Warning and Disclaimer

• Except as specified in the warranty terms, YOKOGAWA shall not provide any warranty for
the Product.
• YOKOGAWA shall not be liable for any indirect or consequential loss incurred by either
using or not being able to use the Product.
n Notes on Software
• YOKOGAWA makes no warranties, either expressed or implied, with respect to the Soft-
ware Product's merchantability or suitability for any particular purpose, except as speci-
fied in the warranty terms.
• Please purchase the appropriate number of licenses of the Software Product according to
the number of computers to be used.
• No copy of the Software Product may be made for any purpose other than backup; other-
wise, it is deemed as an infringement of YOKOGAWA's Intellectual Property rights.
• Keep the software medium of the Software Product in a safe place.
• No reverse engineering, reverse compiling, reverse assembling, or converting the Soft-
ware Product to human-readable format may be performed for the Software Product.
• No part of the Software Product may be transferred, converted, or sublet for use by any
third-party, without prior written consent from YOKOGAWA.

v
Documentation Conventions
n Symbol Marks
The following symbols are used throughout the User's Manuals.
Identifies instructions that must be observed to avoid physical
injury, electric shock, or death.
Identifies instructions that must be observed to prevent dam-

ages to the software or hardware, or system failures of the
Product.
Identifies important information required to understand opera-
tions or functions.
Identifies additional information.
Identifies referenced content.

In the online manuals, clicking on the reference link shown in
green displays the referenced content. This action does not ap-
ply to the reference link shown in black.
n Typographical Conventions
The following typographical conventions are used throughout the User's Manuals.
l Commonly Used Conventions throughout the User's Manuals

• Character string to be entered
The characters that must be entered are shown in monospace font as follows:
Example:
FIC100.SV=50.0
• ▼ Mark
This symbol indicates the description for an item for which you should make a setting in
the product's engineering window.
While operating an engineering window, the help information for the selected item can be
accessed from "Builder Definition Items" in the Help menu. Listing more than one defini-
tion item after this symbol implies that the paragraph on the page describes more than
one definition items.
Example:
▼ Tag Name, Station Name
• Δ Mark
Indicates that a space must be entered between character strings.
Example:
.ALΔPIC010Δ-SC
• Character string enclosed by braces { }
Indicates character strings that may be omitted.
Example:
.PRΔTAG{Δ.sheet name}

vi
l Conventions Used to Show Key or Button Operations

• Characters enclosed by brackets [ ]
When characters are enclosed by brackets in the description of a key or button operation,
it indicates a key on the keyboard, a key on the operation keyboard, a button name in a
window, or an item in a list box displayed in a window.
Example:
To alter the function, press the [ESC] key.
l Conventions Used in Command Syntax or Program Statements

The following conventions are used within a command syntax or program statement format:
• Characters enclosed by angle brackets < >
Indicate character strings that user can specify freely according to certain guidelines.
Example:
#define <Identifier> <Character string>
• "..." Mark
Indicates previous command or argument that may be repeated.
Example:
Imax (arg1, arg2, ...)
• Characters enclosed by brackets [ ]
Indicate character strings that may be omitted.
Example:
sysalarm <format character string> [, <output value>…]
• Characters enclosed by separators | |
Indicates character strings that can be selected from more than one option.
Example:
opeguide <format character string> [, <output value>...]
OG, <element number>
n Drawing Conventions
Drawings used in the User's Manuals may be partially emphasized or simplified for conven-
ience of description, so that the unnecessary parts are omitted from the drawings.
Drawings of the window may be slightly different from the actual screen shots with different
settings or fonts; the difference is not extended to the range that may hamper the understand-
ing of basic functionalities and operation and monitoring tasks.

vii
Copyright and Trademark Notices

n All Rights Reserved
The copyright of the programs and online manuals contained in the software medium of the
Software Product shall remain in YOKOGAWA.
You are allowed to print the required pages of the online manuals for the purposes of using or
operating the Product; however, reprinting or reproducing the entire document is strictly pro-
hibited by the Copyright Law.
Except as stated above, no part of the online manuals may be reproduced, transferred, sold,
or distributed to a third party in any manner (either in electronic or written form including, with-
out limitation, in the forms of paper documents, electronic media, and transmission via the
network). Nor it may be registered or recorded in the media such as films without permission.
n Trademark Acknowledgements
• CENTUM, ProSafe, Vnet/IP, PRM, Exaopc, and STARDOM are registered trademarks of
YOKOGAWA.
• Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Visual Basic, Visual C++, and Vis-
ual Studio are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
• Adobe, Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incor-
porated.
• Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox Corporation.
• EtherNet/IP is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association (ODVA).
• in fieldbus is a registered trademark of Fieldbus Foundation.
• HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.
• Java is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation.
• MELSEC is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
• Memocon-SC is a registered trademark of Yaskawa Electric Corporation.
• Modicon and Modbus are registered trademarks of Schneider Electric SA.
• PROFIBUS is a registered trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization.
• SIEMENS and SIMATIC are registered trademarks of Siemens Industrial Automation Ltd.
• SmartPlant is a registered trademark of Intergraph Corporation.
• SYSMAC is a registered trademark of OMRON Corporation.
• All other company and product names mentioned in the User's Manuals are trademarks
or registered trademarks of their respective companies.
• We do not use TM or ® mark to indicate those trademarks or registered trademarks in the
User's Manuals.
• We do not use logos in the User's Manuals.

Blank Page
TocA-1
Consolidated Alarm Management Software Reference
IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition
CONTENTS
PART-A Message Monitoring Using CAMS for HIS..........
...........................................................................A-1
A1. CAMS for HIS Overview.....................................................................A1-1
A2. Main Operations on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS................ A2-1
A2.1 How to Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.............................. A2-2
A2.2 Window Configuration of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.........A2-5
A2.3 How to Exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.............................. A2-15
A2.4 Action Modes for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.................... A2-16
A3. Operations to Acknowledge A&E Messages and Alarm Status
Transition............................................................................................A3-1
A3.1 Operations to Acknowledge A&E Messages...........................................A3-2
A3.2 Operations to Manually Reset A&E Messages........................................A3-3
A3.3 Scope of Sharing the Result of Acknowledged or Manually Reset A&E
Messages.................................................................................................... A3-4
A3.4 Status Transition from Occurrence to Deletion of Process Alarm
Messages.................................................................................................... A3-6
A3.5 Status Transition from Occurrence to Deletion of A&E Messages other
than Process Alarm Messages................................................................. A3-9
A4. Making it Easy to Find Important Alarms........................................ A4-1
A4.1 Operations to Change the Order and Format of Message Display...............
..................................................................................................................... A4-2
A4.2 Narrowing Down to Applicable Messages Only......................................A4-4
A4.2.1 Filtering........................................................................................ A4-5
A4.2.2 Dynamic Filtering......................................................................... A4-7
A4.2.3 Load Shedding...........................................................................A4-10
A4.2.4 Shelving..................................................................................... A4-12
A4.2.5 Suppression............................................................................... A4-19
A5. Saving Text Files on the Details Pane while Monitoring Alarms...........
............................................................................................................. A5-1
A5.1 Operations to Display the External Text File in the Details Pane.......... A5-2
A5.2 Operation to Directly Enter and Save Texts in the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS..............................................................................................A5-6
A6. Relationship between CAMS for HIS and HIS................................. A6-1

TocA-2
A6.1 How the Result of Message Processing in the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS is Displayed in Other Operation and Monitoring Windows...............
..................................................................................................................... A6-2
A6.2 How the Result of Message Processing in Operation and Monitoring
Windows Other Than the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is Displayed
in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS................................................ A6-7
A6.3 Coordination between the CAMS for HIS Functions and Other HIS
Functions.................................................................................................... A6-8
A6.4 Differences between HISs with CAMS for HIS Enabled and Those with
CAMS for HIS Disabled............................................................................A6-10
A7. CAMS for HIS and Multiple Project Connection..............................A7-1
A7.1 Project Connection Patterns when CAMS for HIS is Enabled............... A7-7
A8. Displaying Historical Data.................................................................A8-1
A8.1 Starting and Exiting the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.................. A8-2
A8.2 Layout of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.......................................... A8-3
A8.3 Historical Data Display Actions of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS..
..................................................................................................................... A8-8
A8.4 Operation for Narrowing Down Historical Data.....................................A8-14
A9. Detecting and Displaying Differences in Alarm Setpoint Values..........
............................................................................................................. A9-1
A9.1 Basic Operations in the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window................. A9-2
A9.1.1 How to Start the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window....................A9-3
A9.1.2 Alarm Setpoint Difference Window Configuration........................ A9-6
A9.1.3 How to Close the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window................ A9-10
A9.1.4 Security of the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window.....................A9-11
A9.2 Detecting Differences in Alarm Setpoint Values................................... A9-12
A9.2.1 Operations Performed Based on Difference Information........... A9-14
A9.3 Setting Master Alarm Setpoint Values to Current Setpoints (Master
Setting)......................................................................................................A9-17
A10. Messages of CENTUM-XL and μXL................................................ A10-1

TocB-1
CONTENTS
PART-B Engineering for Using CAMS for HIS.............B-1
B1. Engineering for Alarm Management with CAMS for HIS................B1-1
B1.1 Alarm Actions and Other Configurations................................................ B1-2
B1.2 CAMS for HIS Builder Engineering...........................................................B1-5
B1.2.1 Operations Common to Builders..................................................B1-6
B1.2.2 Compliance with FDA:21 CFR Part11........................................B1-22
B1.2.3 CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder...........................................B1-23
B1.2.4 CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder......................................................B1-25
B1.2.5 CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder....................................................... B1-44
B1.2.6 CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder....................B1-47
B1.3 Settings to Enable CAMS for HIS........................................................... B1-49
B1.4 Customizing the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS............................ B1-55
B1.4.1 Assigning the Authority to Customize........................................ B1-56
B1.4.2 Specifying the Information to be Displayed in the Details Pane..........
................................................................................................... B1-57
B1.4.3 Operations by the Operator to Customize the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS............................................................................ B1-61
B1.4.4 Operations by the Operator to Create Filters.............................B1-72
B1.4.5 Setting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS Window
Configuration..............................................................................B1-77
B1.5 Configurator of CAMS for HIS.................................................................B1-78
B1.5.1 Starting and Exiting Configurator of CAMS for HIS................... B1-79
B1.5.2 Roles of the Configurator of CAMS for HIS............................... B1-80
B1.6 Function Check of CAMS for HIS........................................................... B1-85
B1.6.1 Function Check Execution Task Flow........................................ B1-87
B1.6.2 What is Alarm Generator?......................................................... B1-89
B1.6.3 Starting and Exiting Alarm Generator........................................ B1-90
B1.6.4 Layout of Alarm Generator.........................................................B1-92
B1.6.5 Creation of Scenarios................................................................ B1-97
B1.6.6 Functions of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check
Mode).......................................................................................B1-106
B1.6.7 Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check Mode)............................................................B1-108
B1.6.8 Execution of Function Check....................................................B1-110

TocB-2
B1.6.9 Messages Displayed During the Function Check.....................B1-113
B2. CAMS for HIS Engineering Setting Items........................................ B2-1
B2.1 CAMS for HIS Builders Setting Items.......................................................B2-2
B2.2 Items Set in the Option Window Tabs.................................................... B2-12
B2.3 Consolidated Alarm Engineering for CENTUM Process Alarms......... B2-19
B2.4 Consolidated Alarm Engineering for System Alarm Messages and
Operation Guide Messages.....................................................................B2-35
B2.5 Alarm Setpoint Management...................................................................B2-37
B2.6 Effect of Modification to Project Database............................................ B2-44
B3. Other Engineering Operations..........................................................B3-1
B3.1 Revision up and Version up.................................................................... B3-14
B3.1.1 Migration Tool.............................................................................B3-15
B3.1.2 Detailed Specifications of Migration Tool................................... B3-17
B3.1.3 Operating Specifications............................................................ B3-18
B3.1.4 Engineering in Revision Coexistence Environment................... B3-24
B3.1.5 Upgrading CAMS for HIS...........................................................B3-28
B3.2 CAMS for HIS Engineering Flow when Connected Multiple Projects...........
................................................................................................................... B3-32

<A. Message Monitoring Using CAMS for HIS > A-1
A. Message Monitoring Using CAMS

for HIS
This part describes how to monitor messages by using CAMS for HIS.

Blank Page
<A1. CAMS for HIS Overview> A1-1
A1. CAMS for HIS Overview

CENTUM VP provides Consolidated Alarm Management Software for HIS (hereinafter refer-
red to as “CAMS for HIS”) customized for HIS applications. CAMS for HIS supports EEMUA
No. 191. This chapter explains the overview of CAMS for HIS.
n What is CAMS for HIS?

CAMS for HIS is a dedicated software program to support alarm monitoring operations.
CAMS for HIS can be used to centrally manage various alarms and messages and to display
different types of message in a single window. This window is called the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS. Also in this Instruction Manual (IM), alarms and messages are collectively
called alarm & event messages, and abbreviated as A&E messages.
n Purpose of CAMS for HIS

CAMS for HIS provides a mechanism to select only the applicable messages among a large
number of A&E message and displays them with necessary information in a manner easy for
the operator to understand. This can prevent any oversight of important alarms and can re-
duce the operator’s burden.
n Differences Between the Conventional Alarm Management and

Alarm Management Using CAMS for HIS
With CAMS for HIS, the following operations can be performed.
• Alarm actions can be set for one alarm at a time, instead of one function block at a time.
• Supplementary information can be added for each alarm.
• Unnecessary alarms can be suppressed during operation and monitoring.
n Operation when the Number of Messages has Exceeded the

Maximum Number that can be Stored by CAMS for HIS
Specify the number of messages that can be retained in CAMS for HIS on the CAMS for HIS
tab of HIS Utility. The upper limit is 2000.
Generated A&E messages are registered in the alarm buffer of CAMS for HIS, and when they
are deleted after being acknowledged or recovered, they are then removed from the buffer.
However, if messages overflow from the buffer, the messages are deleted in the following or-
der.
• Already acknowledged messages from the oldest generation time
• Unacknowledged messages with the lowest alarm priority from the oldest generation time
A&E messages already deleted from the buffer are not displayed on Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS. On the other hand, the alarm status of FCS is displayed in Faceplate View and
Graphic View, and it is thus possible to acknowledge or manually reset A&E messages in
Tuning View, for example.
Moreover, a message is displayed when the activity ratio of the alarm buffer exceeds 80%, or
when it recovers down to 70% after exceeding 80%.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the displayed message, refer to:
“n Messages Unique to CAMS for HIS” on page A6-10
For more information about the setting of the number of messages that can be retained in CAMS for HIS,
refer to:
“n Operation to Enable CAMS for HIS” on page B1-49
n System Configuration when Using CAMS for HIS

Besides the basic configuration of CENTUM VP when the system is connected in the integra-
tion structure with ProSafe-RS and when the system is connected with OPC A&E server, the
A&E messages generated in STARDOM and PRM can be comprehensively managed on the
HIS.
The A&E messages can be equalized among the HISs that implemented with CAMS for HIS
features.
Configurator of
CAMS for HIS Builder CAMS for HIS Equalization Scope
ENG HIS HIS (Download Master) HIS
Ethernet
Control Bus
PRM OPC Server OPC Server

ProSafe-RS FCS
SCS
STARDOM
FCN/FCJ
Figure A1-1 A System Implemented with CAMS for HIS
Standard Builder Function (LHS5100, LHM5100) includes CAMS for HIS builders. On CAMS
for HIS builders, the settings of Consolidated Alarm Management can be defined and down-
loaded to the databases of HISs in the system. When the project is connected with other proj-
ects using the Multiple Project Connection package, the equalization of A&E messages can
be performed between HISs across projects.
Within the equalization scope, there is one HIS is used as the Download Master of the Config-
urator of CAMS for HIS. On the Download Master HIS, the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
within the equalization scope can be customized. Using the HIS Utility, the download master
HIS and the HIS to be included in the equalization scope can be specified.
SEE
ALSO For more information about equalization with other projects using the Multiple Project Connection package,
refer to:
A7., “CAMS for HIS and Multiple Project Connection” on page A7-1
n How to Use CAMS for HIS

In order to use CAMS for HIS on an HIS, open the CAMS for HIS tab in the HIS Utility, and
select the check box for [Enable CAMS for HIS], and then reboot the PC.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the outline of the operation, refer to:
“n Operation to Enable CAMS for HIS” on page A2-2
n Alarm Setpoint Management of CAMS for HIS

An alarm setpoint is a threshold value for triggering an alarm. For an instance, the HH or PH
is a setting item of alarm setpoint in a function block.
If the alarm setpoint values are not set properly, various problems may occur, in which a proc-
ess alarm that is necessary during plant operation may not be triggered, or too many alarms
may be triggered, causing delayed detection of critical alarms. For safely operating a plant,
the alarm setpoints must be properly defined and managed.
The following functions are available with CAMS for HIS to support the alarm setpoint man-
agement. They are based on the alarm management lifecycle determined by ANSI/ISA-18.2.
• Define and manage [Alarm Setpoint - master] using CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
• Compare the alarm setpoint values actually being used on a control station (current set-
points) against the [Alarm Setpoint - master], and display the difference, if any.
• Set the [Alarm setpoint - master] to the current setpoints of the control station, as neces-
sary.
• Import the current setpoints of the control station to the [Alarm Setpoint - master], as nec-
essary.
• Set all alarm setpoints of the [Alarm Setpoints - master] on the control station at once
from CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
IMPORTANT
It is assumed that the function to set all alarm setpoints (master) at once is used at a system
start-up, or when adding or modifying the control station (s). Do not set all alarm setpoints
(master) during plant operation.
Compare master and current

alarm setpoint values and
Get master alarm display discrepancies
Master alarm setpoint values
Downloading
setpoint
Define master alarm values Get current alarm
setpoint values setpoint values
CAMS for HIS Alarm setpoint Current alarm

Alarm builder difference window setpoint values
Set the master alarm
Result of setpoints to
Set All Alarm Import the current comparing the current setpoints
setpoints Tool Save discrepant
alarm setpoint the alarm
alarm setpoints
values to the master setpoints
ENG HIS Control Station
Set All Alarm setpoints
Figure A1-2 Operation Flow of Alarm Setpoint Management with CAMS for HIS

SEE
ALSO For more information about the alarm setpoint difference window, refer to:
A9., “Detecting and Displaying Differences in Alarm Setpoint Values” on page A9-1
For more information about the operation to set the [Alarm Setpoint - master] to the current setpoints of the
control station, refer to:
A9.3, “Setting Master Alarm Setpoint Values to Current Setpoints (Master Setting)” on page A9-17
For more information about the operation to import the current setpoints of the control station to the [Alarm
Setpoint - master], refer to:
“n Reflecting Current Alarm Setpoint Values to Master Setpoints” on page B2-41
For more information about the operation to set all alarm setpoints of the [Alarm Setpoint - master] on the
control station at once from CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, refer to:
“n Setting All Alarm Setpoint Values at Once on Control Station” on page B2-39
n Terminology of CAMS for HIS

In this IM, terms defined in EEMUA and terms unique to CAMS for HIS are used, in addition
to the basic terms. Since terms defined for EEMUA have not been translated, the original
terms are used as is as a general rule. Refer to the following definitions as necessary.
• Suppression: A type of operation to suppress unnecessary A&E messages.
• Eclipsing: A type of operation to suppress unnecessary A&E messages. CAMS for HIS
displays groups of associated A&E messages in a tree.
• Filtering: An operation to select A&E messages that serve your purpose.
• Sorting: An operation to sort the displayed A&E messages.
• Shelving: An operation to temporarily move alarms of lower priorities to other location.
• Shelf: A “shelf” on which to place alarms of lower priorities. Shelves are used in shelving.
• Load Shedding: When too many A&E messages occur, load shedding can restrict the
messages and only displays the messages of the designated categories.
• Purpose: Of each A&E message. What purpose the A&E message is raised for.
• Consequence: The scale of impact on the system if no appropriate step is taken for the
alarm.
• Time-to-respond: The allowable time within which an action must be taken after an alarm
generates.
• Alarm Priority: Priority of A&E messages.
• Guidance: Information on actions to be taken against generated alarms.
• Re-classification: To reclassify acquired A&E messages based on whether they are
alarms or events.
• Attribute Addition: To add identifiers used for message selection (e.g., Purpose or Conse-
quence), as well as additional information (e.g., Guidance or Time-to-respond), to A&E
messages.

<A2. Main Operations on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS> A2-1
A2. Main Operations on Message

Monitor of CAMS for HIS
This chapter explains the following main operations on the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS.
• How to start
• Window configuration
• How to exit
• Action modes of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
n Overview of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is a user interface to monitor and acknowledge A&E
messages. For the repeatedly occurred messages, only the latest 10 identical messages can
be chronologically displayed according to their timestamps.
The figure below shows a display example of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
CAMS for HIS : Message Monitor
File Edit View Operation Tools
Shelving Date Source Message

Shelf 01(2/7/11/1) 10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 2FIC1204.HI 2FIC1204 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 50.0 KM3/H HI Recover
Continuous_test 16:59
10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 2FIC1203.HI 2FIC1203 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 50.0 KM3/H HI Recover
Shelf 02(3/8/15/0) 10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 2FIC1202.HI 2FIC1202 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 50.0 KM3/H HI Recover
1 day 6 hr 30 min 10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 2FIC1201.HI 2FIC1201 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 50.0 KM3/H HI Recover
Auto_test
1h Shelving(3/5/7/2) 10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 1FIC1205.LO 1FIC1205 Flow Upper LineA UnitB PV = 50.0 KM3/H LO Recover
1 hr 10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 1FIC1204.LO 1FIC1204 Flow Upper LineA UnitB PV = 50.0 KM3/H LO Recover
OneShot_1h_test
4h Shelving(7/2/13/3) 10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 1FIC1203.LO 1FIC1203 Flow Upper LineA UnitB PV = 50.0 KM3/H LO Recover
4 hr 10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 1FIC1202.LO 1FIC1202 Flow Upper LineA UnitB PV = 50.0 KM3/H LO Recover
OneShot_4h_test
10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 1FIC1201.LO 1FIC1201 Flow Upper LineA UnitB PV = 50.0 KM3/H LO Recover
10/22/2010 2:36:51 PM 2FIC1205.HI 2FIC1205 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 68.9 KM3/H HI
Filter
All Filters Favorites Date Source Message
□10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 2FIC1201.HI 2FIC1201 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 50.0 KM3/H HI Recover
- USER1 □10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 1FIC1205.LO 1FIC1205 Flow Upper LineA UnitB PV = 50.0 KM3/H LO Recover
- SIS □10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 1FIC1204.LO 1FIC1204 Flow Upper LineA UnitB PV = 50.0 KM3/H LO Recover
System □10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 1FIC1203.LO 1FIC1203 Flow Upper LineA UnitB PV = 50.0 KM3/H LO Recover
□10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 1FIC1202.LO 1FIC1202 Flow Upper LineA UnitB PV = 50.0 KM3/H LO Recover
Process
□10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 1FIC1201.LO 1FIC1201 Flow Upper LineA UnitB PV = 50.0 KM3/H LO Recover
System ■10/22/2010 2:36:51 PM 2FIC1205.HI 2FIC1205 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 68.9 KM3/H HI
10/22/2010 2:36:51 PM 2FIC1205.LO 2FIC1205 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 68.9 KM3/H LO Recover
Process 10/22/2010 2:36:51 PM 2FIC1205.LL 2FIC1205 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 68.9 KM3/H LL Recover
Operator Guide ■10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 2FIC1204.HI 2FIC1204 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 68.9 KM3/H HI
PRM
10/22/2010 2:36:51 PM 2FIC1204.LL 2FIC1204 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 68.9 KM3/H LL Recover
Shift01 ■10/22/2010 2:36:51 PM 2FIC1203.HI 2FIC1203 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 68.9 KM3/H HI
Shift02
Figure A2-1 Display Example of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

<A2.1 How to Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS> A2-2
A2.1 How to Start the Message Monitor of

CAMS for HIS
The following two steps are necessary to start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Howev-
er, once this step is performed, it is not required performed again when starting CAMS for HIS
next time.
1. Enable CAMS for HIS in the HIS Utility.
2. Call the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS from the Operation and Monitoring window.
This section explains how to perform these operations.
n Operation to Enable CAMS for HIS

Before using CAMS for HIS, you need to enable CAMS for HIS on HIS Utility.
Set the required items in the CAMS for HIS tab of the HIS Utility to enable CAMS for HIS.
Perform this operation for all HISs included in the Equalization Scope.
IMPORTANT
Perform this operation after downloading the project definition files onto the HIS first.
The outline of the operation is explained below.

1. Open the CAMS for HIS tab in the HIS Utility.

HIS Utility
User Action Security CAMS for HIS
CAMS for HIS (The computer should be restarted.)

Enable/Disable CAMS for HIS (The computer should be restarted.)
Enable CAMS for HIS

(The system configuration must be downloaded before
enabling CAMS for HIS)
Settings (The computer should be restarted.)
Maximum size of alarm buffer 2000
Set this HIS as Download Master

(Set one Download Master only for each equalization scope.)
Configuration Operation Keyboard
ACK key acknowledges the selected A&E Message

ACK key acknowledges all the displayed A&E Messages
Exclude operation guide messages
Detailed Setting
OPC A&E Server Connection
OK Cancel
Figure A2.1-1 CAMS for HIS Tab in the HIS Utility
2. Select the check box for [Enable CAMS for HIS]. Set other items as necessary.
3. Click [OK] and close the HIS Utility.
4. Reboot the PC.
CAMS for HIS will be enabled once the PC is rebooted.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the items in the CAMS for HIS tab of the HIS Utility, refer to:
“n Items Set in the CAMS for HIS Tab” on page B1-50
n Operations to Call the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS from the
Operation and Monitoring Window
Doing one of the followings, you can call the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Each HIS
can open one Message Monitor window.
• Calling from System Message Banner
• Calling from Overview Tool Box on Browser bar
• Calling from Tool Button Tool Box on Browser bar
• Calling by specifying a window name
• Calling by assigning a window call function to an object

l How to Call from System Message Banner

Call Process Alarm view, System Alarm view, or Operator Guide view from System Message
Banner. The contents in the above views will be displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS instead of the above views. Operator Guide view is replaced by the Message Monitor
of CAMS for HIS only when the check box for [Exclude operation guide messages] in the
CAMS for HIS tab of the HIS Utility is cleared.
l How to Call from Overview Tool Box on Browser bar

Call Process Alarm view, System Alarm view, or Operator Guide view from the Overview Tool
Box on Browser bar. The contents in the above views will be displayed in the Message Moni-
tor of CAMS for HIS instead of the above views. Operator Guide view is replaced by the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS only when the check box for [Exclude operation guide messag-
es] in the CAMS for HIS tab of the HIS Utility is cleared. It is possible to call the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS from any one of three tabs of the Overview Tool Box.
l How to Call from Tool Button Tool Box on Browser Bar

Call the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS from [Call view] of Tool Button Tool Box on Brows-
er bar. Alternately, call Process Alarm view or Operator Guide view. The contents in the above
views will be displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS instead of the above views.
Operator Guide view is replaced by the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS only when the
check box for [Exclude operation guide messages] in the CAMS for HIS tab of the HIS Utility
is cleared.
l How to Call by Specifying a Window Name

Call Process Alarm view, System Alarm view or Operator Guide view from the Name Input
Tool Box on Browser bar. The contents in the above views will be displayed in the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS instead of the above views. Operator Guide view is replaced by the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS only when the check box for [Exclude operation guide
messages] in the CAMS for HIS tab of the HIS Utility is cleared.
l How to Call by Assigning a Window Call Function to an Object

Call Process Alarm view, System Alarm view or Operator Guide view by assigning the window
call function to an object. The contents in the above views will be displayed in the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS instead of the above views. Operator Guide view is replaced by the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS only when the check box for [Exclude operation guide
messages] in the CAMS for HIS tab of the HIS Utility is cleared.
Objects to which the window call function can be assigned are as follows.
• Preset menus on Browser bar
• Function keys on the operation keyboard
• Touch targets of Graphics view, etc.
• Touch targets of Product Control view, etc.
When the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is called from Product Control view, the filtered
results regarding the Batch ID will be displayed.

<A2.2 Window Configuration of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS> A2-5
A2.2 Window Configuration of the Message

This section explains the window configuration of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n Appearance of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The following figure shows the appearance of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
Menu Bar
Toolbar
Shelving
A&E Browser Pane

Shelves Pane
Filters
All Filters Favorites
A&E Messages Pane
Filters Pane
Details Pane
Dynamic Filters Pane
Status bar
Figure A2.2-1 Appearance of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
n Display Panes of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

There are nine panes in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Menu bar
• Toolbar
• Shelves pane
• Filters pane
• A&E Browser pane
• A&E Messages pane
• Details pane
• Dynamic Filters pane
• Status bar

Each pane is explained below.
l Menu Bar
Operations performed on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS can be selected. A list of
menu items is shown below.
Table A2.2-1 List of Menu Items

Menu Description
File Commit Changes Saves the settings for the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS.
Reset to System Default Reverts all changes made by the operator to the original
system common settings.
Properties Displays the properties of the specified element, such as
shelf or filter.
Print Prints the screen image being displayed.
Exit Exits the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
Edit Add Filter Adds a filter under the specified filter.
Delete Filter Deletes the specified filter.
Cut Cuts the specified filter.
Copy Copies the specified filter.
Paste Pastes the cut or copied filter.
Add Favorites Adds the specified filter to the Favorites tab sheet.
Delete Favorites Deletes the specified filter from Favorites tab.
View Switch Layout Switches the window layout.
Show Alarm Tree Shows the A&E Messages pane in the tree view.
Shelves Pane Sets whether to show or hide the Shelves pane.
Filter Pane Sets whether to show or hide the Filter pane.
A&E Browser Pane Sets whether to show or hide the A&E Browser pane.
Details Pane Sets whether to show or hide the Details pane.
Suppression... Calls the Suppression dialog box.

Menu Description
Operation Acknowledge Acknowledges individually the alarms specified in the A&E
Messages pane.
Acknowledge All Acknowledges simultaneously all alarms currently displayed
in the A&E Messages pane.
Manual Reset Resets individually the alarms specified in the A&E Mes-
sages pane.
Manual Reset All Resets simultaneously all alarms currently displayed in the
A&E Messages pane.
Reset Shelf Resets the specified shelves.
Reset Individual Messages in Displays the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous
Continuous Shelf Shelf dialog box.
Shelve Shelf 1 Puts the selected A&E messages or the filter settings to this
shelf.
Shelf 2 Puts the selected A&E messages or the filter settings to this
shelf.
: Puts the selected A&E messages or the filter settings to this
Shelf n shelf.
(n indicates the shelf
number)
Clear Details Pane Deselects the selected A&E messages and clears the con-
tents in Details pane.
Tools Options... Displays the Option Window.
l Toolbar
Buttons, such as Acknowledge, Acknowledge All, and Manual Reset, can be positioned on
the toolbar. The figure below is a display example of Toolbar buttons.
Figure A2.2-2 Display Example of Toolbar Buttons (Default)
The toolbar buttons are explained as follows.
Figure A2.2-3 Print
Print: Prints the contents currently shown in the A&E messages pane.
Figure A2.2-4 Acknowledge
Acknowledge: Acknowledges the A&E messages selected from the list in the A&E messages
pane.
Figure A2.2-5 Acknowledge All
Acknowledge All: Acknowledges all the A&E messages shown in the A&E messages pane.

Figure A2.2-6 Manual Reset
Manual Reset: Resets the acknowledged A&E messages selected from the list in the A&E
messages pane. (Only A&E messages that are allowed to reset manually)
Figure A2.2-7 Switch Alarm View
Switch Alarm View: Switches between “Alarm list” and “Show Alarm Tree” in A&E messages
pane with each click.
Figure A2.2-8 Clear Details Pane
Clear Details Pane: Deselects the selected A&E messages and clears the contents in Details
pane.
Figure A2.2-9 Clear Shelf
Clear Shelf: Removes all the A&E messages for shelving from the shelves.
Figure A2.2-10 Suppression
Suppression: Displays the Suppression dialog box.
Figure A2.2-11 Show Shelves Pane
Show Shelves Pane: Switches between “Show” and “Hide” Shelves pane with each click.
Figure A2.2-12 Show Filter Pane
Show Filter Pane: Switches between “Show” and “Hide” Filter pane with each click.
Figure A2.2-13 Show A&E Browser Pane
Show A&E Browser Pane: Switches between “Show” and “Hide” A&E Browser Pane with
each click.
Figure A2.2-14 Show Details Pane

Show Details Pane: Switches between “Show” and “Hide” Details Pane with each click.
Figure A2.2-15 Manual Reset All
Manual Reset All: Resets all the acknowledged A&E messages displayed in the A&E mes-
sages pane. (Only A&E messages that are allowed to reset manually)
Figure A2.2-16 Change Window Layout
Change Window Layout: Changes the width of the A&E message displaying area on the A&E
Browser pane by one clicking.
Figure A2.2-17 Show/Hide A&E Browser Pane Background
Show/Hide A&E Browser Pane Background: Changes between the Standard and Zebra pat-
terns for the background pattern of the A&E Browser pane by one clicking.
Figure A2.2-18 Show/Hide A&E Messages Pane Background
Show/Hide A&E Messages Pane Background: Changes between the Standard and Zebra
patterns for the background pattern of the A&E Messages pane by one clicking.
Figure A2.2-19 Run
Run...: Starts a pre-assigned application.
HIS
Figure A2.2-20 Call HIS Window
Call HIS Window: Calls the assigned operation and monitoring window.
Figure A2.2-21 Commit Changes
Commit Changes: Saves the settings for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
Figure A2.2-22 Reset to System Default
Reset to System Default: Reverts all changes made by the operator to the original system
common settings.

SEE
ALSO For more information about customization of toolbars, refer to:
“n Items Set in the Toolbar Tab” on page B1-63
l Shelves Pane
This pane displays the shelves on which A&E messages are shelved. The figure below shows
a display example of the Shelves pane.
Shelving
Shelf 01(2/7/11/1)
16:59
Continuous_test
Shelf 02(3/8/15/0)
1 day 6 hr 30 min
Auto_test
1h Shelving(3/5/7/2)
1 hr
OneShot_1h_test
4h Shelving(7/2/13/3)
4 hr
OneShot_4h_test
Figure A2.2-23 Display Example of Shelves Pane
The size of this pane can be changed by moving its boundaries with other panes. At least one
line is always displayed even when the pane is minimized.
The Shelves pane can be shown or hidden. Perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [View] - [Shelves Pane] in the menu bar.
• Click [Show Shelves Pane] in the toolbar.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Shelving, refer to:
A4.2.4, “Shelving” on page A4-12
l Filters Pane
This pane displays the filters used for filtering A&E messages. There are two tabs.
• All Filters tab
All filters are displayed in the tree view. The icon at the top of the tree (root) is called the
user icon.
• Favorite tab
Filters registered to the Favorites are displayed.
The figure below shows a display example of the Filters pane.

- USER1 USER1
- SIS
System Filter icon
Process Process
System
Process
PRM
Operator Guide
PRM Shift01
Shift01
Favorites tab
Shift02
- Current Product [01-0007]
- SIS
System
Process
System
Process
Operator Guide
Filter icon
All Filters tab
Figure A2.2-24 Display Example of Filters Pane
The size of this pane can be changed by moving its boundaries with other panes.At least one
The Filters pane can be shown or hidden. Perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [View] - [Filters Pane] in the menu bar.
• Click [Show Filters Pane] in the toolbar.
SEE
ALSO For more information about filtering, refer to:
A4.2.1, “Filtering” on page A4-5
l A&E Browser Pane

This pane is used to reference A&E messages. You cannot acknowledge or perform any other
operation to the messages on this pane.
The horizontal width can be widened by positioning it at the top of the Shelving or Filters
pane. Perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [View] - [Switch Layout] in the menu bar
• Click [Change Window Layout] in the toolbar.
The layout pattern of the A&E Browser pane switches every time this operation is repeated.

Menu Bar
Toolbar
A&E Browser Pane
Shelving
A&E Messages Pane

Shelves Pane
Filter
Details Pane
Filters Pane
Status bar
Figure A2.2-25 Display Example of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS when the A&E Browser
Pane is Positioned at the Top
The A&E Browser pane can be shown or hidden. Perform either one of the following two
methods.
• Select [View] - [A&E Browser Pane] in the menu bar.
• Click [Show A&E Browser Pane] in the toolbar.
New A&E messages can be displayed at the top of the pane or added at the bottom. They are
displayed at the top by default. If the number of A&E messages exceeds the amount that can
be displayed in the pane, the messages displayed at the bottom will scroll out if it is specified
to display new messages at the top. If it is specified to add new messages at the bottom, they
will be added at the end outside the displayable area.
l A&E Messages Pane

This pane is used to display A&E messages. One message is displayed on one line. Those
displayed in this pane are the messages acknowledged, shelved or filtered.
New A&E messages can be displayed at the top of the pane or added at the bottom. They are
displayed at the top by default. If the number of A&E messages exceeds the amount that can
be displayed in the pane, the messages displayed at the bottom will scroll out if it is specified
to display new messages at the top. If it is specified to add new messages at the bottom, they
will be added at the end outside the displayable area.
l Details Pane
This pane is linked to the A&E Messages pane. The additional information of the message
selected in the A&E Messages pane is displayed in this pane.
The figure below shows a display example of the Details pane.

Alarm Attribute Guidance
YHIS.MesageNo 4609
Timestamp 2008/03/23 10:11:25.000
Timestamp.Server 2008/03/23 10:11:26.218
Message %AN0001S0101 ALM
MessageNo 1201
TypeOfAlarm Process
Source %AN0001S010101.ALM
Source.Plant FCS0101
TagName %AN0001S010101
AlarmPriority Medium
Shelving Enable
Figure A2.2-26 Display Example of Details Pane
This pane consists of two tabs: Alarm Attributes tab and Guidance tab. The information dis-
played in these tabs is as follows.
• Alarm Attributes tab
The alarm attributes defined in the Style Settings dialog box are displayed. If you click a
URL displayed as hyperlink text, Internet Explorer starts, displaying the linked page. How-
ever, URLs are not displayed as hyperlink text when logged on as OFFUSER of HIS type
single sign on.
• Guidance tab
The settings defined at [Guidance] in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder are displayed. If
you click a URL displayed as hyperlink text, the link destination is displayed in the Details
Pane. However, URLs are not displayed as hyperlink text when logged on as OFFUSER
of HIS type single sign on.
You can display and edit external files. You can also create external files directly on this
tab. External files that you can handle here are text files (.txt) only.
The Details pane can be shown or hidden. Perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [View] - [Details Pane] in the menu bar.
• Click [Show Details Pane] in the toolbar.
When you click [Clear Details Pane] in the toolbar, the selection of message in the A&E Mes-
sages pane is cleared, the detail information is also deleted, and only the background color is
shown.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the Style Settings dialog box, refer to:
B1.4.2, “Specifying the Information to be Displayed in the Details Pane” on page B1-57
For more information about defining link addresses, refer to:
“l Defining Link Addresses as User-defined Attributes” on page B1-30
For more information about the settings defined at [Guidance] in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, refer to:
“n List of CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder Setting Items” on page B2-2
For more information about the details of working with external files on the Guidance tab, refer to:
A5., “Saving Text Files on the Details Pane while Monitoring Alarms” on page A5-1
For more information about OFFUSER of HIS type single sign on, refer to:
"■ OFFUSER" in 2.2.5, "Special User" in the CENTUM VP Security Guide (IM 33K01C30-50E)
l Dynamic Filters Pane

When combining multiple filter conditions to set a new filter, it is referred to as dynamic filter-
ing. This pane is the dynamic filtering pane. Since this pane is usually not displayed, select

the Filter icon from the Filters pane and drag it over to the area near the Status bar to display
it.
SEE
ALSO For more information about dynamic filtering, refer to:
A4.2.2, “Dynamic Filtering” on page A4-7
l Status Bar
The Status bar displays the following information.
ALM: Number of A&E messages occurred in the last 1 hour, 8 hours, or 24 hours
RCV: Number of alarms recovered in the last 1 hour, 8 hours or 24 hours
ACK: Number of A&E messages acknowledged in the last 1 hour, 8 hours or 24 hours
MRCV: Number of alarms manually reset in the last 1 hour, 8 hours or 24 hours
EVT: Number of events that occurred in the last 1 hour, 8 hours or 24 hours
SEE
ALSO For more information about events, refer to:
“n Classification of Historical Data” on page A8-8

<A2.3 How to Exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS> A2-15
A2.3 How to Exit the Message Monitor of CAMS

for HIS
This section explains how to exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n Operations to Exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The methods for exiting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS are listed below.
• Click the [Close] button on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Select [File] - [Exit] in the menu bar of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Click the button to close all windows in the Tool Button Tool Box on Browse bar.
• Press the ERAS key on the operation keyboard.
• Log on, or log out.

<A2.4 Action Modes for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS> A2-16
A2.4 Action Modes for the Message Monitor of

CAMS for HIS
The following three action modes are provided for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Normal mode
• Configuration mode
• Function Check mode
Among these, Configuration mode and Function Check mode are used for alarm engineering.
n Normal Mode
This mode is used for the plant operation and monitoring, and only the scope of items allowed
for the operator’s privilege can be operated in Normal mode.
n Configuration Mode
This mode is used for changing the default settings of the window configuration for each user
in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
The pane set to [Hide Always] in CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder is not dis-
played in Configuration mode. Note, however, that the menu bar and the Dynamic Filters
pane are displayed even if they are set to [Hide Always].
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in Configuration
mode, refer to:
“n Starting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Configuration Mode” on page B1-80
For more information about the Message Monitor Definition builder, refer to:
B1.2.6, “CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder” on page B1-47
n Function Check Mode

This mode is used to verify the operation to process A&E messages with CAMS for HIS.
When Function Check is running, the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS dedicated to this
mode will be started. Since the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS runs independently from
the normal operation and monitoring, Function Check can be executed while the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS is running in Normal mode.
The pane that is set to [Hide Always] in CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder will
not be displayed in Function Check mode.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Function Check, refer to:
B1.6, “Function Check of CAMS for HIS” on page B1-85
For more information about the CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder, refer to:

<A3. Operations to Acknowledge A&E Messages and Alarm Status Transition> A3-1
A3. Operations to Acknowledge A&E

Messages and Alarm Status
Transition
This chapter explains how to acknowledge or manually reset A&E messages in the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS, and how the alarm status shifts at that point. The information pri-
marily includes the following:
• Operations to acknowledge A&E messages
• Operations to manually reset A&E messages
• Scope of sharing the result of acknowledged or manually reset A&E messages
• Status transition from occurrence to deletion of process alarm messages
• Status transition from occurrence to deletion of A&E messages other than process alarm
messages

<A3.1 Operations to Acknowledge A&E Messages> A3-2
A3.1 Operations to Acknowledge A&E

Messages
The operation to acknowledge A&E messages is explained below.
• Acknowledge all messages in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
• Acknowledge individual messages in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
• Acknowledge Messages from the Operation and Monitoring Window, etc. Other than the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
n Operation to Acknowledge All Messages in the Message Monitor of

CAMS for HIS
The messages displayed in the A&E Messages pane will be acknowledged. Perform either
one of the following two methods.
• Select [Operation] - [Acknowledge All] in the menu bar.
• Click [Acknowledge All] in the toolbar.
When [Acknowledge All] is selected, the messages that are displayed in the A&E Messages
pane will be acknowledged, but the hidden messages cannot be acknowledged. Moreover,
the messages that deny the acknowledgement right of the user cannot be acknowledged ei-
ther.
n Operation to Acknowledge Individual Messages in the Message

The messages displayed in the A&E Messages pane will be acknowledged. Click the applica-
ble message, and then perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [Operation] - [Acknowledge] in the menu bar.
• Click [Acknowledge] in the toolbar.
However, the messages that deny the acknowledgement right of the user cannot be acknowl-
edged.
n Operation to Acknowledge Messages from the Operation and

Monitoring Window, etc. Other than the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS
Messages can be acknowledged by performing one of the operations described below.
• Click the Ack button in the toolbar of Turning view or Graphic view.
• Assign a system function key command to a function key in advance, and press that key.
• Press the ACKN key on the operation keyboard.

<A3.2 Operations to Manually Reset A&E Messages> A3-3
A3.2 Operations to Manually Reset A&E

Messages
The operation to manually reset messages in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is ex-
plained below. The acknowledged messages displayed in the A&E Messages pane will be
manually reset.
• Manually reset all messages
• Manually reset individual messages
Note, however, that the privilege for manually resetting messages is required. Furthermore,
messages for which manual resetting is not allowed cannot be manually reset.
n Operation to Manually Reset All Messages

Perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [Operation] - [Manual Reset All] in the menu bar.
• Click [Manual Reset All] in the toolbar.
When [Manual Reset All] is selected, the messages that are displayed in the A&E Messages
pane will be manually reset, but those not displayed will not be reset.
n Operation to Manually Reset Individual Messages

Click the applicable message, and then perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [Operation] - [Manual Reset] in the menu bar.
• Click [Manual Reset] in the toolbar.
n A&E Messages that Need to be Manually Reset

This applies to the following messages.
• Messages with no paired recovery messages
Some of the system alarm messages of CENTUM VP, operation guide messages, or A&E
messages of STARDOM and PRM acquired via the OPC A&E server
• Messages for which recovery messages are suppressed

<A3.3 Scope of Sharing the Result of Acknowledged or Manually Reset A&E Messages> A3-4
A3.3 Scope of Sharing the Result of

Acknowledged or Manually Reset A&E
Messages
This section explains about the scope of sharing the result of acknowledged or manually reset
A&E messages.
n Scope of Sharing the Result of Message Processing such as

Acknowledgment or Manual Reset
The table below shows the scope of sharing the result of acknowledged or manually reset
A&E messages. It also shows the scope of sharing the result of operations such as shelving
and suppression.
Table A3.3-1 Scope of Sharing the Result of Processed A&E Messages

Sharing scope
Operation or action in CAMS for HIS Within opera- Equalization Remark
tion group scope
A process alarm message of CENTUM
○
system is generated.
A message other than process alarm
messages of CENTUM system is gener- ○
ated.
Acknowledging process alarm messages
○
of CENTUM system
Acknowledging messages other than Same as when acknowledging
process alarm messages of CENTUM ○ A&E messages on HIS in which
system CAMS for HIS is not enabled
Manually resetting messages other than
process alarm messages of CENTUM ○
system Same as when deleting A&E
Acknowledging recovery messages when messages on HIS in which
messages other than process alarm mes- CAMS for HIS is not enabled
○
sages of CENTUM system are manually
reset
Shelving (not including Auto-Shelving) ○
Starting or canceling suppression of
○
alarm groups
Sharing historical data ○
l Scope of Sharing the Result of Acknowledged Messages

Acknowledged results of process alarms are shared among HISs as follows.
If all of multiple alarms generated from a single tag are acknowledged, the result will be
equalized via FCS.
If some of multiple alarms generated from a single tag are acknowledged, the result will be
equalized via Ethernet, not via FCS.
When the A&E messages other than the process alarm messages are acknowledged on a
CAMS for HIS enabled HIS, the acknowledged status of the A&E messages will be equalized
to all the HISs within the operation group.
However, in any of these cases, those not included in the Equalization Scope will not be
equalized. In other words, HISs in which CAMS for HIS is not enabled will not be equalized.

<A3.3 Scope of Sharing the Result of Acknowledged or Manually Reset A&E Messages> A3-5
The relationship between the Equalization Scope and operation groups is shown in the figure
below.
Project
Equalization Scope
Operation Operation
group A1 group A2
HIS HIS
0163 0164
The result of operation is equalized
Figure A3.3-1 Relationship between Equalization Scope and Operation Groups
l Scope of Sharing the Result of Manual Reset

When messages are manually reset on an HIS in which CAMS for HIS is enabled, the results
are equalized on all HISs within the same operation group. Those not included in the Equali-
zation Scope will not be equalized. In other words, HISs in which CAMS for HIS is not ena-
bled will not be equalized.
l Shared Messages of CAMS for HIS when HIS Restarted

When a HIS is restarted, the HIS will acquire the lost CENTUM system messages or opera-
tion guidance messages occurred when the HIS was restarting from the other HISs in the
same group of CAMS for HIS. However, if the same group HIS is not available, the just restar-
ted HIS will acquire the messages from a HIS in a different CAMS for HIS group. If the just
restarted HIS cannot acquire information from the HIS in the same CAMS for HIS group but
acquire the messages from a HIS in a different CAMS for HIS group, for the message that the
event has not yet vanished but reset and acknowledged on the HIS in a different group, it can-
not be viewed on the just restarted HIS.
For an example, if a system alarm message can be displayed on the HISs in both group A
and group B, the system alarm message is manually reset and acknowledged on a HIS in
group B while the HIS in group A is undergoing a restarting. Consequently, this system alarm
message disappears from the HIS of group B.
When the HIS in group A completed restarting and acquired messages from the HIS of group
B. Since the previously mentioned message has disappeared from the HIS of group, the just
restarted HIS of group A cannot view the system alarm message even through the system
alarm event has not vanished, the message has not be acknowledged on the HIS of group A.

<A3.4 Status Transition from Occurrence to Deletion of Process Alarm Messages> A3-6
A3.4 Status Transition from Occurrence to

Deletion of Process Alarm Messages
Status transition from occurrence to acknowledgement or recovery to deletion of process
alarm messages varies depending on the selection in [Alarm action] in the CAMS for HIS tab
of property sheet of project, as well as the selection in [Auto Clear] of the CAMS for HIS Alarm
builder. The options are as follows.
• Alarm action is set to [Consolidated] and then Auto Clear is set to [None] or [Disable]
• Alarm action is set to [Consolidated] and then Auto Clear is set to [Enable]
• Alarm action is set to [CENTUM original]
This section explains how the status shifts from the time an alarm message is generated to
the time when it is deleted, as well as how the message is displayed in each status.
n When Alarm Action is Set to [Consolidated] and then Auto Clear is

Set to [None] or [Disable]
4 transitional statuses of an alarm, i.e., the statuses when the alarm is raised, acknowledged,
recovered and removed are respectively displayed. The action to shift to each status is illus-
trated in a schematic diagram.
Alarm occurrence
Triggering Message is acknowledged

Acknowledge
phenomenon of the but triggering phenomenon of
alarm still exists the alarm message still exists
(Flashing in red) (Lit in red)
Recovered Recovered or manual reset
Recovered from alarm status Message is already

without acknowledging acknowledged and recovered
a message from alarm status
(Flashing in red) (Flashing in green) (Flashing in green)
Acknowledge the recovery message

Acknowledge the alarm
or recovery message
Deleted from the Message

Figure A3.4-1 Transition of Four Statuses from Occurrence to Deletion of an Alarm
How A&E messages are displayed in each status is explained below.

• When alarm message is not acknowledged and the phenomenon that triggered the alarm
still exists
The alarm message is displayed and the icon at the beginning of the message blinks. If
the message is in the filter or on the shelf, the icon of filter or shelf also blinks. If the mes-
sage is unread, the text information is shown in bold.
• When alarm message is acknowledged and the phenomenon that triggered the alarm still
exists
The acknowledged alarm message is displayed. The icon stops blinking and the bold font
of the message is cancelled.
has vanished (Normal Status)

The alarm message and recovery message are displayed. If either of the messages is ac-
knowledged, both messages are deleted from the Operation and Monitoring window.
• When alarm message is acknowledged and the phenomenon that triggered the alarm has
vanished (Normal Status)
The unacknowledged recovery message is displayed. If the unacknowledged recovery
message is acknowledged, that message is deleted from the Operation and Monitoring
window.
n When Alarm Action is Set to [Consolidated] and then Auto Clear is

Set to [Enable]
The status from occurrence to deletion of an alarm is categorized into three statuses. The ac-
tion to shift to each status is illustrated in a schematic diagram.
Alarm occurrence
Triggering Acknowledge Message is acknowledged

(Flashing in red) (Lit in red)
Recovered
Recovered or manual reset

Recovered from alarm status
without acknowledging
a message
(Flashing in red) (Flashing in green)
Acknowledge the
alarm or recovery message

Figure A3.4-2 Transition of Three Statuses from Occurrence to Deletion of an Alarm
How A&E messages are displayed in each status is explained below.

still exists
The alarm message is displayed and the icon at the beginning of the message blinks. If
the message is in the filter or on the shelf, the icon of filter or shelf also blinks. If the mes-
sage is unread, the text information is shown in bold.
• When alarm message is acknowledged and the phenomenon that triggered the alarm still
exists
The acknowledged alarm message is displayed. The icon stops blinking and the bold font
of the message is cancelled.
has vanished (Normal Status)
The alarm message and recovery message are displayed. If either of the messages is ac-
knowledged, both messages are deleted from the Operation and Monitoring window.
• When alarm message is acknowledged and the phenomenon that triggered the alarm has
vanished (Normal Status)
The acknowledged alarm message is deleted when a rest signal is received. The recov-
ery message is not displayed.

n When Alarm Action is Set to [CENTUM original]

The action varies for Lock type, Non-lock type, and Self-acknowledge type, according to the
Alarm processing level defined in the function block.
For Self-acknowledge type, the buzzer will not sound even if an alarm occurs.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the alarm actions of CENTUM original type, refer to:
• 7.2, "Alarm Priority" in the Human Interface Stations Reference Vol. 2 (IM 33K03F22-50E)
• 7.3, "Alarm Output Actions" in the Human Interface Stations Reference Vol. 2 (IM 33K03F22-50E)
n When Alarm Inhibition (AOF) Mode is Set

When alarm inhibition (AOF) mode is set for a function block, the A&E messages of the inhibi-
ted alarms will not be displayed on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Messages of the
inhibited alarms that were already displayed before AOF is set will be removed from the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS with the timing a new message is generated for the inhibited
alarm.
SEE
ALSO For more information about alarm inhibition (AOF) mode, refer to:
7.3.4, "alarm inhibition (AOF)" in the Human Interface Stations Reference Vol. 2 (IM 33K03F22-50E)

<A3.5 Status Transition from Occurrence to Deletion of A&E Messages other than Process Alarm Messages>
A3-9
A3.5 Status Transition from Occurrence to

Deletion of A&E Messages other than
Process Alarm Messages
Status transition from occurrence to acknowledgement or recovery to deletion of A&E mes-
sages other than process alarm messages varies depending on the selection in [Auto Clear]
of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder. The options are as follows.
• Auto Clear is set to [None] or [Disable]
• Auto Clear is set to [Enable]
This section explains how the status shifts from the time an alarm message is generated to
the time when it is deleted, as well as how the message is displayed in each status.
n When Auto Clear is Set to [None] or [Disable]

4 transitional statuses of an alarm, i.e., the statuses when the alarm is raised, acknowledged,
recovered and removed are respectively displayed. The action to shift to each status is illus-
trated in a schematic diagram.
Alarm occurrence
(*1) Triggering Acknowledge Message is acknowledged (*1)

(In Red) (In Red)
Recovered Recovered or manual reset
(*1) (*1) Recovered from alarm status Message is already (*1)

without acknowledging acknowledged and recovered
a message (*2) from alarm status
(In Red) (In Green) (In Green)
Acknowledge the recovery message

or recovery message

*1: These icons are displayed at the beginning of A&E messages without default tag marks. In case of messages generated by the
CENTUM system, icons fixed for the CENTUM system are displayed.
*2: Operation guide messages are not included.
Figure A3.5-1 Transition of Four Statuses from Occurrence to Deletion of an Alarm
SEE
ALSO For more information about each status, refer to:
“n When Alarm Action is Set to [Consolidated] and then Auto Clear is Set to [None] or [Disable]” on
page A3-6
n When Auto Clear is Set to [Enable]

The status from occurrence to deletion of an alarm is categorized into three statuses. The ac-
tion to shift to each status is illustrated in a schematic diagram.

<A3.5 Status Transition from Occurrence to Deletion of A&E Messages other than Process Alarm Messages>
A3-10
Alarm occurrence
(*1) Triggering Message is acknowledged (*1)

Acknowledge
(In Red) (In Red)
Recovered
(*1) (*1) Recovered from alarm status Recovered or manual reset

without acknowledging
a message (*2)
(In Red) (In Green)

or recovery message

*1: These icons are displayed at the beginning of A&E messages without default tag marks. In case of messages generated by the
CENTUM system, icons fixed for the CENTUM system are displayed.
*2: Operation guide messages are not included.
Figure A3.5-2 Transition of Three Statuses from Occurrence to Deletion of an Alarm
SEE
ALSO For more information about each status, refer to:
“n When Alarm Action is Set to [Consolidated] and then Auto Clear is Set to [Enable]” on page A3-7

<A4. Making it Easy to Find Important Alarms> A4-1
A4. Making it Easy to Find Important

Alarms
This chapter explains the operations for making it easy to find A&E messages on the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The information primarily includes the following:
• Changing the order and format of message display
• Narrowing down to necessary messages only

<A4.1 Operations to Change the Order and Format of Message Display> A4-2
A4.1 Operations to Change the Order and

Format of Message Display
The operation to change the order and format of displaying A&E messages is explained be-
low.
• Sorting the messages
• Displaying the messages in the tree view
• Fixing the message display position
n Operation to Sort Messages

The messages in the A&E Browser pane or the A&E Messages pane can be sorted for dis-
play. The sorting conditions of these panes are not linked so that the messages can be sorted
separately.
Click the name of a column that you want the messages to be sorted by, the column name will
be prefixed with ▲ to indicate that sorting will be performed in ascending order or ▼ to indi-
cate that sorting will be performed in descending order. Messages can also be sorted by two
columns. For an example, you can click Tag Name and sort the messages first and then click
another column while holding the Shift key to sort the previously sorted messages. The col-
umn name for the secondary sorting will be prefixed with a plus (+) or minus (-) sign to indi-
cate ascending or descending order respectively. If you click a column name while holding the
Shift key to start the first sorting, the messages will not be sorted.
When the messages are sorted, if the messages are generated, the new messages will be
displayed in a place according to the previously sorted order.
TIP You cannot sort messages by clicking the [PV (Current Value)] or [ALRM (Current Value)] attribute.
n Operation to Display Messages in the Tree View

The messages displayed in the A&E Messages pane can be sorted. CENTUM process alarm
messages will be grouped per each tag and displayed in the tree view. The messages with
identical tag name will be displayed according to the message priorities.
• Select [View] - [Show Alarm Tree] in the menu bar.
• Click [Switch Alarm View] in the toolbar.
The display pattern switches between “Show Alarm Tree” and “Alarm list” every time this op-
eration is repeated. The figure below shows an example of the tree view.
Date Source Message
□ 10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 2FIC1201.HI 2FIC1201 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 50.0 KM3/H HI Recover
□ 10/22/2010 2:36:53 PM 1FIC1205.LO 1FIC1205 Flow Upper LineA UnitB PV = 50.0 KM3/H LO Recover
■ 10/22/2010 2:36:51 PM 2FIC1205.HI 2FIC1205 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 68.9 KM3/H HI
Figure A4.1-1 Tree View Example

<A4.1 Operations to Change the Order and Format of Message Display> A4-3
n Operation to Temporarily Retain Message Display Position

The messages displayed in the A&E Messages pane can be temporarily retained in the pane
so as to prevent the important messages from scrolling out.
1. If the A&E Messages pane is displayed in the tree view, switch to the list view.
2. Click the applicable message.
Note, however, that if all messages are displayed in the A&E Messages pane, the display po-
sition cannot be fixed.
l Operation to Cancel the Fixed Message Display Position

Cancel the selection of the applicable message in the A&E Messages pane. Examples of the
operation are as follows.
• Press the ESC key on the keyboard.
• Switch the A&E Messages pane to the tree view.
• Move the vertical scroll bar to move the applicable message out of the display area.
• Move the applicable message out of the display area by changing the size of the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS or moving the boundaries of each pane.
• Change the contents displayed in the A&E Messages pane by changing the shelf and/or
filter.
• Click on an area outside of the A&E Messages pane.
• Click on the Operation and Monitoring window, etc. other than the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS to deactivate the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Call the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS again while the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS is being displayed.
l Automatic Cancellation of a Fixed Message Display Position

In the following cases, the fixed message display position is automatically cancelled.
• When the applicable message was deleted after the process of being acknowledged
and/or recovered.
• When the applicable message was deleted because the number of messages with a pri-
ority level higher than that of the applicable message exceeded the maximum number of
alarms that can be stored by CAMS for HIS.

<A4.2 Narrowing Down to Applicable Messages Only> A4-4
A4.2 Narrowing Down to Applicable Messages

Only
The operation to narrow down to necessary messages only is explained below.
• Filtering
• Dynamic filtering
• Load Shedding
• Shelving
• Suppression

A4.2.1 Filtering
Filtering refers to an operation to call the A&E messages that meet a certain condition.
n Filtering Operation
Click the icon for the applicable filter in the Filters pane. The filtered messages will be dis-
played in the A&E Messages pane. Open the All Filters tab and click the user icon at the top
of the tree to display all messages that can be monitored with the user’s privilege level.
l Filter Types
There four types of filters. Here, the filter types will be explained according to their priority or-
der.
1. Default Filters
There are 6 defiantly built-in filters. These default filters cannot be modified or deleted.
• SIS: For displaying SCS A&E messages of ProSafe-RS
• SIS\System: For displaying SCS system alarm messages of ProSafe-RS
• SIS\Process: For displaying SCS process alarm messages of ProSafe-RS
• System: For displaying system alarm messages of DCS
• Process: For displaying SCS process alarm messages of DCS
• Operator Guide: For displaying operation guidance messages of DCS
2. System filters
These filters are common filters for all HISs in the equalization scope. To create system
filters, the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS needs to be started in Configuration mode.
3. User filters
These filters are common filters for the specific users of all HISs in the equalization
scope. To create user filters, the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS needs to be started in
Configuration mode.
4. Operator Created Filters
These filters are the filters created by operators on the normal mode Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to create sistem filters and user filters, refer to:
• B1.4.5, “Setting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS Window Configuration” on page B1-77
• “n Starting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Configuration Mode” on page B1-80
n Information Displayed in the Filter

If there are any filtered messages, the corresponding information will be displayed in the filter.
The figure below shows a display example.
User1
(3/5/7)
Filter name
Number of A&E messages
Figure A4.2.1-1 Display Example of Filter
From the left, the numbers stand for the following:

Number of active alarm messages, number of unacknowledged messages, the total number
of filtered messages
n Operation to Stop Filtering

• Press the ESC key on the keyboard.
• Click on the Filters pane other than the target filter, or the Shelves pane.
n Scope of Sharing the Result of Filtered Messages

Filtering of messages on a HIS does not affect other HISs.

A4.2.2 Dynamic Filtering

Dynamic filtering refers to an operation to narrow down the messages by combining existing
filters.
n Overview of Dynamic Filtering

Define new filter conditions by combining two or more existing filters directly on the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS. This makes it possible to easily define a condition without having to
reenter the previous conditions or creating new filters.
n Dynamic Filtering Operation

TIP Filters that use the batch ID as a filter condition cannot be applied for dynamic filtering.
The operation is explained below.

1. The [Dynamic Filter Pane] setting on CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder
needs to be set to [Auto Show].
2. Drag the icon of the target filter from the Filters pane to the area near the Status bar.
The Dynamic Filters pane will be displayed below the Details pane.
3. Drop the filter icon in the Dynamic Filters pane. Drag and drop all target filters in the same
manner.
If an incorrect filter icon is placed by mistake, drag it out of the Dynamic Filters pane.
FCS0102
FCS0102
FCS0102
Drag with the mouse. Once the icon reaches the bottom of the window,
the Dynamic Filter pane appears.
Figure A4.2.2-1 Dragging and Dropping Filter Icons
4. Drag the operator icon from the left edge of the Dynamic Filters pane and drop it between
filter icons. If an incorrect operator icon is placed by mistake, drag it out of the Dynamic
Filters pane.

FCS0102 FCS0104 FCS0102 FCS0104
Drag with the mouse. Filter rules are defined.
Figure A4.2.2-2 Dragging and Dropping Operator Icons
Right after dropping the icon, the dynamic filtering will start and a new filter will be created
automatically in the Filters pane.
5. To register the newly defined filter conditions, click the button to register filter conditions.
FCS0102 FCS0104 FCS0102 FCS0104
To register as filters, click the [Set Filter Rules] button. Filter rules are registered as new filters.
Figure A4.2.2-3 Operation to Register Filter Rules
SEE
ALSO For more information about the setting to show the Dynamic Filters pane, refer to:
“n List of CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder Setting Items” on page B2-7
l Operators that can be Defined for Dynamic Filtering

There are four types of buttons can be defined for dynamic filtering.
Figure A4.2.2-4 OR operator
Define an OR operator.
Figure A4.2.2-5 NOT operator

Define a NOT operator.
Figure A4.2.2-6 parentheses
Define parentheses.
Figure A4.2.2-7 newly defined filtering conditions
Register the newly defined filtering conditions.

If no operator icon is defined, AND will be applied.
n Operation to Stop Dynamic Filtering

Close the Dynamic Filters pane.

A4.2.3 Load Shedding

Load Shedding is used to automatically start filtering.
n Overview of Load Shedding

When the number of messages generated in a certain amount of time exceeds the threshold,
filtering is started automatically. The length of time, threshold and filters need to be set up in
advance.
n Operation to Enable Load Shedding

1. Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
2. Select [Tools] - [Options…] in the menu bar.
The Option window will be displayed.
3. Click the Filter Pane tab.
Option
A&E Browser Pane A&E Messages Pane Dynamic Filters Pane Print
General Toolbar Status Bar Shelves Pane Filter Pane
Icon Blinking ON OFF Reset to System Default

Number of Active Alarms Show Hide Load Shedding Rules
Number of Unacknowledged Alarms Show Hide Filter Name
Total Number of Alarms Show Hide Reference Time (Sec) 60

Emphases on Unread Alarms ON OFF Number of Alarms 100
Image of Dynamic Filter

Favorites Tab
All Filters Tab Height of Filter 36
Font Modify MS UI Gothic
Text Color (Selected)
Text Color
Background Color (Selected)
Background Color
Apply OK Cancel
Figure A4.2.3-1 Filter Pane Tab in the Option Window
4. Enter the Filter Name in the Load Shedding Rules.

This filter is used when Load Shedding is started. Filters that use the batch ID as a filter
condition cannot be used for Load Shedding.
5. Enter the Reference Time (Sec) and Number of Alarms in the Load Shedding Rules.
These conditions are used to start Load Shedding. Load Shedding will be started when
the number of messages generated within the Reference Time exceeds the Number of
Alarms specified.
6. Click [Apply] or [OK].
7. Select [Commit Changes] in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Perform either one of
the following two methods.
• Select [File] - [Commit Changes] in the menu bar.
• Click [Commit Changes] in the toolbar.

n Operation to Stop Load Shedding

The operation is as follows.
1. Open the Option window from the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, and then open the
Filter Pane tab.
2. Delete the three items in the Load Shedding Rules.
3. Click [Apply] or [OK] on the Filter Pane tab, and then select [Commit Changes] on the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.

A4.2.4 Shelving
This section explains the functions and operations of shelving.
n Overview of Shelving
Shelving means to temporarily move the low-priority messages from the A&E Messages pane
to the shelves. The following are three types of shelving:
• Continuous Shelving
• One-Shot Shelving
• Auto-Shelving
l Continuous Shelving
Individual messages displayed in the A&E Messages pane are the targets of Continuous
Shelving.
Applicable messages are shelved until the pre-determined timeout period elapses. If the
same message is received again before the timeout period elapses, it is also shelved. Fur-
thermore, if there are any related recovery messages, they are also shelved.
l One-Shot Shelving
Individual messages displayed in the A&E Messages pane are the targets of One-Shot Shelv-
ing.
Applicable messages are shelved until the pre-determined timeout period elapses.If the A&E
Messages pane is displayed in the tree view, messages in the hierarchy below the shelved
messages are also shelved.
l Auto-Shelving
Filters displayed in the Filters pane are the targets of Auto-Shelving.
Messages in the shelved filters are shelved until the pre-determined timeout period elapses. If
the same message is received again before the timeout period elapses, it is also shelved.
Furthermore, if there are any related recovery messages, they are also shelved.
Filters that use the batch ID as a filter condition cannot be applied for Auto-Shelving.
l Cautions for Auto-Shelving

Filters that can be applied for Auto-Shelving vary depending on the scope of shelving. There
are two types of the scope of shelving: SYSTEM and USER.
• When the scope of shelving is SYSTEM
Only system filters can be shelved.
• When the scope of shelving is USER
All filters can be shelved.
l Maximum Number of Messages that can be Shelved

The following table shows the maximum numbers of messages that can be shelved.
Table A4.2.4-1 Maximum Number of Messages that can be Shelved

Maximum number of messages that can be
Type of shelving Scope of shelving shelved
Per user Entire system
Continuous Shelving SYSTEM - 100 alarm sources
USER 100 alarm sources 25,000 alarm sources

Maximum number of messages that can be
Type of shelving Scope of shelving shelved
Per user Entire system
One-Shot Shelving SYSTEM - 100 messages
USER 100 messages 25,000 messages
Auto-Shelving SYSTEM - 1 filter
USER 1 filter 250 filters
If shelving is attempted exceeding the maximum number of messages, an error dialog box is
displayed.
Message
Exceeded the high limit of number of messages in

which one user can perform shelving.
Figure A4.2.4-1 Error Dialog Box when Shelving is Attempted Exceeding the Maximum Number of
Messages
If the error dialog box is displayed, click the close button at the upper-right corner to close it
and adjust the number of A&E messages being shelved, and then try to shelve messages
again.
l Messages that cannot be Shelved

Messages with the Shelving attribute set to [Disable] in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder can-
not be shelved. An error dialog box will be displayed if an attempt is made to shelve such
messages.
If an attempt is made to select and shelve multiple messages at once, only those with the
Shelving attribute set to [Enable] will be shelved. The messages that cannot be shelved will
remain highlighted and displayed in the A&E Messages pane.
If an attempt is made to execute Auto-Shelving of filters, only the messages in the filters with
the Shelving attribute set to [Enable] will be shelved. The messages that cannot be shelved
will remain in the filters. Even if all messages in the filters could not be shelved, the filters will
be subject to the Auto-Shelving process. Accordingly, if any messages with the Shelving at-
tribute set to [Enable] are added to the filters before the timeout period elapses, those mes-
sages will be shelved.
n Shelving Operation
The Shelves pane has shelves for which Shelving conditions are defined. To start shelving,
drag and drop applicable messages and filters to a shelf. The figure below shows an opera-
tion example.

Drag and drop it onto
a desired shelf.
CAMS for HIS : Message Monitor CAMS for HIS : Message Monitor
Shelving Shelving
2008/03/23 11:01:10.400 FIC001.PV HI CL-102Cm
Filter Filter
All Filters Favorites All Filters Favorites
2008/03/23 11:24:10.400 TIC001.PV HH CY555 L 2008/03/23 11:24:10.400 TIC001.PV HH CY555 L

2008/03/23 11:14:10.400 TIC051.PV HI CY222 LG 2008/03/23 11:05:10.400 PID001.PV HI CG320
2008/03/23 11:05:10.400 PID001.PV HI CG320
2008/03/23 11:01:10.400 FIC001.PV HI CL-102Cm
Use the mouse to select an The shelf where the alarm was
alarm you want to shelve. dropped changes its color.
Figure A4.2.4-2 Shelving Operation
When you click a shelf, shelved messages are displayed in the A&E Messages pane.
TIP The following method can also be used to start shelving.
1. Select the applicable message or filter.
2. Select [Operation] - [Shelve] in the menu bar.
The shelf names that can be selected are displayed.
3. Select the shelf name.
n Information Displayed in Shelf

If there are any messages that are shelved, the corresponding information is displayed in that
shelf. The figure below shows a display example.
Shelf name
Shelf 01(2/7/11/1)
16:59
Continuous_test
Description of shelf Number of the A&E messages Pre-determined timeout period
Figure A4.2.4-3 Display Example of Shelf
From the left, the numbers stand for the followings: Number of messages that the triggering
phenomena still exist; Number of unacknowledged messages; Total number of shelved mes-
sages; Total number of shelved messages that have timed out.
l Timeout Notification
If any messages time out while still being shelved, the icon of the corresponding shelf
changes its shape to that of an alarm clock to indicate the occurrence of timeout. If you click
the shelf, the icon of the messages that timed out will also change its shape to that of an
alarm clock in the A&E Messages pane.
The icon that notifies the timeout is as shown below.
Figure A4.2.4-4 Timeout Notification Icon

n Operation to Stop Shelving

To stop shelving, remove the applicable messages from the shelf. You can stop shelving in
the following methods:
• Stop all shelving at once.
• Stop shelving individually.
• Stop shelving by using the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf dialog box.
(*1)
*1: You can use this method only for A&E messages that are continuously being shelved.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf dialog box, refer to:
“n Operation to Stop Continuous Shelving” on page A4-15
l Operation to Stop All Shelving At Once

Right-click the applicable shelf and select [Reset Shelf] from the menu that is displayed.
TIP The following method can also be used to stop all shelving at once.
1. Click the applicable shelf.
2. Perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [Operation] - [Reset Shelf] in the menu bar.
• Click [Clear Shelf] in the toolbar.
l Stopping Shelving Individually

1. Click the applicable shelf.
The messages that are shelved are displayed in the A&E Messages pane.
2. Drag the applicable messages and drop them in the Filters pane.
l Cases where Shelving Stops Automatically

Shelving automatically stops in the following cases.
• Messages timed out while still being shelved.
Messages that timed out will remain shelved until manually removed from the shelf or de-
leted after being acknowledged and/or recovered.
• The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is rebooted after deletion of the shelf with the Au-
to attribute.
n Operation to Stop Continuous Shelving

To stop Continuous Shelving, you can also use the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous
Shelf dialog box instead of using the aforementioned method. This dialog box is helpful when
stopping the shelving for individual messages that have been deleted from the Message Mon-
itor of CAMS for HIS after acknowledged or recovered.
The operation is as follows:
1. In the Shelves pane, click the Continuous Shelf you want to stop.
2. Perform one of the following operations:

• From the menu bar, select [Operation] > [Reset Individual Messages in Continuous
Shelf (I)...].
• In the Shelves pane, right-click and select [Reset Individual Messages in Continuous
Shelf (I)...].
The Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf dialog box appears, showing the
A&E messages on the selected Continuous Shelf. While the Reset Individual Messages
in Continuous Shelf dialog box is displayed, updating of display on the Message Monitor
of CAMS for HIS continues.
Display area of shelved-message list Time when the shelved message was first generated
Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf : ABC Shelf
Date of shelving Alarm Source Message Date

2013/02/04 8:40 2FIC100.HI 2FIC100 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 50.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 8:38
2013/02/04 9:35 2FIC200.LO 2FIC200 Flow Lower LineA UnitE PV = 20.0 KM3/H LO 2013/02/04 9:34
2013/02/04 10:57 2FIC101.LO 2FIC101 Flow Lower LineB UnitA PV = 30.0 KM3/H LO 2013/02/04 10:53
2013/02/04 13:24 2FIC202.HH 2FIC202 Flow Lower LineA UnitC PV = 80.0 KM3/H HH 2013/02/04 13:21
2013/02/04 15:14 2FIC201.HI 2FIC201 Flow Lower LineA UnitC PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 15:11
2013/02/04 15:32 2FIC303.HI 2FIC303 Flow Lower LineC UnitC PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 15:29
2013/02/04 15:40 2FIC302.HI 2FIC302 Flow Lower LineC UnitA PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 15:39
2013/02/04 15:45 2FIC205.HI 2FIC205 Flow Lower LineC UnitD PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 15:43
2013/02/04 15:55 2FIC300.HI 2FIC300 Flow Lower LineC UnitF PV = 80.0 KM3/H HH 2013/02/04 15:50
2013/02/04 16:03 2FIC206.HI 2FIC206 Flow Lower LineB UnitE PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 16:02
2013/02/04 16:30 2FIC305.HI 2FIC305 Flow Lower LineE UnitA PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 16:29
2013/02/04 16:52 2FIC102.HI 2FIC102 Flow Lower LineA UnitB PV = 80.0 KM3/H HH 2013/02/04 16:51
2013/02/04 17:01 2FIC106.HI 2FIC106 Flow Lower LineA UnitF PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 17:00
2013/02/04 17:05 2FIC103.HI 2FIC103 Flow Lower LineA UnitC PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 17:04
2013/02/04 17:21 2FIC104.HI 2FIC104 Flow Lower LineA UnitD PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 17:21
2013/02/04 17:33 2FIC209.HI 2FIC209 Flow Lower LineB UnitI PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 17:32
2013/02/04 17:43 2FIC208.HI 2FIC208 Flow Lower LineB UnitH PV = 80.0 KM3/H HH 2013/02/04 17:43
2013/02/04 17:57 2FIC207.HI 2FIC207 Flow Lower LineB UnitG PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 17:57
2013/02/04 18:19 2FIC306.HI 2FIC306 Flow Lower LineC UnitF PV = 90.0 KM3/H HH 2013/02/04 18:19
2013/02/04 18:23 2FIC400.HI 2FIC400 Flow Lower LineD UnitA PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 18:22
2013/02/04 18:44 2FIC406.HI 2FIC406 Flow Lower LineD UnitF PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 18:43
2013/02/04 18:58 2FIC501.HI 2FIC501 Flow Lower LineE UnitB PV = 80.0 KM3/H HH 2013/02/04 18:57
2013/02/04 19:13 2FIC403.HI 2FIC403 Flow Lower LineD UnitC PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 19:12
2013/02/04 19:25 2FIC506.HI 2FIC506 Flow Lower LineE UnitH PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 19:25
2013/02/04 19:34 2FIC404.HI 2FIC404 Flow Lower LineD UnitE PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 19:33
2013/02/04 20:33 2FIC407.HI 2FIC407 Flow Lower LineD UnitJ PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 20:33
2013/02/04 20:43 2FIC409.HI 2FIC409 Flow Lower LineD UnitK PV = 80.0 KM3/H HH 2013/02/04 20:43
2013/02/04 20:56 2FIC209.HI 2FIC209 Flow Lower LineB UnitJ PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 20:56
2013/02/04 21:10 2FIC505.HI 2FIC505 Flow Lower LineE UnitG PV = 88.0 KM3/H HH 2013/02/04 21:10
2013/02/04 21:17 2FIC507.HI 2FIC507 Flow Lower LineE UnitH PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 21:17
2013/02/04 21:30 2FIC600.HI 2FIC600 Flow Lower LineE UnitA PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 21:29
2013/02/04 22:02 2FIC608.HI 2FIC608 Flow Lower LineF UnitI PV = 80.0 KM3/H HH 2013/02/04 22:00
2013/02/04 22:17 2FIC603.HI 2FIC603 Flow Lower LineF UnitD PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 22:17
2013/02/04 22:32 2FIC701.HI 2FIC701 Flow Lower LineG UnitB PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 22:31
2013/02/04 22:38 2FIC704.HI 2FIC704 Flow Lower LineG UnitE PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 22:38
2013/02/04 23:21 2FIC801.HI 2FIC801 Flow Lower LineH UnitB PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 23:21
2013/02/04 23:41 2FIC800.HI 2FIC800 Flow Lower LineH UnitA PV = 80.0 KM3/H HH 2013/02/04 23:41
2013/02/04 23:49 2FIC803.HI 2FIC803 Flow Lower LineH UnitD PV = 60.0 KM3/H HI 2013/02/04 23:49
Number of shelved alarm sources:40 Reset
Total number of shelved messages in the Continuous Shelf
Figure A4.2.4-5 Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf Dialog Box
TIP You cannot assign the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf dialog box calling function to graphic
views.
3. Select the A&E message you want to stop shelving and click the [Reset] button. You can
select either a single or multiple A&E messages.
Continuous Shelving for the selected A&E message(s) stops.
l Basic Specification of the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf

Dialog Box
The Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf dialog box can display up to 100 mes-
sages. By default, messages are displayed in the chronological order with the earliest shelved
message first. The colors of characters and background and whether the zebra background

color is enabled are according to the settings applied to the A&E Messages pane of the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
l Basic Operation of the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf

Dialog Box
By dragging with the mouse, you can change the size and position of the dialog box and the
column width of each item displayed in the dialog box. You can click an item name, such as
"Source" or "Date" to sort the A&E massages in the ascending or descending order. After
sorting, a symbol "△" indicating the ascending order or "▽" indicating the descending order
appears at the head of the item name. You cannot change the display order of items or sort
with two sorting conditions: for example, sort by "Source" and then further sort by "Date."
Once you close the dialog box and open it again, the size and position of the dialog box and
the column widths are reset to the initial state and the results of sorting are also reset.
You cannot print the contents shown in the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf
dialog box.
l Copying Messages
You can copy the A&E messages displayed in the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous
Shelf dialog box on a line-by-line basis. Select the message you want to copy and press the
[Ctrl] key and [C] key on your keyboard together. You can select a single or multiple A&E
messages.
l Closing the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf Dialog Box

To close the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf dialog box, perform either of the
following operations:
• Click the close button of the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf dialog box.
• Click on an area outside of the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf dialog
box.
• Activate the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf dialog box and press the
[Esc] key on your keyboard.
l When Information About Shelved Messages Cannot Be Acquired

In the following cases, you cannot display the Reset Individual Messages in Continuous Shelf
dialog box because information about A&E messages on certain Continuous Shelf cannot be
acquired.
• During downloading after changing the name of a Continuous Shelf in the CAMS for HIS
Shelf builder
• During downloading after deleting a Continuous Shelf in the CAMS for HIS Shelf builder
An error message is displayed when the message information cannot be acquired.
Message
A list of messages could not be acquired during

shelving.
Figure A4.2.4-6 Error Dialog Box when Information About Shelved Messages Cannot Be Acquired
In these situations, click the close button to close the dialog box, and call the Reset Individual
Messages in Continuous Shelf dialog box again after the downloading is completed.

n Scope of Sharing the Result of Shelving

Whether or not to share the result of shelving with other HISs depends on the scope of shelv-
ing. There are two types of the scope of shelving: SYSTEM and USER.
• When the scope of shelving is SYSTEM
The result is shared on HISs within the Equalization Scope.
• When the scope of shelving is USER
The result is shared on HISs to which the user is logged on as the same user.

A4.2.5 Suppression
Suppression is a unique function of CAMS for HIS. This section explains the functions and
operations of Suppression.
n Overview of Suppression
The Suppression function is used to suppress low-priority messages. Suppressed messages
are not displayed in the Operation and Monitoring windows of HIS.
You can start or cancel Suppression whenever required while operating and monitoring the
plant. You can apply Suppression to each alarm group or station. You cannot apply Suppres-
sion to individual messages or to each plant hierarchy.
The display actions for Suppressed messages are as follows:
• Messages already displayed before starting Suppression
These messages remain on the display after Suppression is started; however, they will be
removed upon reception of their recovery messages.
• Messages generated while they are Suppressed
If their recovery messages have not yet been received when the Suppression is cancel-
led, these messages will be displayed.
If their recovery messages have been received while Suppressed, these messages will
not be displayed even after the Suppression is cancelled.
• Historical data of Suppressed messages
Because Suppressed messages are retained as historical data, you can use the Histori-
cal Viewer of CAMS for HIS to confirm the messages generated or recovered while they
were Suppressed.
SEE
ALSO For more information about alarm display actions when Suppression is applied to process alarm messages,
refer to:
“l Message Display Action when Suppression is Executed” on page A6-4
n Suppression Operation
Assign the command to start suppression to the objects, such as touch targets, buttons and
soft keys in the Graphic view of HIS. Click the applicable object to start suppression. The
command to execute suppression is as follows.
(CENTUM VP installation folder)\Program\BKHCAMS_SON.exe△GroupName
△ : Space
GroupName : Alarm group name or station name
TIP If you have added or deleted any stations to apply Suppression, start the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder,
save the builder data, and then download it to all HISs. You must perform this task regardless of whether you
have changed data of the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder.
n Information Displayed during Suppression

If there is an alarm group or station that is suppressed, the corresponding information will be
displayed in the Suppression dialog box. Perform either one of the following two methods in
the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS to display the Suppression dialog box.
• Select [View] - [Suppression…] in the menu bar.

• Click [Suppression] in the toolbar.
The figure below shows a display example of the Suppression dialog box.
Suppression
Update Cancel
Group Name State Operation Description

FCS0101 Suppressed Cancel FCS1 in area 1
GRP1 Suppressed Cancel GRP1
Figure A4.2.5-1 Display Example of Suppression Dialog Box
• Update
Click this button to check the latest suppression state. The Suppression dialog box that
has been opened will not be automatically updated.
• Cancel
Click this button to cancel updating the Suppression dialog box. This does not cancel the
suppression function itself.
• Group Name
The suppressed alarm group name or station name is displayed.
• State
[Suppressed] is displayed for the suppressed alarm group or station.
• Operation
[Cancel] is displayed for the suppressed alarm group or station. Click this button to cancel
the suppression function.
• Description
The station comment or alarm group name is displayed.
n Operation to Stop Suppression

There are two types of operation to cancel suppression.
• Cancel from the Graphic view.
• Cancel from the Suppression dialog box.
l Operation to Cancel from the Graphic View

Assign the command to cancel suppression to the objects, such as touch targets, buttons and
soft keys in the Graphic view of HIS. Click the applicable object to cancel suppression. The
command to cancel suppression is as follows.
(CENTUM VP installation folder)\Program\BKHCAMS_SOF.exe△GroupName
△ : Space

GroupName : Alarm group name or station name
l Operation to Cancel from the Suppression Dialog Box

The operation is explained below:
1. Display the Suppression dialog box, and perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [View] - [Suppression…] in the menu bar.
• Click [Suppression] in the toolbar.
2. Click [Cancel] displayed in the Operation column of the applicable alarm group or station.
3. Click [Update] to check if suppression has been cancelled.
The alarm group or station for which suppression has been cancelled are deleted from
the Suppression dialog box.
l Note Regarding the Behavior When Suppression is Cancelled

When suppression is cancelled, the A&E messages generated during the suppression are
transferred to the alarm buffer of CAMS for HIS. If the number of A&E messages exceeds the
maximum number of alarms that CAMS for HIS can store, low-priority messages are deleted
and removed from the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. A possible case is as follows: A&E
messages being monitored suddenly disappear on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS be-
cause another operator has cancelled the suppression.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation when the number of messages has exceeded the maximum num-
ber that can be stored by CAMS for HIS, refer to:
“n Operation when the Number of Messages has Exceeded the Maximum Number that can be Stored
by CAMS for HIS” on page A1-1
n Scope of Sharing the Result of Suppression

The result of suppression is shared on all HISs within the Equalization Scope.

Blank Page
<A5. Saving Text Files on the Details Pane while Monitoring Alarms> A5-1
A5. Saving Text Files on the Details

Pane while Monitoring Alarms
On the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, you can save text files on the Details pane while
monitoring alarms. This chapter explains this function. The information primarily includes the
following.
• Prepare a text file in advance and make it displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS.
• Edit the text file that has been prepared in advance in the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS while performing the operation and monitoring function.
• Directly create a text file in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS while performing the
operation and monitoring function.
n Overview of the Function to Save Text Files on the Details Pane

When you select a single message in the A&E Messages pane, the additional information of
that message will be displayed in the Details pane. The content can be defined in advance
and put into an external text file. On the Guidance tab of the Details pane, the content can be
displayed and edited. Even if a text file is not prepared in advance, texts can be directly en-
tered and saved in a file on the Guidance tab.

<A5.1 Operations to Display the External Text File in the Details Pane> A5-2
A5.1 Operations to Display the External Text

File in the Details Pane
This section explains how to display a text file that was prepared in advance in the Details
pane. The section also explains how to edit the text file while performing the operation and
monitoring function.
n Setting Required to Display a Text File in the Details Pane

The outline of operation is as follows.
1. In [Guidance] of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, enter the name of the text file you pre-
pared and download the engineering data.
2. Use the Configurator of CAMS for HIS to download the text file to a predefined location.
3. If necessary, on the Configurator of CAMS for HIS, configure so that the text file can be
edited in the Detailed pane.
The operations on the Configurator of CAMS for HIS should be performed on the Download
Master HIS.
TIP You can also use a PDF file as the external file, but you must be careful about its security. Using a PDF file
allows saving it as another file or deleting the file through the dialog box for confirming the saving destination
that appears when you save the file.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the Download Master, refer to:
l Operation in the CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder

1. Open the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder and enter the file name (.txt) in [Guidance] of the
applicable A&E message.
2. After saving the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, download it to the engineering database.
l Downloading the Text File

1. From the Start menu, select [All Programs] > [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] > [Configurator of
CAMS for HIS].
Configurator of CAMS for HIS will be started.

Configurator of CAMS for HIS
File Tools
Message Monitor Configuration
Style Settings
Alarm Generator
Figure A5.1-1 Configurator of CAMS for HIS
TIP If HIS-TSE is being used, only one unit within the HIS-TSE clients can start Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
2. Select [File] > [Download External File] in the menu bar.

The Download External File dialog box is displayed.
Download External File
Source File Name

...
Destination File Name

...
Download Cancel
Figure A5.1-2 Download External File Dialog Box
3. Enter the path and the name of the external file specified on CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
in [Source File Name]. You can also select it from the dropdown list.
4. Enter the following in [Destination File Name].
<CENTUM VP Installation Folder>\CAMS\database\httppost
You can also select it from the dropdown list.
5. Click [Download].
The text file downloading process begins. After the downloading is finished, the text file is
displayed on the Guidance tab of the Details pane.
l Enabling Text File Editing in the Details Pane

1. Start the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
2. Click [Style Settings].
The Style Settings dialog box is displayed.

Style Settings
Alarm Attribute
Specify Alarm Attributes
Select Alarm Attributes
All Alarm Attributes
Guidance
Editable (Text File Only)
OK Cancel
Figure A5.1-3 Style Settings Dialog Box
TIP You can also select [Tools] > [Style Settings] in the menu bar to display the Style Settings dialog box.
3. Select the [Editable (Text File Only)] option and click [OK].
The Style Settings dialog box closes and you are brought back to the Configurator of
CAMS for HIS.
4. On the menu bar, select [File] > [Download].
The Reason for the Change dialog box is displayed.
5. Enter the reason and then click [Download].
The settings are downloaded.
SEE
ALSO For more information about downloading from Configurator of CAMS for HIS, refer to:
“n Operation to Download Engineering Data and External Files” on page B1-81
n Operation to Edit the Prepared Text File while Performing the

Operation and Monitoring Function
Before performing this operation, you need to enable editing of text files.
1. In the A&E Messages pane of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, click the message
you want to edit text.
The file name and contents of the text file are displayed on the Guidance tab of the De-
tails pane. At the same time, the [Edit] button appears to the right of the text file name.
FileName: FIC001_LO.txt Edit
Figure A5.1-4 Example of [Edit] Button Displayed on the Guidance Tab
2. Click [Edit].
The text file can now be edited. At this time, the [Edit] button disappears, and the [Save]
and [Cancel] buttons appear.

FileName: FIC001_LO.txt Save Cancel
Figure A5.1-5 Example of [Save] and [Cancel] Buttons Displayed on the Guidance Tab
3. Edit the text file on the Guidance tab.

4. Click [Save] to save the edited text.
The text is saved in the text file of the name defined in [Guidance] of the CAMS for HIS
Alarm builder.
If you want to quit the editing without saving, click [Cancel].
The display returns to the state of step 1.
If the same text file name is assigned to multiple alarm sources in the CAMS for HIS Alarm
builder and if you edit and save the text file in the Details pane of one of the alarm messages,
the text file after the editing will be displayed also for the other alarm messages to which the
same file name is assigned.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the setting required to allow editing of the text file, refer to:
“l Enabling Text File Editing in the Details Pane” on page A5-3

<A5.2 Operation to Directly Enter and Save Texts in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS> A5-6
A5.2 Operation to Directly Enter and Save Texts

in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
Even if a text file is not prepared in advance, you can directly enter and save texts in the De-
tails pane while performing the operation and monitoring function. This section explains how
to use this function.
n Setting Required to Enter Text in the Message Monitor of CAMS for

HIS
The outline of operation is as follows.
1. In [Guidance] of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, enter the desired name of the text file
and download the engineering data.
2. On the Configurator of CAMS for HIS, configure so that the text file can be edited in the
Detailed pane.
The operations on the Configurator of CAMS for HIS should be performed on the Download
Master HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the settings required to edit text files in the Details pane, refer to:
“l Enabling Text File Editing in the Details Pane” on page A5-3
For more information about the operation in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, refer to:
“l Operation in the CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder” on page A5-2
n Operation to Enter and Edit Texts while Performing the Operation

and Monitoring Function
1. Enable editing of the text file.
2. In the A&E Messages pane of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, click the message
you want to edit text.
The [Edit] button appears on the right edge of the Guidance tab of the Details pane.
3. Click [Edit].
Text can now be entered and/or edited. At this time, the [Edit] button disappears, and the
[Save] and [Cancel] buttons appear.
4. Enter and/or edit texts on the Guidance tab.
5. Click [Save] to save the text.
The saved text file is stored in the following folder.
<CENTUM VP Installation Folder>\CAMS\database\httppost
If the same text file name is assigned to multiple alarm sources in the CAMS for HIS Alarm
builder and if you edit and save the text file in the Details pane of one of the alarm messages,
the text file after the editing will be displayed also for the other alarm messages to which the
same file name is assigned.

<A6. Relationship between CAMS for HIS and HIS> A6-1
A6. Relationship between CAMS for HIS

and HIS
This chapter explains how an HIS acts when CAMS for HIS is enabled and so forth. The infor-
mation primarily includes the following.
• How the result of message processing in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is dis-
played in other Operation and Monitoring windows
• How the result of message processing in the Operation and Monitoring windows other
than the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS
• Coordination between the CAMS for HIS functions and other HIS functions
• Differences between HISs in which CAMS for HIS is enabled and those in which CAMS
for HIS is disabled
n Roles of an HIS
Here, the two roles played by the HIS will be explained.
• Notifying a transition in the plant status
The HIS automatically performs the function.
• Displaying the current plant status
The operator performs the function as necessary.
These roles are summarized below.
l Operation to Notify a Transition in the Plant Status

A message is displayed, an icon blinks or a buzzer sounds. Examples of these functions are
as follows.
• Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
• Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
• System Message Banner
• Buzzer
• Printer
l Operation to Display the Plant Status

The current plant status is displayed when the operator performs an operation such as open-
ing the target window. Examples of these functions are as follows.
• Faceplate view
• Tuning view
• Graphic View with overview attribute
• Objects with overview attribute on an HIS
• View tab of the Overview Toolbox of the Browser bar
• SFC view
• SEBOL view
• Process Report view
• Operation keyboard LEDs

<A6.1 How the Result of Message Processing in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is Displayed in Other
Operation and Monitoring Windows> A6-2
A6.1 How the Result of Message Processing in

the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is
Displayed in Other Operation and
Monitoring Windows
This section explains how the result of acknowledged or suppressed messages in the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS is displayed in other Operation and Monitoring windows. The
information primarily includes the following.
• When messages are acknowledged
• When messages are shelved
• When messages are suppressed by the function unique to CAMS for HIS
• When process alarm messages are suppressed
n When Messages are Acknowledged in the Message Monitor of

CAMS for HIS
If multiple messages are originated from the same tag number, once a message is acknowl-
edged in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, all the messages will be acknowledged in
the Operation and Monitoring windows other than the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n When Messages are Shelved

Though some actions such as buzzing or blinking for notifying the operator on the plant status
transition are disabled, the alarm status will always display the status before the messages
are shelved. For more information, see the table of “When Messages are Suppressed on HIS”
on next page.
n When Messages are Suppressed by the Function Unique to CAMS

for HIS
There are three types of operation to suppress messages.
• Suppress messages in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Set Detection in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder to [Disable].
• Change the Alarm Priority - original to [Logging] or [Reference] in the CAMS for HIS
Alarm builder.
The effect when these operations are performed is different between the operation to notify a
transition of the plant status and the operation to display the plant status.
l On the Operation to Notify a Transition of the Plant Status

No notification is sent even if suppressed messages are generated. The suppressed messag-
es and the alarm messages with Logging attribute can be traced on the Historical Viewer of
CAMS for HIS. For more information, see the table of “When Messages are Suppressed on
HIS” on next page.
l On the Operation to Display the Plant Status

This depends on the pre-defined setting.
If it is defined that the status after suppression is to be displayed, suppressed messages will
not be displayed even if they are generated. It is set to display the status after suppression by
default.

If it is defined that the status before suppression is to be displayed, suppressed messages will
not be suppressed when they are generated, and the current plant status will be displayed.
The effect of message suppression by the function unique to CAMS for HIS is explained in the
table below. In the table, CAMS or FCS indicates CAMS for HIS alarm status or FCS alarm
status of CENTUM process alarm message respectively.
Table A6.1-1 When Messages are Suppressed on HIS

Type of Operation to Suppress Messages/HIS Actions Settings to Suppress Messages and Effects
to HIS Actions
To Suppress Attribute of Detection attribute Enable Disable
Messages A&E messages
Alarm Priority attributes Critical-Low Logging Refer- (*1) (*1)
ence
Tentative mes- Suppression OFF ON (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1)
sage suppres-
sion Shelving OF ON (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1)
F
HIS Actions Alarm status For [Disable] (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) CA FC
display of sup- MS S
pressed tag
For [Logging] or [Refer- (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) CA FC CA FC (*1) (*1)
ence] MS S MS S
For Suppression (*1) (*1) CA FC (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1) (*1)
MS S
Action of notify- System Message Banner (*2) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3)
ing status tran-
sition Output to Buzzer (*2) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3)
Output to printer (*2) (*2) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3)
Message Monitor of (*2) (*2) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3)
CAMS for HIS
Historical Viewer of (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*2) (*3) (*3) (*3) (*3)
CAMS for HIS
Action of indi- Faceplate view (*4) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4)
cating the cur-
rent status Tuning view (*4) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4)
Graphic View (*4) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4)
(alarm status display)
Graphic View (*4) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4)
(modified area)
Objects with overview at- (*4) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4) (*3) (*4)
tribute on an HIS
*1: According to an arbitrary setting
*2: Function or recorded
*3: Do not function, do not display or record alarms
*4: Reflect and display the alarm status before suppression
SEE
ALSO For more information about the actions of an HIS when suppressed messages are generated, refer to:
“n Alarm Action” on page B1-2
For more information about details of the effect of message suppression by the function unique to CAMS for
HIS, refer to:
“n Display Alarm Status of Suppressed Tag” on page B1-2
l NR Indication when Messages are Suppressed

On Alarm Priority builder, if the [Notification at Return Type] is specified for High-Priority
alarms, the process alarm recovery message (Message No. 1106) will be displayed with a
buzzer sound and a blinking icon to indicate that all alarms have been recovered. If CAMS for

HIS is enabled, however, the notification timing will be different. The following is an example
of the recovery notification when the [HI] alarm is suppressed.
• When recovered from the [HH] alarm
Indicates NR because the [HI] alarm is suppressed, but no recovery notification will be
displayed.
• When recovered from the [HI] alarm
Indicates NR and displays a recovery notification.
n Actions of an HIS when Process Alarm Messages are Suppressed

This section explains how the alarm status transitions occur in Operation and Monitoring win-
dows including the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS when process alarm messages are
suppressed or the suppression is released.
l Message Display Action when Suppression is Executed

When CAMS for HIS received messages suppressed by the Suppression function, it handles
them as acknowledged messages.
Messages that were already displayed before starting Suppression will remain on the display
after Suppression is started; however, they will be removed upon reception of their recovery
messages. Messages generated while they are suppressed will be displayed If their recovery
messages have not yet been received when the Suppression is cancelled. Among the sup-
pressed alarm messages received during Suppression, only the latest message is displayed.
The time stamp of the message will be the time at which the Suppression is cancelled. The
applicable message numbers are as follows:
Message numbers: 1101, 1103, 1107, 1111, 1201, 1207, 1221, 1227
The following figure describes the message display actions when Suppression is started and
cancelled.
Process alarm display on the

message monitor of CAMS for HIS
Process alarm display on HIS
NR HI NR HI NR
operation and monitoring window
Suppression OFF ON OFF ON
Message generation in FCS

Alarm status of a device Stopped HI NR HI NR HI
: Generation of process alarm message Removal of alarm messages already displayed before Suppression
: Generation of recovery message
Figure A6.1-1 Message Display Actions when Suppression is Started and Cancelled
SEE
ALSO For more information about operating messages, refer to:
2, "Message Output Details" in the Operating Messages (IM 33K02D20-50E)
l Message Display Action when Alarm Attributes are Changed

When the Detection attribute is changed to [Disable] or the Priority (CAMS) attribute is
changed to [Logging] or [Reference] for some messages in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
and downloaded, if there are any target messages already displayed, they are deleted from
the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
When the attributes are changed to release suppression and downloaded, the target messag-
es generated during the suppression will not be displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS.

The following figure illustrates the message display action when the Detection attribute is
changed.

NR HI NR HI NR
Enabling or Disabling Detection
attribute Enable Disable Enable Disable

Alarm status of a device Stopped HI NR HI NR HI
: Generation of process alarm message

Figure A6.1-2 Message Display Actions when the Detection Attribute is Changed
TIP When you change the attributes so as to suppress messages or to release the suppression by using the
CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, the change is reflected when updating of the engineering data is completed.
l Message Display Action when AOF is Set

When CAMS for HIS received messages of alarms suppressed in AOF mode, it handles them
as acknowledged messages.
The message display actions when switched between AOF and AON are the same as those
when Suppression is started or cancelled. The applicable message numbers are as follows:
Message numbers: 1101, 1103, 1107, 1111, 1201, 1207, 1221, 1227
• When All AOF is set

The following figure describes the message display actions when All AOF is set for a de-
vice.

HI NR HI NR HI NR HI
Setting AOF/AON for all alarms of
AON AOF AON
a function block
Alarm status of a device HI NR HI NR HI NR HI NR HI
: Generation of process alarm message Removal of alarm messages already displayed before AOF is set
Figure A6.1-3 Message Display Actions when All AOF is Set
When the [Alarm Notify Action When All AOF Released] check box is selected in the FCS
properties, the alarm messages sent from the FCS on releasing the All AOF are also dis-
played in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• When AOF is set for individual alarms
The following figure describes the message display actions when AOF is set for individual
alarms of a device.

HI NR HI NR HI NR HI NR HI
Setting AOF/AON for individual
AON AOF AON
alarms of a function block
Alarm status of a device HI NR HI NR HI NR HI NR HI
: Generation of process alarm message Removal of alarm messages already displayed before AOF is set
Figure A6.1-4 Message Display Actions when AOF is Set for Individual Alarms
SEE
l Message Display Action when Suppression and AOF are Executed

Simultaneously
You can execute Suppression and AOF simultaneously. The message suppression is re-
leased when both are cancelled.
l Message Display Not Affected by Alarm Suppression

Message controls of graphic views are not affected even if their related process alarm mes-
sages are suppressed by CAMS for HIS.

<A6.2 How the Result of Message Processing in Operation and Monitoring Windows Other Than the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS is Displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS> A6-7
A6.2 How the Result of Message Processing in

Operation and Monitoring Windows Other
Than the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS is Displayed in the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS
This section explains how the result of acknowledged and/or recovery messages in Operation
and Monitoring windows other than the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS affects the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The information primarily includes the following.
• When messages are acknowledged
• When acknowledged alarm messages are recovered
n When Messages are Acknowledged

Messages are acknowledged also on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. If multiple mes-
sages are originated from the same tag number, once a message is acknowledged, all the
messages will be acknowledged.
n When Acknowledged Alarm Messages are Recovered

Messages are recovered also on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. However, the ac-
tions of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS when alarms are recovered vary depending on
the predefined setting.
SEE
ALSO For more information about details, refer to:
• A3.4, “Status Transition from Occurrence to Deletion of Process Alarm Messages” on page A3-6
• A3.5, “Status Transition from Occurrence to Deletion of A&E Messages other than Process Alarm
Messages” on page A3-9

<A6.3 Coordination between the CAMS for HIS Functions and Other HIS Functions> A6-8
A6.3 Coordination between the CAMS for HIS

Functions and Other HIS Functions
This section explains the coordination between the CAMS for HIS functions and other HIS
functions.
n Operation to Call Other Operation and Monitoring Windows from the

Perform either one of the following to call the Operation and Monitoring window from the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Double-click the message with a tag name in the A&E Messages pane.
• Select the target operation from the menu that is displayed when you right-click on the
applicable message in the A&E Messages pane.
n How to Use the Operation Keyboard

The following key operations are possible with the operation keyboard when CAMS for HIS is
enabled.
Figure A6.3-1
This key is used to acknowledge messages. The HIS Utility setting determines whether the
individual A&E messages are acknowledged or all the displayed A&E messages are acknowl-
edged.
Figure A6.3-2
This key is used to output the screen image.

TIP The [Copy] button on the System Message Banner can also be used.
Figure A6.3-3
This key is used to stop the buzzer sound.

MODE MODE
OFF OFF
ON ON
ENG ENG
Operation key Engineering key

Switchable between Switchable between
OFF and ON OFF, ON, and ENG
Figure A6.3-4
This key is used to temporarily change the operator’s privilege levels. The following four privi-
lege levels can be changed.
• Access level 1 in the operation and monitoring authority tables in the window for the oper-
ation to acknowledge system alarm messages

<A6.3 Coordination between the CAMS for HIS Functions and Other HIS Functions> A6-9
ation to manually reset messages
The privilege level cannot be changed for the operation to manually reset CENTUM proc-
ess alarm messages.
ation to suppress messages of one station at a time
• Operation to write the alarm acknowledgement status (acknowledged or not acknowl-
edged) to the alarm flashing status [AFLS] of the function blocks
Note, however, that the operation to acknowledge messages can be limited for security levels
6, 7 and 8 of the function blocks.
n Operation to Acknowledge Messages without Using the Message

SEE
ALSO For more information about details, refer to:
“n Operation to Acknowledge Messages from the Operation and Monitoring Window, etc. Other than the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS” on page A3-2
n ProSafe-RS Message Display

If messages sent by SCS (Safety Control Station) of ProSafe-RS are received when the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS is started, they are displayed after being automatically filtered
by [SIS-Process] (process alarm messages) or [SIS-System] (system alarm messages). Ap-
plies only when the ProSafe-RS system is being used.

<A6.4 Differences between HISs with CAMS for HIS Enabled and Those with CAMS for HIS Disabled>
A6-10
A6.4 Differences between HISs with CAMS for

HIS Enabled and Those with CAMS for HIS
Disabled
This section explains the differences between HISs in which CAMS for HIS enabled and those
in which CAMS for HIS disabled.
n Messages that not Displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for

HIS
The following messages will not be displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• No. 0394: Downloading database into the Exaopc station completed.
• No. 0510: Database download.
• No. 0514: Operation and monitoring function database change.
n Messages Unique to CAMS for HIS

The following messages are unique to CAMS for HIS. However, the tag marks are the same
as those displayed with the messages with no default tag marks.
• CAMS Alarm Buffer has exceeded 80% of the maximum in number.
This message is generated when the number of messages stored reaches 80 % of the
maximum size of alarm buffer.
• CAMS Alarm Buffer is within 70% of the maximum in number.
This message is generated when the number of stored messages is reduced to 70 % of
the maximum size of alarm buffer after reaching 80 %.
• <IP address> has been disconnected from CAMS Equalization Scope.
This message is generated to notify the users when a session within the equalization
scope is severed due to network malfunction while the equalization is proceeding.
• <IP address> has been connected with CAMS Equalization Scope.
This message is generated when the severed session within the equalization scope re-
covers.
• Over 200MB CAMS DataBase Download
This message is generated when an engineering database that is larger than 200 MB is
downloaded.
l Messages Displayed when Alarm Suppression is Released

Alarm messages generated while they are Suppressed or AOF is set are forcibly displayed if
their recovery messages have not yet been received when the suppression is released. Mes-
sages are displayed as follows:
• Process alarm message displayed when Suppression is cancelled
ALARMΔ(SOF);ΔMessage
Δ: Space
TimeStamp: Time when Suppression is cancelled
TimeStamp.Server: Time when Suppression is cancelled
Engineering information: Engineering information when Suppression is ca
ncelled

A6-11
Other attributes are the same as those before Suppression is started.
However, information of the control station, such as PV and MV, is not
displayed.
Display example: ALARM (SOF); FIC100 Flow Indicator HI
• Process alarm message displayed when AOF is released

ALARMΔ(AON);ΔMessage
Δ: Space
TimeStamp: Time when AOF is released
TimeStamp.Server: Time when AOF is released
Engineering information: Engineering information when AOF is released
Other attributes are the same as those before AOF is set for the functi
on block.
However, information of the control station, such as PV and MV, is not
displayed.
Display example: ALARM (AON); FIC100 Flow Indicator HI
TIP • Also for the following system messages, the messages received during Suppression or AOF are dis-
played forcibly when the suppression is released.
A&E messages of message numbers 00xx, 01xx, 02xx, 03xx, 04xx, 05xx, 06xx, 07xx, 08xx, 40xx
A&E messages whose TypeOfAlarm is Asset
• For the following A&E messages, the messages received during Suppression or AOF are not displayed
forcibly when the suppression is released.
A&E messages of message numbers 13xx, 14xx, 16xx, 17xx, 18xx, 19xx, 3xxx
l Messages Displayed when Alarm Status is Corrected

CAMS for HIS acquires alarm status information from FCS periodically and compares it with
the information it holds, and if there is any difference, CAMS for HIS makes correction. The
message numbers of the messages subjected to this correction are as follows: Corrected
messages are as follows:
Message numbers: 1102, 1104, 1112, 1206, 1226
Corrections are made as follows:
• Format of corrected recovery message when recovered to normal
RECOVERΔ(Correction);ΔMessage
Δ: Space
TimeStamp: Time of correction
TimeStamp.Server: Time of correction
Other attributes are the same as those before the correction.
Display example: RECOVER (Correction); FIC100 Flow Indicator HI
• Format of corrected log of acknowledgement when the alarm is acknowledged

Ack:User(Correction@<Station name>):PairKey(Pair key string)
Station name: Name of the HIS for which the alarm flashing status is co
rrected,
alias when an alias is specified
TimeStamp: Time of correction
TimeStamp.Server: Time of correction

A6-12
Other attributes are the same as those before the correction.
Display example: Ack:User(Correction@HIS1151):PairKey(FIC100.HI;;)
SEE
n Functions Disabled on HISs where CAMS for HIS is Enabled

Some functions are disabled when CAMS for HIS is enabled.
l Calling a Window by Specifying a Filter Condition

A tag name can be specified as the argument used to call the Operation and Monitoring win-
dow on an HIS in which CAMS for HIS is not enabled. For example, the following operation
can be performed.
• Call the Process Alarm view upon specifying a filter condition in the Name Input Tool Box
in the Browser bar.
Input example: AL△FIC100
△: Space
• Call the Process Alarm view after selecting a tag name in the Faceplate view.
The Process Alarm view will display the result of filtered messages by the tag name.
This function, however, is disabled on HISs where CAMS for HIS is enabled. For example, if
you call the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS after selecting a tag name in the Faceplate
view, all A&E messages that are currently generated will be displayed regardless of the tag
name.
l Restrictions for Displaying Messages

The following restrictions apply when displaying messages in the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS.
• The current measurement values and alarm status of the analog data of process alarm
messages cannot be displayed.
• One message is displayed in one line, and a line feed cannot be inserted. Even if a line
feed is defined in a builder, it is ignored. However, it is possible to display messages with
line feed in the Details pane.
• The color of the characters in messages cannot be changed. Even if a color is defined in
a builder, it is ignored.
l Items Disabled even if Defined in the HIS Setup Window

When CAMS for HIS is enabled, the following items are disabled even if they are defined in
the HIS Setup window.
• [Print] in the [Message and Report] column of the Printer tab
This item is disabled with CAMS for HIS because it is used to set the for the Process
Alarm view, System Alarm view and Operator Guide view.
• [Print Setup] of the Printer tab
When CAMS for HIS is enabled, the Print dialog box is called from the Message Monitor
of CAMS for HIS and set.
• [Font] of the Display tab
When CAMS for HIS is enabled, the Display tab of the Option window is called from the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS to configure the settings.
• [Alarm Summary Mode] of the Alarm tab

A6-13
When CAMS for HIS is enabled, all items set on this tab are ignored.
n Table of Comparison between HISs with CAMS for HIS Enabled and
Those with CAMS for HIS Disabled
The result of comparing HISs with CAMS for HIS enabled and those with CAMS for HIS disa-
bled in regards to the following points is explained in the table below.
• Operations to expand from A&E messages to the Operation and Monitoring window
• Operations to acknowledge A&E messages
• Operations to delete and/or manually reset A&E messages
• Actions when recovering from the alarm status
l Operation to Expand from A&E Messages to the Operation and Monitoring

Window
The operations to expand from the A&E messages to the Operation and Monitoring window
are compared.
Table A6.4-1 Operations to Expand from A&E Messages to the Operation and Monitoring Window
Comparison HIS with CAMS for HIS HIS without CAMS for HIS
Pointing a process alarm message Right clicking may open a menu Right clicking may open a menu.
and right click but Edit is not available on the
menu.
Pointing a system alarm message Right clicking may open a menu Not functioning
and right click but only Help window can be
opened from the menu.
Pointing an operation guide mes- No affect at all. The builder de- If a window is defined on the build-
sages and double click fined window will be ignored; the er, the window will be displayed.
error operation alarm buzzer does
not act either.
Pointing a dialog message and Right clicking may open a menu. No affect
right click
Pointing an operation guide mes- • Check Device: DeviceViewer will be displayed regarding Device Tag.
sages from PRM and double DeviceViewer is application of PRM.
click(*1) • Check Tag: A faceplate view will be displayed regarding Block Tag.
*1: On HISs in which CAMS for HIS is enabled, the messages sent from PRM to the operator correspond to these messages.
The alarm type (TypeOfAlarm) is categorized as Asset rather than Guidance.
l Operations to Acknowledge A&E Messages

The operations to acknowledge A&E messages are compared.
Table A6.4-2 Operations to Acknowledge A&E Messages

Acknowledgement Action Both [Acknowledge] and [Acknowledge On Alarm tab of HIS Setup win-
(Acknowledge and Acknowl- All] buttons can be defined on the Mes- dow, the [Group Acknowledge-
edge All) sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS. ment] or [Individual Acknowledge-
ment] can be selected as the
[Message Acknowledgement
Method].This setting is valid for
process alarm, system alarm and
operation guide messages.
Push the acknowledgement Acts according to the setting in the Acts according to the setting in
key on the operator keyboard CAMS for HIS tab of the HIS Utility. [Messages Acknowledgment
Method] of the Alarm tab of the
HIS Setup window.

A6-14
Security on Acknowledge- Messages can be acknowledged within When acknowledging the alarms
ment the scope of privilege allowed to the of the tags with the security level 6
log-on user. to 8, the acknowledgement action
In order to make HIS execute the same of a user is restricted by his privi-
process alarm operation from tags lege level and the security level of
whose security level is set to 6 to 8 re- the target. No additional restric-
gardless of whether CAMS for HIS is tions are applied.
enabled or disabled, the alarm system
design via CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
is required.
Acknowledgement restricted When acknowledging the alarms of the tags with the security level 6 to 8,
by the mode key position on the restrictions on monitoring and acknowledging the alarms depend on the
the operation keyboard key position on the operation keyboard.Permission for deleting the system
alarm or operation guide messages also depends on the key position on the
operation keyboard.
Acknowledging process Alarm messages are acknowledged in- Alarms of each tag can be ac-
alarms dividually. The same alarm messages knowledged.The messages with
are acknowledged in all HISs in the the same tag will be acknowl-
same operation group via control bus. edged together.
Acknowledgment on tuning Among A&E messages displayed in the Alarm messages displayed in the
view or graphic view Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, all Process Alarm view shift to the ac-
A&E messages generated in acknowl- knowledged status.
edged tags are acknowledged simulta-
neously (equalized by ACK status
change notification messages from
FCS).(*1)
System alarm messages and The acknowledgment status of all the HISs in the operation group will be
operation guide messages af- equalized.
fected by acknowledgement
*1: It is assumed that multiple tags are assigned to one alarm group to allow simultaneous operation of the groups. Even in such
a case, only the messages with acknowledged tags will shift to the acknowledged status in the Message Monitor of CAMS of
HIS.
l Operations to Delete and/or Manually Reset A&E Messages

The operations to delete and/or manually reset A&E messages are compared.
Table A6.4-3 Operations to Delete and/or Manually Reset A&E Messages

Deleting message Manual reset operations corre- Deleting message is possible.
spond to this function. Note that
manual reset itself is a function for
alarm status transition and not in-
tended for deletion.
Restrictions on deleting (Security) It is possible to define the privilege S1 user is restricted (set in regis-
for specific users or user groups in try.)
the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
Deleting process alarms If you manually reset acknowl- Operators cannot delete the mes-
edged alarm messages, the messages.
sages are deleted. By default,
manual reset is refused.
Deleting system alarms If you manually reset acknowl- Acknowledged alarm messages
edged alarm messages, the mes- can be deleted with the Delete but-
sages are deleted. By default, ton.
users whose privilege is other than
S1 are allowed to perform manual
reset.

A6-15
Deleting operation guide messag- If you manually reset acknowl- The acknowledged operation
es edged messages, the messages guide messages can be deleted
are deleted. By default, users using the deleting button.
whose privilege is other than S1
are allowed to perform manual re-
set.
l Actions when Recovered from the Alarm Status

The actions when recovered from the alarm status are compared.
Table A6.4-4 Actions when Recovered from the Alarm Status

Process alarm When acknowledged alarm messages are re- If acknowledged alarm messages
covered, whether or not the messages are are recovered, the messages are
deleted depends on if Auto Clear is set to automatically deleted.
[Disable] or [Enable], and also if [Alarm ac-
tion] in Project Property is [Integrated] or
[CENTUM original]. The alarm priority of re-
covery messages is always Low.
NR indication for the By default, NR is not indicated. However, if on If all the alarms of a block are re-
unexercised alarms the CENTUM VP Alarm Priority builder, the covered to normal state, the alarm
alarm is defined to indicate the recovery status of the block will be indicated
(specified with NL), NR will be indicated for with NR.
the alarm signal. NR is indicated for the unen-
gaged annunciator.
System alarm If recovery messages are generated for the Alarm messages and recovery
acknowledged alarm messages or acknowl- messages need to be acknowl-
edged alarm messages are manually reset, edged and then deleted individual-
those messages are automatically deleted. ly.
Alarm messages that do not have recovery
messages need to be acknowledged and
then manually reset.
Operation guide mes- No recovery message
sages

Blank Page
<A7. CAMS for HIS and Multiple Project Connection> A7-1
A7. CAMS for HIS and Multiple Project

Connection
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS can also display the A&E messages of other project con-
nected through the Multiple Project Connection package. The connection patterns, the control
bus (V net) connection methods and operation and monitoring details among the connected
projects are irrelevant to the enabling or disabling the CAMS for HIS feature. However, when
CAMS for HIS is applied, there are some specific features and actions. These specific fea-
tures and actions will be described in this section.
n Common Operating Results Shared by Multiple Projects

The information regarding the following CAMS for HIS operating results can be shared by
multiple projects.
• Acknowledge a message
• Manually reset a message
• Start and stop the alarm suppression
(Limited to the suppression of alarm groups)
• Shelve and stop to shelve an alarm
(Limited to Continuous shelving and One-Shot shelving)
• Edit the text directly in the Detail pane of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
l When a Lump of A&E Messages are Processed Together

When a lump of A&E messages on an HIS of one project are processed together, the result
will be passed to all the other projects for equalization in a same way as if the messages are
individually processed.
SEE
ALSO For more information about engineering for multiple project connection and enabling CAMS for HIS, refer to:
B3.2, “CAMS for HIS Engineering Flow when Connected Multiple Projects” on page B3-32
n Operation Sharing Scope Across Projects

The scope of CAMS for HIS operations can be shared by multiple projects is shown in the
table below:

Table A7-1 CAMS for HIS Operation Sharing Scope across Projects
Scope to Share the Operation Results
All the HISs that
have same opera-
A&E Messages Conditions Opera- tion group ID/The
Type of A&E Mes-
Processed by tion Results are All the connected lower projects that
sages
CAMS for HIS Equalized projects assigned to be
monitored by the
HIS in upper proj-
ect
CENTUM process
alarm messages
○
and related recov-
ery messages.
CENTUM system
alarm messages
and related recov- ○
ery messages (if ex-
Same when ac- ist).
knowledge and CENTUM operation The A&E messages
manual reset all or guidance messages are same.
single message. and related recov- ○
ery messages (if ex-
ist).
PRM maintenance
alarm messages re-
ceived by CAMS for
○
HIS and related re-
covery messages (if
exist).
Start or stop alarm
suppression.
The A&E group
However, only ○
names are same.
alarm groups can
be suppressed.
Satisfy all the fol-
lowings:
• The A&E mes-
sages are same.
• The shelf names
Start or stop alarm are same. ○
shelving. • The shelving If the extent of
All A&E messages
However, only valid types are same. shelving is USER,
Continuous Shelv- • The extents of display only when
ing and One-Shot shelving are the proper user logs
Shelving. same. on the HIS.
• If the extent of
shelving is
USER, the HIS
logon users are
same.
Edit the separately
The text file names
prepared text file for ○
are same.
Details pane.
The operation sharing scopes will be explained below.
l An Instance of Sharing by the HISs with Same Operation Group ID among

Hierarchically Connected Projects
On the HIS that the CAMS for HIS is enabled, when a CENTUM system alarm message is
acknowledged, the acknowledging operation will be passed to all the other HISs with the
same operation group ID among the hierarchically connected projects.

Equalization Scope
A1 HIS1 HIS2 A2 HIS3 HIS4

Upper project
BCV-V
A1, A2, A*: Operation group

Lower project
Vnet
A* HIS5 HIS6 A2 HIS7 HIS8
Equalization Scope
Figure A7-1 An Instance of Sharing by the HISs with Same Operation Group ID among Hierarchically
Connected Projects
• After Acknowledging an A&E Message in the Upper Project

After acknowledging a system alarm message on a HIS in the upper project, the result of
this operation will be passed to all HISs in the equalization scope. The operation will be
equalized to the HISs with the same operation group ID.
After acknowledging a system alarm message on a HIS in the upper project, the result of
this operation will also be passed to the lower project to all HISs in the equalization
scope. And the operation will be equalized to the HISs with the same operation group ID.
• After Acknowledging an A&E Message in the Lower Project
After acknowledging a system alarm message on a HIS in the lower project, the result of
this operation will be passed to all HISs in the equalization scope. The operation will be
equalized to the HISs with the same operation group ID.
After acknowledging a system alarm message on a HIS in the lower project, the result of
this operation will also be passed to the upper project to all HISs in the equalization
scope. And the operation will be equalized to the HISs with the same operation group ID.
However, on the HISs in the lower project, the A&E messages of the upper project cannot
be displayed.
The instance shown in the figure acts as follows:
Table A7-2 Example 1 of Sharing Operating Results

HIS1 HIS2 HIS3 HIS4 HIS5 HIS6 HIS7 HIS8
HIS1 ● (*1) ○ (*2) ○ ○
HIS3 ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
HIS5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○
HIS7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○
*1: ●: HIS acknowledging a system alarm message
*2: ○: HIS equalized the operating result
l An Instance of Sharing by the HISs with Same Operation Group ID among

Bi-directionally Connected Projects
acknowledged, the acknowledging operation will be passed to all the other HISs with the
same operation group ID among the bi-directionally connected projects.

Equalization Scope
A1 HIS1 HIS2 A2 HIS3 HIS4
BCV-V
A1, A2, A*: Operation group
Vnet
A* HIS5 HIS6 A2 HIS7 HIS8
Equalization Scope
Figure A7-2 An Instance of Sharing by the HISs with Same Operation Group ID among Bi-directionally
Connected Projects
After acknowledging a system alarm message on a HIS in a project, the result of this opera-
tion will be passed to all HISs in the equalization scope. The operation will be equalized to the
HISs with the same operation group ID. The result will also be passed to the other projects to
all HISs in the equalization scope and the operation will be equalized to the HISs with the
same operation group ID.
On the HISs of the bi-directionally connected projects, the A&E messages of other projects
can be displayed.
The instance shown in the figure acts as follows:
Table A7-3 Example 2 of Sharing Operating Results

HIS1 HIS2 HIS3 HIS4 HIS5 HIS6 HIS7 HIS8
HIS1 ● (*1) ○ (*2) ○ ○
HIS3 ● ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
HIS5 ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○ ○ ○
HIS7 ○ ○ ○ ○ ● ○
*1: ●:HIS acknowledging a system alarm message
*2: ○: HIS equalized the operating result
l An Instance of the HIS in Upper Project and the Project Assigned to the
HIS for Monitoring
acknowledged, the acknowledging operation will be passed to all HISs in the equalization
scope and to HISs of the upper project assigned to the HIS for monitoring. This section will
describe this type of sharing scheme. In this instance, the HIS in the upper project is referred
to as HIS1, while the project assigned to the HIS1 for monitoring is referred to as Project 2.

Vnet
HIS1 HIS2 Project 1
BCV-V
Vnet
HIS3 HIS4 HIS5 HIS6
Project 2 Project 3
Figure A7-3 An Instance of the HIS in Upper Project and the Project Assigned to the HIS for Monitor-
ing
After acknowledging a system alarm message on HIS3 of Project 2, the result of this opera-
tion will be passed to all HISs in the equalization scope. The operation will also be equalized.
The result of this operation will also be passed to HIS1 of the upper project. And the operation
will be equalized to the HISs in the equalization scope of the upper project.
n Shelving Sharing Scope Across Projects

On an HIS that the CAMS for HIS is enabled, when an A&E alarm message is shelved, the
shelving operation will be passed to all the other HISs among the connected projects. Howev-
er, whether this operation is displayed on the other project depends on the logon user and the
shelving extent settings of the project.
l A Shelf where the Extent of Shelving is Defined as System

For a shelf that the Extent of Shelving is defined as System, the scope affected after shelving
a message is illustrated as follows:
Shelving Extent of Shelving: SYSTEM
Shelf A Shelf A
Extent of Shelving: USER
HIS HIS
Extent of Shelving: SYSTEM
User1 User2
Upper project Project 1
Lower project
Shelf A Shelf A Shelf A Shelf A

HIS HIS HIS HIS
User1 User2 User1 User2
Project 2 Project 3
On this HIS, the result of shelving is indicated.
Figure A7-4 A Shelf where the Extent of Shelving is Defined as System
When putting an A&E message to a shelf that the Extent of Shelving is defined as System,
the shelved message will also be displayed in the same shelf on the HISs of other projects
and irrelevant to the logon user.

l A Shelf where the Extent of Shelving is Defined as User

For a shelf that the Extent of Shelving is defined as User, the scope affected after shelving a
message is illustrated as follows:
Shelving Extent of Shelving: USER
Shelf A Shelf A
Extent of Shelving: USER
HIS HIS
Extent of Shelving: SYSTEM
User1 User2
Upper project Project 1
Lower project
Shelf A Shelf A Shelf A Shelf A

HIS HIS HIS HIS
User1 User2 User1 User2
Project 2 Project 3
On this HIS, the result of shelving is indicated.
Figure A7-5 A Shelf where the Extent of Shelving is Defined as User
When putting an A&E message to a shelf that the Extent of Shelving is defined as User, the
shelved message may also be displayed in the same shelf on the HISs of other projects if the
logon user on the HIS is the same user who performed the shelving.
n HIS Operation History in Environment of Connected Multiple

Projects
In the environment of connected multiple projects, an operation performed on one HIS, the
operation history will be passed to all the other equalized HISs. On the Historical Viewer of
CAMS for HIS, the operation history can be confirmed.
The CAMS for HIS operation history that can be passed to other projects include the follow-
ings:
• Acknowledge a message
• Manually reset a message
• Start and stop the alarm suppression
• Shelve and stop to shelve an alarm

<A7.1 Project Connection Patterns when CAMS for HIS is Enabled> A7-7
A7.1 Project Connection Patterns when CAMS

for HIS is Enabled
When CAMS for HIS is enabled, the specific features will be applied. These features will be
explained below.
n Restrictions when CAMS for HIS is Enabled

To use CAMS for HIS in the environment of connected multiple projects, the version of the
CENTUM VP software of the upper project must be R4.03.00 or later.(*1) However, it is not
necessary to standardize all the stations in the project to the same software release.
Moreover, the engineering information, HIS user security settings that may be downloaded to
the HISs should be matching each other between upper project and lower project.
*1: The CENTUM software release means the release number of Standard Operation and Monitoring Function, Standard Builder
Function and so on packages.
SEE
ALSO For more information about engineering for multiple project connection and enabling CAMS for HIS, refer to:
B3.2, “CAMS for HIS Engineering Flow when Connected Multiple Projects” on page B3-32
l An Instance of Enabling CAMS for HIS in Environment of Hierarchical

Project Connection
An instance of enabling CAMS for HIS in environment of hierarchical project connection is
shown below.
ENG
R4.03.00
Equalization Scope
HIS HIS HIS HIS

Upper R4.03.00 R4.03.00 R4.03.00 R4.03.00
project
FCS0101
Operate and monitor the FCSs

BCV-V BCV-V
of the lower level project. BCV-V
ENG ENG ENG

R4.01.60 R4.02.00 R4.03.00
Lower
project
HIS HIS HIS HIS HIS HIS HIS HIS HIS

R4.01.60 R4.01.60 R4.01.60 R4.02.00 R4.02.00 R4.02.00 R4.03.00 R4.03.00 R4.03.00
FCS0201 FCS0301 FCS0401
Equalization Scope Equalization Scope Equalization Scope
Figure A7.1-1 An Instance of Enabling CAMS for HIS in Environment of Hierarchical Project Connec-
tion
l An Instance of Enabling CAMS for HIS in Environment of Bi-directional

Project Connection
An instance of enabling CAMS for HIS in environment of bi-directional project connection is
shown below.

<A7.1 Project Connection Patterns when CAMS for HIS is Enabled> A7-8
Equalization Scope
Vnet
ENG HIS HIS HIS

FCS CENTUM VP
R4.03.00 R4.03.00 R4.03.00 R4.03.00
Ethernet
BCV
Bi-directionally operate and monitor

the FCSs of the connected projects
ENG HIS HIS HIS CENTUM VP

R4.03.00 FCS
R4.03.00 R4.03.00 R4.03.00
Equalization Scope
Figure A7.1-2 An Instance of Enabling CAMS for HIS in Environment of Bi-directional Project Connec-
tion
n When the Upper Project Contains CENTUM Software Earlier than

R4.03.00
When using CAMS for HIS in a circumstance where the upper project contains CENTUM
software packages earlier than R4.03.00, equalization among the projects must be disabled.
(*1)
*1: The applicable software packages are Standard Operation and Monitoring Function and Standard Builder Function, for exam-
ple.
SEE
ALSO For more information about disabling the equalization among the connected projects, refer to:
“n Equalize the Alarm Event Data and CAMS Engineering Data with Connected Project” on page
B1-4
n When the Lower Project Consists of CENTUM Software Earlier than

R5.03.20
When the software version of the upper project is R5.03.20 or later and the software version
of the lower project is earlier than R5.03.20, use the OtherProject node in the upper project to
acquire the engineering data of the lower project and define them anew. Because HISs of the
upper project cannot reference the engineering data of the lower project, alarm engineering
information cannot be shared between the upper and lower projects.
TIP If you do not use the OtherProject node in the engineering, upgrade the system builders of the lower project
to R5.03.20 or later. Using the same version software between projects enables HISs of the upper project to
reference engineering data sent from the lower project.
SEE
ALSO For more information about operations utilizing the OtherProject node, refer to:
“n Engineering Operations Utilizing the OtherProject Node in the Upper Project” on page B3-33

<A8. Displaying Historical Data> A8-1
A8. Displaying Historical Data

CAMS for HIS has a window for displaying historical data of A&E messages generated in the
past, operation records of operators, etc. This window is called the Historical Viewer of CAMS
for HIS.
The appearance and operations of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS are basically the
same as the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Note, however, that there are some items
that are unique to the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS, which are explained in this section.
n Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

A display example of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is shown below.
CAMS for HIS : Historical Viewer
File Edit View Operation
Filter Process - ProcessAlarm

Date Messages
All Filters Favarites EVt 2008/03/23 10:20:50 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter NR
- TESTUSER(629) 2008/03/23 10:20:50 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter PV = 46.9 L/M HI Recover
+ SIS(190) 2008/03/23 10:20:50 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter PV = 46.9 L/M HH Recover
2008/03/23 10:20:44 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter MV = 30.0 % old= 73.3 [TESTUSER@
System(618) 2008/03/23 10:16:37 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter PV = 50.5 L/M HH
Process(201) 2008/03/23 10:16:37 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter PV = 50.5 L/M HI
Operator Guide(190) 2008/03/23 10:16:31 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter MV = 73.3 % old= 0.1 [TESTUSER@HI
FCS0102 2008/03/23 10:15:33 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter ML = 20.0 % old= 0.0 [TESTUSER@HI
2008/03/23 10:15:21 FIC100 Secondary Flowmeter MV = 0.1 % old= 0.0 [TESTUSER@HI
FCS0103 2008/03/23 10:11:25 %AN0001S0101 ALM
Dynamic Filter(12) 2008/03/23 10:11:24 %AN0001S0101 PV = ON old=OFF [TESTUSER@H
EVt 2008/03/23 09:43:50 FIC202 Secondary Flowmeter MAN
EVt 2008/03/23 09:43:50 FIC201 Primary Flowmeter MAN
Alarm Attribute Guidance

YHIS.MesageNo 4609
Timestamp 2008/03/23 10:11:25.000
Timestamp.Server 2008/03/23 10:11:26.218
Message %AN0001S0101 ALM
MessageNo 1201
TypeOfAlarm Process
Source %AN0001S010101.ALM
Source.Plant FCS0101
TagName %AN0001S010101
AlarmPriority Medium
Shelving Enable
Process FCS0102
Figure A8-1 Display Example of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
In the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS, there is only one pane that can display a list of his-
torical data, and there is no shelf.

<A8.1 Starting and Exiting the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS> A8-2
A8.1 Starting and Exiting the Historical Viewer

of CAMS for HIS
This section explains how to start and exit the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.
n How to Start the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

Only one Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS can be started on each HIS. How to start the His-
torical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is explained below.
l Calling from Tool Button Tool Box on Browser Bar

When calling the Historical Message Report window from [Call View] of Tool Button Tool Box
on Browser bar, the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS can be displayed.
At the first time starting the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS, only the latest alarm messag-
es are displayed. From the second time, the previously historical messages resulted from the
previous search will also be displayed.
l By Assigning a Window Call Object

The Historical Message Report window can also be called by assigning a Touch Target on
Product Control view. Using a Batch ID as criterion, the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
can be displayed instead of the Historical Message Report window.
When starting Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS from the Product Control view, a filter will be
automatically created using Bacth ID as criterion. The filtered result will be displayed in the
A&E Historical Messages pane.
n How to Exit the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

How to exit the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is as follows:
• Click the Close button of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.
• Choose [File] - [Exit] from the menu bar of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.
• Run User-In or User-Out.
• Press [ERAS] function key on the Operation Keyboard.

<A8.2 Layout of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS> A8-3
A8.2 Layout of Historical Viewer of CAMS for

HIS
The layout of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is similar to the layout of the Message Moni-
tor of CAMS for HIS. The detailed items that specific to the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
will be explained below.
n Appearance of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

The appearance of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS is shown below.
CAMS for HIS : Historical Viewer
Menu Bar
Toolbar
Filter
A&E Historical Messages Pane
Filters Pane
Details Pane
Status Bar
Figure A8.2-1 Appearance of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
A list of historical data is displayed in the A&E Historical Messages pane. A scroll bar appears
if there are more data than that can be displayed in the A&E Historical Messages pane.
Items displayed in each pane of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS inherit the environment
of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS called from the same HIS, such as types of buttons
on the toolbar or filters. They cannot be customized directly on the Historical Viewer of CAMS
for HIS. The CurrentProduct [Batch ID] filters that are automatically generated by the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS using batch ID as filter rules, are not inherited.
n Each Display Pane of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

This section explains each display pane of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.

l Menu Bar
Operations available in the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS can be selected using the
menu items in the menu bar. A list of menu items is shown below.
Table A8.2-1 Menu Items of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

Menu Description
File Properties Displays the properties of filter.
Export... Exports the historical data in the Historical Messages pane to a CSV file.
Print... Prints the displayed screen image.
Exit Exits the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.
Edit Search Opens a dialog box to setup the searching criteria for searching the historical
data.
Stop Searching Stops searching.
View Filter Pane Shows or hides the Filter pane.
Details Pane Show or hide the Details pane.
Alarm Displays alarm messages. When open the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS,
this filter is selected and the alarm messages are displayed.
Operation log Displays the operation records.
Event Displays events.
Operation log of Displays the operation records of other users of the HISs within the equaliza-
other users tion scope.
Next Forwards the display on the Historical Messages pane towards the later re-
cords according to the timestamps. This will scroll the half of the displayed
contents in the Historical Messages pane.
Previous Backwards the display on the Historical Messages pane towards the earlier
records according to the timestamps. This will scroll the half of the displayed
contents in the Historical Messages pane.
Opera- Clear Details Deselects the selected A&E messages and clears the contents in Details
tion Pane pane.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the classification of alarms, operation records, and events, refer to:
l Toolbar
Contains the valid buttons for the Historical Viewer among the buttons on the toolbar of the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, and the buttons specific to the Historical Viewer of CAMS
for HIS.
A display of this toolbar is shown as follows:
Figure A8.2-2 A Display of Buttons on Toolbar of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS (Default)
The details of the buttons specific to the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS are explained as
follows:
Figure A8.2-3 Print

Print: Prints the contents displayed in the Historical Messages pane.
Figure A8.2-4 Clear Details Pane
Clear Details Pane: Deselects the selected historical data and clear the contents in the De-
tails pane.
Figure A8.2-5 Show Filter Pane
Show Filter Pane: Toggles to show or hide the filter pane by a click.
Figure A8.2-6 Show Details Pane
Show Details Pane: Toggles to show or hide the details pane by a click.
Figure A8.2-7 Display the search dialog box
Display the search dialog box: Opens a dialog box to setup the searching criteria for search-
ing the historical data.
Figure A8.2-8 Stop the search of Alarm
Stop the search of Alarm: Stops searching.
Figure A8.2-9 Export the Alarm in CSV format
Export the Alarm in CSV format: Exports the historical data in the Historical Messages pane to
a CSV file.
Figure A8.2-10 Switch Display/Hide the Alarm
Switch Display/Hide the Alarm: Displays alarm messages. When open the Historical Viewer of
CAMS for HIS, this filter is selected and the alarm messages are displayed. The Alarm can be
shown or hidden by a click.
Figure A8.2-11 Switch Display/Hide the operation Record
Switch Display/Hide the operation Record: Displays the operation records. The displayed op-
eration record can be shown or hidden by a click.

Figure A8.2-12 Switch Display/Hide the Event
Switch Display/Hide the Event: Displays events. The displayed event can be shown or hidden
by a click.
Figure A8.2-13 Display the operation Records of Other Users
Display the operation Records of Other Users: Displays the operation records of all users of
the HISs within the equalization scope. The displayed operation records can be shown or hid-
den by a click.
Figure A8.2-14 Previous
Previous: Backwards the display on the Historical Messages pane towards the earlier records
according to the timestamps. This will scroll the half of the displayed contents in the Historical
Messages pane. This button becomes valid when the displayed data in the Historical Messag-
es pane are more than one page can hold.
Figure A8.2-15 Next
Next: Forwards the display on the Historical Messages pane towards the later records accord-
ing to the timestamps. This will scroll the half of the displayed contents in the Historical Mes-
sages pane. This button becomes valid when the displayed data in the Historical Messages
pane are more than one page can hold.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the classification of alarms, operation records, and events, refer to:
l Filter Pane
The main features of Filter pane are the same as in Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The
features specific to the Filter pane of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS are as follows:
• When started, the root of the tree is always selected.
• When the filter pane is running, the historical data of filter name, filter icon (*1)and the
total number of filtered historical data (*1)will be displayed.
• Icon blinking or emphases cannot be applied to the on unread alarms.
• Load Shedding cannot be set.
• On the context menu, only [Properties] is available.
*1: The filter icon and the total number of filtered historical data are displayed only when they are defined to be displayed on the
l Historical Messages pane

The historical data are displayed in this pane. One record takes one line.

The features specific to the Historical Messages pane of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for
HIS are as follows:
• On title bar, the times specified in the searching criteria are displayed.
• The historical date cannot be eclipsed (by clicking Show Data Tree).
• Icon blinking or Emphases cannot be applied to the unread alarms.
• No context menu. Moreover, double clicking will not run the assigned tasks.
l Details Pane
The main features of Details pane are the same as in Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The
additional information of the message selected in the A&E Historical Messages pane is dis-
played in this pane.
When choosing [Clear Details Pane] from menu bar or clicking [Clear Details Pane] on the
toolbar, the data displayed in the A&E Historical Messages pane will be cleared and the report
pane will show its background color. For the records that do not have additional information,
the above operations will not show anything. Also, there are no functions for entering and ed-
iting text data.
l Dynamic Filter Pane

The main features of Dynamic Filter pane are the same as in Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS. However, the button for registering filters is not valid.
l Status Bar
On the Status bar, the following items are indicated:
• Help Messages: The simple descriptions about the menu items and buttons of the toolbar
are displayed as the help messages.
• Progress Bar: The progress of search the historical data is indicated by this progress bar.
• Search Criterion: When the filter is running, the searching criterion is displayed.

<A8.3 Historical Data Display Actions of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS> A8-8
A8.3 Historical Data Display Actions of the

Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
This section explains actions of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS when displaying histori-
cal data.
n Classification of Historical Data

CAMS for HIS handles historical data by classifying them into three types. If you call each
type from the menu bar or toolbar, the corresponding historical data is displayed. At this point,
some data has marks at the beginning for easier identification of their classification types.
How historical data is classified is explained below.
• Alarm
This type includes all alarm messages and recovery messages that can be displayed in
the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Messages of PRM and STARDOM obtained via
OPC A&E server are also included. Messages that could not be actually displayed in the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS such as messages set to AOF, and suppressed mes-
sages, are included as well.
The following mark is placed at the beginning of suppressed A&E messages. If the alarm
mark (“!”) indicating re-warning also applies to a message, the suppression mark takes
the priority.
Figure A8.3-1 Suppression Mark
• Operation Record
This type includes records of operations performed on the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS as well as on HIS(*1). The following mark is placed at the beginning of historical
data classified as operation records.
*1: The records are also displayed on the Historical Message Report window of HIS.
Figure A8.3-2 Operation Record Mark
• Event
This type includes historical data are those that do not fall under alarm and operation re-
cords. The following mark is placed at the beginning of historical data classified as
events.
Figure A8.3-3 Event Mark
n Historical Data Displayed on the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

It is possible to display up to 10,000 historical data items. It is possible to display alarms, op-
eration records, and events together or separately.

l Relationship between Historical Data Classification and Privilege Levels

(Operation and Monitoring Rights)
If you display alarms, alarm messages and recovery messages are displayed according to the
privilege levels (operation and monitoring rights) of the user who logged on to the HIS.
If you display operation records or events, all historical data of HISs included in the Equaliza-
tion Scope is displayed. Note that some of system alarm messages of CENTUM VP such as
start and stop of FCS, are displayed according to the privilege levels (operation and monitor-
ing rights) of the user logged onto the HIS.
l Differences in Display Formats between Operation Records of CAMS for

HIS and Operation Records of HIS
Display formats of operation records are different between CAMS for HIS and HIS. The differ-
ences are explained below.
• Operation record display format of HIS
Operation records of HIS include information of operators that performed the operations.
A display example is shown below.
Table A8.3-1 Operation Record Display Format of HIS

Type Operation Message Display
Copy ALL Programs FCS0101 All Program Copy Operation [ONUS-
System Operation
of FCS ER@HIS0124]
FIC001-1 Distillation Tower -1 Inlet Flow MAN old=CAS
Process Operation Change Block Mode
[ONUSER@HIS0124]
• Operation record display format of CAMS for HIS

The following operations are recorded as operation records of CAMS for HIS.

Table A8.3-2 Operations on CAMS for HIS Recorded as Operation Records
Operated Window Operation Instance Remarks
Ack Acknowledge, Acknowledge All Operation records of different
operation groups are not dis-
played. The status of the Histor-
Manual Reset, Manual Reset ical Viewer of CAMS for HIS at
Manual Reset
All the start is used as the identifier
of an operation group.
• Release suppression on
Suppression Suppression dialog box.
• Run Suppress command.
Drop an A&E message to Con-
Shelving tinuous Shelf or One-Shot
Shelf.
• Reset Continuous Shelf or
When resetting Continuous
One-Shot Shelf when alarms
Shelf or One-Shot Shelf, reset-
Operation on Message are shelved in the shelves.
Resetting ting the shelf itself will be log-
Monitor of CAMS for • Drag an A&E message from
Shelving ged, and this will be followed by
HIS Continuous Shelf or One-
the events of removing all the
Shot Shelf and drop to filter
A&E messages from the shelf.
pane.
Clear Continuous Shelf or One-
Clear Shelf
Shot Shelf.
Drop the records to Auto Shelf
AutoShelf
according the filter.
Reset AutoSh-
Reset Auto-Shelving
elf
Saves the text data created or
Save Text Da-
edited in the Guidance tab of
ta
the Details pane.
Commit Save the settings for the Mes-
Changes sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
Operation records of committing
• Download the change set- changes in the Message Moni-
tings defined on the configu- tor of CAMS for HIS and down-
rator of CAMS for HIS. loading from the Configurator of
Operations on Configu-
Downloading • Change settings in the Op- CAMS for HIS are recorded to-
rator of CAMS for HIS
tion window of the Message gether with the information, and
Monitor of CAMS for HIS and consolidated in messages noti-
commit the changes. fying the completion of HIS da-
tabase equalization.
Operation records of CAMS for HIS include attributes of A&E messages. A display exam-
ple is shown below.
Table A8.3-3 Operation Record Display Format of CAMS for HIS

Operation Information displayed as operation record Message Display
User name, HIS name, time of operation, pair key Ack:User(ONUS-

Ack
If an operation group identifier (the first 2 bytes only) is ER@HIS0124):PairKey
Manual Re- specified for historical information, the information is dis- ManualRecover:User(ONUS-
set played in the OpeconID attribute. ER@HIS0124):PairKey
User name, HIS name, time of operation, group ID, Sub- SuppressionON:User(ONUS-
Condition ER@HIS0124):Group(Group
It is possible to specify an alarm group name with group Name)
Suppression
ID. Note that only operations of specifying and suppress- SuppressionOFF:User(ONUS-
ing alarm groups from the Message Monitor of CAMS for ER@HIS0124):Group(Group
HIS are the targets. Name)

Operation Information displayed as operation record Message Display
User name, HIS name, time of operation, Shelf ID, pair Shelving:User(ONUS-
Shelving key, alarm time stamp ER@HIS0124):Pair-
It is possible to specify a shelf name with Shelf ID. Key:Shelf(Shelf Name):Timestamp
CancelShelving:User(ONUS-
Resetting User name, HIS name, time of operation, pair key, alarm
ER@HIS0124):PairKey:Time-
Shelving time stamp
stamp
User name, HIS name, time of operation, Shelf ID ResetShelving:User(ONUS-
Clear Shelf
It is possible to specify a shelf name with Shelf ID. ER@HIS0124):Shelf(Shelf Name)
User name, HIS name, time of operation, Shelf ID, Filter
ID AutoShelving:User(ONUS-
AutoShelf
It is possible to specify a shelf name with Shelf ID and a ER@HIS0124):Filter(Filter Name)
filter name with Filter ID, respectively.
Reset Au- User name, HIS name, time of operation, Shelf ID CancelAutoShelf:User(ONUS-
toShelf It is possible to specify a shelf name with Shelf ID. ER@HIS0124)
Save Text User name, HIS name, time of writing text file, text file Save:User(ONUS-
Data name ER@HIS0124):memo.txt
Load: User (ONUS-
Commit
User name, HIS name, time of file transfer, version ER@HIS0124):Version (version of
Changes
database)
User name, HIS name, time of file transfer, version Load: User (ONUS-
Downloading Operations on the builder for CAMS for HIS are exclu- ER@HIS0124):Version (version of
ded from the display. database)
n Historical Data not Displayed on the Historical Viewer of CAMS for

HIS
In the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, messages for which the Detection attribute is set to [Disa-
ble], as well as messages for which the Alarm Priority - modified attribute is set to [Refer-
ence], are not displayed in Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.
n Search for Historical Data

Historical data can be searched for in the Search dialog box. Perform either one of the follow-
ing two operations to display the Search dialog box.
• Select [Edit] - [Search] in the menu bar.
• Click the [Display the search dialog box] button in the toolbar.
The search dialog box is shown below.

SearchDialog
Data Message Type Occurrence Souce User Arbitrary Character
Direction
All Backward
Specified Date Forward
between 2008/03/23 12:05:00

Display
and 2008/03/24 6:00:00
All
Past 5 Weeks
Search
Search Cancel
Figure A8.3-4 Search Dialog Box of Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
The items displayed on the Search dialog box and the operations are the same as when
searching historical messages in the Historical Message Report window of HIS.
If you click the [Search] button in the Search dialog box, the status where historical data is
selected in the A&E Historical Messages pane is automatically cancelled. The Filters pane al-
so shifts to the default status where the top of filters (root) is selected.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to search historical messages, refer to:
5.2.3, "Searching for a Historical Message" in the Human Interface Stations Reference Vol. 2 (IM
33K03F22-50E)
l Range Indicated by Search Criteria Set in the Date Tab

The search range of [Specified date] in the Date tab is as follows.
• Start time (specified in seconds) ≤ T < end time (specified in seconds) + 1 second
The search range of [Past] in the Date tab is as follows.
• Current time (truncate in units of seconds) – specified time ≤ T < current time (truncate in
units of seconds) + 1 second
l How to Search for A&E Messages of PRM

It is also possible to search PRM’s A&E messages obtained via the OPC A&E server.
Perform the following operation.
1. Open the Message Type tab.
2. Enable the [Specify Message Type] option.
3. Enable the [Asset Messages] check box.
4. Click the [Search] button.
A&E messages of PRM and other A&E messages whose [TypeOfAlarm] is categorized as
[Asset] are searched for and displayed.
l If More than 10,000 Historical Data Items are Found

Up to 10,000 historical data items can be displayed on the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.
If more than 10,000 historical data items are found as a result of search, the A&E Historical
Messages pane shows 10,000 historical data items. The [Previous] button and [Next] button
on the toolbar are enabled.

Perform either one of the following two operations to display historical data that matched
search criteria but could not be displayed due to restriction on 10,000 data items.
• Select [View] - [Next] or [View] - [Previous] in the menu bar.
• Click the [Next] button or [Previous] button in the toolbar.
The half of the displayed data slides to show newly searched data. For example, if 10,000 his-
torical data items are displayed in the A&E Historical Messages pane, the half of the display
slides and 5,000 data items are displayed in the future/past direction.
TIP If the number of historical data items matching search criteria reaches 10,000 as a result of search, some
discrepancies may occur in the display. For example, if [Past] is set to a search criterion, historical data newer
than the oldest historical data displayed may not be shown.
l Relationship between Search Criteria and Equalization Scope

Search criteria are managed in each HIS. For this reason, search criteria are never equalized
in HISs included in the Equalization Scope. Search criteria can be specified for each HIS that
started the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS.

<A8.4 Operation for Narrowing Down Historical Data> A8-14
A8.4 Operation for Narrowing Down Historical

Data
CAMS for HIS provides only one method of narrowing down historical data, which is filtering.
This section explains the differences from filtering by the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n Targets of Filtering
All historical data displayed in the A&E Historical Messages pane can be filtered.
n Properties of Filters
Filters inherit the environment of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS called from the same
HIS. It is possible to display and check filter rules by displaying filter properties, but it is not
possible to customize filters, such as changing filter attributes and creating new filters.
Perform the following operation to display filter properties.
1. Select and right-click the target filter in the Filters pane.
The context menu appears.
2. Select a property from the context menu.
The property of the selected filter is displayed.
'Process' properties
Filter Name Process
Description Process Alarm
Path /Process
Filter Type System Filter
Conditional expression True
and TypeOfAlarm = "Process"
OK
Figure A8.4-1 Display Example of Filter Properties
The Move filter arrows and [Cancel] button are not present since filter properties are for refer-
ence only.

<A9. Detecting and Displaying Differences in Alarm Setpoint Values> A9-1
A9. Detecting and Displaying

Differences in Alarm Setpoint
Values
The CAMS for HIS provides a window that compares the alarm setpoint values (Master) set at
engineering with the alarm setpoint values (Current) used in actual plant operation, and dis-
plays differences if any. This window is called the alarm setpoint difference window. This
chapter explains the alarm setpoint difference window on the following items.
• Basic operations in the alarm setpoint difference window
Methods of starting and closing, window configuration and security of the alarm setpoint
difference window are explained.
• Detecting differences in alarm setpoint values
Operations to detect differences in alarm setpoint values are explained.
• Setting master alarm setpoint values to the current setpoints (master setting)
Operations to set the master alarm setpoint values to the current setpoints are called the
master setting. The master setting is explained.
n Display Example of the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window

An example of display of the alarm setpoint difference window is shown below.
Deviation of ASPs - FCS0101
Enforcement Stop Enforcement
No Enforcement Result Tag Name Data Item Tag Comment Master Current Deviation Deviation (%)
1 PID001 HH Discharge line B 450.0 M3/H 500.0 M3/H 50.0 M3/H 10.0%
2 PID001 LL Discharge line B 50.0 M3/H 0.0 M3/H 50.0 M3/H 10.0%
3 PID001 PH Discharge line B 400.0 M3/H 500.0 M3/H 100.0 M3/H 20.0%
4 PID001 PL Discharge line B 150.0 M3/H 0.0 M3/H 150.0 M3/H 30.0%
5 PID001 DL Discharge line B 300.0 M3/H 500.0 M3/H 200.0 M3/H 40.0%
1 / 1
End Number of selected items: 2
Figure A9-1 Display Example of Alarm Setpoint Difference Window
n Functions of the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window

The alarm setpoint difference window provides the following functions.
• Compare the alarm setpoint values set at engineering with those used in actual plant op-
eration
• Display the detected difference information of alarm setpoint values
• Set the master setpoints to the current setpoints as necessary
• Output the detected difference information of alarm setpoint values and save it as an ex-
ternal file to be imported to the master setpoints

<A9.1 Basic Operations in the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window> A9-2
A9.1 Basic Operations in the Alarm Setpoint

Difference Window
This section explains the following basic operations of the alarm setpoint difference window.
• How to start
• Window configuration
• How to close
• Security of the alarm setpoint difference window

A9.1.1 How to Start the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window

The alarm setpoint difference window is started in the following methods. One window per
HIS can be opened. If the remote operation and monitoring server (HIS-TSE) is used, only
one window can be opened among the HIS-TSE server and client PCs.
• Calling from the Tuning view
• Calling from the Process Report view
• Calling from the Overview toolbox of the Browser Bar
• Calling from the preset menu of the Browser Bar
• Calling by entering the window name
n Calling from the Tuning View

Click the [Deviation of ASPs] button in the toolbar of the Tuning view. The alarm setpoint dif-
ference window is called and starts detecting differences. The scope of detection is function
blocks displayed by the Tuning view.
Figure A9.1.1-1 Toolbar of Tuning View
TIP The [Deviation of ASPs] button is not displayed if the CAMS for HIS is not enabled.
n Calling from the Process Report View

Click the [Deviation of ASPs] button in the toolbar of the Process Report view. The alarm set-
point difference window is called and starts detecting differences. The scope of detection is
function blocks displayed in tag reports of the Process Report view.
Figure A9.1.1-2 Toolbar of Process Report View
TIP The [Deviation of ASPs] button is not displayed if the CAMS for HIS is not enabled.
n Calling from the Overview Toolbox of the Browser Bar

Perform the following operation to call from the Overview Toolbox of the Browser Bar.
1. Open the Plant tab of the Browser Bar.
2. Select and right-click a target node.
3. Select [Deviation of ASPs] from the context menu.
The alarm setpoint difference window is called and starts detecting differences. The
scope of detection is function blocks belonging to the selected node.

Overview Overview
View Trend Plant View Trend Plant
P MYPJT P MYPJT
FCS Deviation of ASPs (D) FCS0101
HIS ?DR00015010101
FCS Search (F) TEST001
SCS Faceplate (P)
Favorite (A) Tuning (W)
Process Alarm (L)
Trend (T)
Control (C)
Graphic (G)
Deviation of ASPs (D)
Search (F)
Favorite (A)
(Left: For a scope above a function block. Right: For a scope of a function block.)
Figure A9.1.1-3 Example of Overview Menu of Browser Bar
TIP [Deviation of ASPs] is not displayed in the context menu if CAMS for HIS is not enabled.
n Calling from the Preset Menu of the Browser Bar

Perform the following steps to call from the Preset Menu of the Browser Bar.
1. Assign the alarm setpoint difference window call function in the preset menu of the
Browser Bar. In order to assign the function, set items for calling the alarm setpoint differ-
ence window in the Preset Menu tab of the HIS Setup window.
2. Click the items should be set in the Preset Menu tab.
The alarm setpoint difference window is called and starts detecting differences. The
scope of detection varies depending on the parameter set in the Preset Menu tab.
The following items should be set in the Preset Menu tab.
Table A9.1.1-1 Items Set in Preset Menu Tab

Item Description
Function Type CallWindow
Window Type Deviation of ASPs
Tag name
Parameter (*1)
Plant hierarchy
*1: Specify only one of the parameters. If you do not specify any parameter, the scope of detection becomes the current project.
TIP If the CAMS for HIS is not enabled, an error message appears when you click the preset menu.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the Preset Menu tab of the HIS Setup window, refer to:
"■ Setup Items in the Preset Menu Tab" in 4.3.7, "Preset Menu Tab" in the Human Interface Stations
Reference Vol.1 (IM 33K03F21-50E)

n Calling by Entering the Window Name

In the Name Input toolbox of the Browser Bar, enter the window name and parameters for
calling the alarm setpoint difference window. The alarm setpoint difference window is called
and starts detecting differences. The scope of detection varies depending on the entered pa-
rameter.
The following items should be entered.
Table A9.1.1-2 Items Entered in Name Input Toolbox

Window Name Parameter (*1)
Tag name
.AS
Plant hierarchy
*1: Enter only one of the parameters. If you do not enter any parameter, the scope of detection becomes the current project.
TIP If the CAMS for HIS is not enabled, an error message appears when you enter the window name and param-
eter.

A9.1.2 Alarm Setpoint Difference Window Configuration

This section explains the configuration of the alarm setpoint difference window.
n External Appearance of Alarm Setpoint Difference Window

The external appearance of the alarm setpoint difference window is shown below.
Title Bar
Deviation of ASPs - HIS0164
Enforcement Stop Enforcement Toolbar

Deviation detection
result display area
0 / 0 Navigation Bar
End Number of selected items: 0 Status Bar
Figure A9.1.2-1 External Appearance of Alarm Setpoint Difference Window
n Display Areas in Alarm Setpoint Difference Window

The alarm setpoint difference window has the following five areas.
• Title bar
• Toolbar
• Deviation detection result display area
• Navigation bar
• Status bar
Each area is explained below.
l Title Bar
An example of title bar display is shown below.
Deviation of ASPs [Cannot be set] – FCS0101
Access denied Filter criteria
Window name Keyword for comparing scope
Figure A9.1.2-2 Display Example of Title Bar
The title bar displays the following information.

• Window name
• Access permitted or denied
If a login user has no authority to access the window, [Cannot be set] appears next to the
window name.

• Scope of detecting differences
Either one of following items is displayed.
• Tag name
• Plant hierarchy
• Tab name of the tag report search dialog box of process report
• Project ID if the plant hierarchy is specified when connecting multiple projects
• Filter conditions
l Toolbar
The buttons on the toolbar are shown below.
Figure A9.1.2-3 Save
Save: Outputs all results of detected alarm setpoint value differences at once and save them
as an external file. The file format is CSV (.csv).
Figure A9.1.2-4 Show deviation
Show deviation: Detects alarm setpoint value differences again and updates the display on
the alarm setpoint difference window.
Figure A9.1.2-5 Stop deviation
Stop deviation: Stops detection of alarm setpoint value differences.
Figure A9.1.2-6 Scope of deviation detection
Scope of deviation detection: Displays the Scope of deviation detection dialog box, where it is
possible to check the scope of detecting alarm setpoint value differences.
Figure A9.1.2-7 Select All
Select All: Selects all the [Enforcement] check boxes on the displayed page.
Figure A9.1.2-8 Cancel All
Cancel All: Clears all the [Enforcement] check boxes on the displayed page.
Figure A9.1.2-9 Filter
Filter: Displays the Filtering dialog box.

Enforcement
Figure A9.1.2-10 Enforcement
Enforcement: Sets the master setpoints to the current setpoints for alarm setpoint values
whose [Enforcement] check boxes are selected.
Stop Enforcement
Figure A9.1.2-11 Stop Enforcement
Stop Enforcement: Stops the master setting.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the master setting, refer to:
A9.3, “Setting Master Alarm Setpoint Values to Current Setpoints (Master Setting)” on page A9-17
l Deviation Detection Result Display Area

This area displays differences between the master setpoints and the current setpoints. A sin-
gle item of difference information is shown in each row.
The deviation detection result display area displays the following items.
• Enforcement
Select this check box when you want to set alarm setpoint values managed as the master
setpoints to the current setpoints.
• Result
[Deviation detection failed] is displayed if detection of differences in alarm setpoint values
fails.
In addition, [Enforcement Failed] is displayed if the master setting fails, or [Enforcement
Completed] if the master setting successfully completed.
• Tag Name, Data Item, Tag Comment
Tag Name, Data Item and Tag Comment of function blocks to which alarm setpoint values
belong are displayed.
• Master
Alarm setpoint values managed as the master setpoints are displayed with engineering
units.
• Current
Alarm setpoint values being used as the current setpoints are displayed with engineering
units.
• Deviation
The absolute values of differences between the master setpoints and the current set-
points are displayed with engineering units.
• Deviation (%)
The absolute values of differences between the master setpoints and the current set-
points are converted to percentages and displayed with the % symbol.
If there are a large number of difference information items, the page will be divided with about
250 rows per page. Note that alarm setpoint values belonging to the same function block are
not divided and will be shown on the same page.

l Navigation Bar
If the difference information items are divided into multiple pages, the following navigation but-
tons may be used to switch pages.
Current page number Total number of pages
1 / 3
First Page Previous Page Next Page Last Page
Figure A9.1.2-12 Buttons for Switching Pages
l Status Bar
The status of the alarm setpoints difference window or progress of operations are displayed.
Information displayed in the status bar during operation is different from during standby.
The following information is displayed during operation.
• Progress of difference detection
• Progress of the master setting
• Progress of file saving
• Progress of filtering
<Running>
Enforcement… 12 / 48
Window status Progress
Figure A9.1.2-13 Display Example of Status Bar during Operation
The following information is displayed during standby.

• File name, when you saved a file
• Number of items for which the Enforcement check box is selected if the master setting
was performed, etc.
<Standby>
End CAMSDeviation_FCS0101...135259.csv Number of selected items: 42
Window status File name of saved file Number of selections
Figure A9.1.2-14 Display Example of Status Bar during Standby

A9.1.3 How to Close the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window

This section explains how to close the alarm setpoint difference window.
n Closing the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window

The alarm setpoint difference window is closed in the following methods.
• Clicking the close button on the upper right corner of the alarm setpoint difference window
• Performing user-in or user-out operation

A9.1.4 Security of the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window

This section explains the following security measures.
• Authority to access operation and monitoring
• Scope of operation and monitoring
n Security by Authority to Access Operation and Monitoring

The access level to the alarm setpoint difference window is "3."
The authority to access operation and monitoring of the alarm setpoint difference window is
applied according to the privilege level (authority) when the alarm setpoint difference window
is started. The access authority is not affected even if you change the user’s privilege level
(authority) using the mode selection key of the operation keyboard while the window is dis-
played.
If the security level is set to 5 with the privilege level of S3, alarm setpoint values are read-
only. In this case, the current setpoints are displayed in the alarm setpoint difference window,
but the [Enforcement] check box is not displayed, and thus master setting is not allowed.
If the security level is set to 8 with the privilege level of S3, alarm setpoint values cannot be
read or written. In this case, the current setpoints are not displayed in the alarm setpoint dif-
ference window.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the authority to access operation and monitoring window, refer to:
"■ Window Operation and Monitoring Authority" in 3.3, "Privilege Level" in the Engineering Reference
Vol.1 (IM 33K03G21-50E)
n Security by Scope of Operation and Monitoring

In the alarm setpoint difference window, the current setpoints can be displayed and master
setting is allowed even for the tags other than those specified in the monitoring range for both
the user security and HIS security. On the other hand, for the tags other than those specified
in the operation and monitoring range for both security settings, the current setpoints can be
displayed, but master setting is not allowed. The [Enforcement] check box is not displayed.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the HIS security and User security, refer to:
3, "Security Policy" in the Engineering Reference Vol.1 (IM 33K03G21-50E)

<A9.2 Detecting Differences in Alarm Setpoint Values> A9-12
A9.2 Detecting Differences in Alarm Setpoint

Values
This section explains the operation of detecting differences in alarm setpoint values.
n Starting Difference Detection

To detect differences in alarm setpoint values, start the alarm setpoint difference window. Dif-
ference detection is automatically started immediately after the window opens. The difference
detection is conducted in units of function blocks. When the detection is completed, differen-
ces detected are displayed in the deviation detection result display area.
A display example of differences in alarm setpoint values is shown below.
Figure A9.2-1 Display Example of Differences in Alarm Setpoint Values
l Master Alarm Setpoint Value Displayed with Asterisks (*******)

If the master alarm setpoint value is designated in percentage, the displayed number of digits
of actual quantity value calculated based on the scale high and low limits may exceed 7 digits,
or the value becomes inappropriate. In such cases, the master alarm setpoint value and the
difference will be displayed with asterisks (*******).
An example of the master setpoint value displayed with asterisks is shown below.
2 Deviation detection failed PID001 LL Discharge line B ******* M3/H 0.000 M3/H ******* M3/H *******%
Figure A9.2-2 Example of Master Setpoint Value Displayed with Asterisks
When this occurs, re-engineer the scale high/low limits of master alarm setpoint values to
make the displayed number of digits become 7 or less by reducing the number of decimal dig-
its of the scale, for example.
l Current Alarm Setpoint Value Displayed with Asterisks (*******)

The current setpoints of alarm setpoint values may not be acquired in some situations, for ex-
ample, when the control station is in the Not Ready status. In such cases, the current alarm
setpoint value and the difference will be displayed with asterisks (*******).
An example of the current setpoint value displayed with asterisks is shown below.
6 Deviation detection failed PID001 VL Discharge line B 20.000 M3/H ******* M3/H ******* M3/H *******%
Figure A9.2-3 Example of Current Setpoint Value Displayed with Asterisks
When this type of display appears, you need to check the statuses of the control station and
the control bus so that communication can be performed properly.

n Updating Displays in the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window

Once opened, the alarm setpoint difference window is not automatically updated. If you want
to check the latest difference information, click the [Show deviation] button on the toolbar.
n Stopping Difference Detection

To stop detecting differences in alarm setpoint values, click the [Stop deviation] button of the
toolbar. Differences detected at that point are displayed in the deviation detection result dis-
play area.
Since this is not the pausing function, it is not possible to resume detection from the stopped
position.
n Changing Scope of Detecting Differences

Once opened, it is not possible to change the scope of detecting differences on the alarm set-
point difference window. If you want to change the scope, close the alarm setpoint difference
window and then start the window again with the desired scope.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to start the alarm setpoint difference window, refer to:
A9.1.1, “How to Start the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window” on page A9-3
l Checking Scope of Detecting Differences

It is possible to check the scope of detecting differences on the Scope of deviation detection
dialog box. To display the Scope of deviation detection dialog box, click the [Scope of devia-
tion detection] button on the toolbar.
A display example of the Scope of deviation detection dialog box is shown below.
Scope of deviation detection
Range : Station Specification: FCS0101
Tag : Specified Tag: PID*
Element Type : All Element Type
State : All
Arbitrary Character :
Process Vale of Tag Item :
Close
Figure A9.2-4 Display Example of the Scope of Deviation Detection Dialog Box

A9.2.1 Operations Performed Based on Difference

Information
The following operations can be performed based on the difference information displayed on
the alarm setpoint difference window.
• Sorting
• Filtering
• Performing right-click menu operations
• Outputting difference information and saving it in an external file
This section explains these operations.
n Sorting Difference Information

The target of sorting is the difference information displayed on a single page. Click the item
name with which the information should be sorted.
If difference information is displayed over multiple pages, filter and narrow down the differ-
ence information so that it is displayed on a single page before sorting.
n Filtering Difference Information

TIP If you start or cancel filtering, the [Enforcement] check box is automatically cleared.
It is possible to filter and narrow down differences. Perform the following operation.
1. Click the [Filter] button on the toolbar.
The Filtering dialog box appears.
Filtering
Filtering
Tag Name
Data Item
Tag Comment
Cancel OK
Figure A9.2.1-1 Filtering Dialog Box
2. Select the [Filtering] check box.

It becomes possible to enter filtering conditions.
3. Enter filtering conditions and click the [OK] button.
The filtering is started. The result is displayed in the deviation detection result display
area.
l Filtering Conditions
Tag Name, Data Item and Tag Comment can be specified as filtering conditions. How to enter
filtering conditions is explained below.
• If you enter multiple items, such as Tag Name and Data Item, or Tag Name, Data Item
and Tag Comment, it means "AND."
• Any item not entered is ignored.

• Characters are case sensitive.
• It is possible to enter asterisks as wild card.
Example of entry: "ABC*", "*XYZ", "*DEF*", "G*H"
• Specified filtering conditions are maintained until they are changed or the alarm setpoint
difference window is closed.
l Filtering Targets
The target of filtering is all the difference information displayed in the deviation detection result
display area. If difference information is displayed over multiple pages, those on all pages be-
comes the target of filtering.
l Cancelling Filtering
Perform the following operation.
1. Click the [Filter] button on the toolbar.
The Filtering dialog box appears.
2. Clear the [Filtering] check box and click the [OK] button.
Filtering is cancelled.
l Automatic Cancellation of Filtering

If you update the display on the alarm setpoint difference window while filtering is being per-
formed, the filtering operation is automatically cancelled.
n Selecting Difference Information and Performing Right-click Menu

Operations
It is possible to perform operations selected from the menu displayed by right-clicking, using
the tag name of difference information as the key. Perform the following operation.
1. Select the target row of difference information in the deviation detection result display
area and right-click the mouse.
2. Select the desired menu item from the context menu.
A display example of the context menu is shown below.
Historical Viwer Calls historical view (Fixed)
PID001 Selected tag
Faceplate
Tuning
Process Alarm Menu items for calling views
Trend
Control
Edit Menu… Starts HIS Menu Editor (Fixed)
Figure A9.2.1-2 Display Example of Context Menu
Furthermore it is possible to edit the context menu.

SEE
ALSO For more information about editing context menu, refer to:
"■ Editing Context Menu" in 3.1.4, "Context Menus in Graphic View" in the Human Interface Stations
Reference Vol.1 (IM 33K03F21-50E)

n Outputting Difference Information and Saving in External File

It is possible to output difference information and save it in an external file. Click the [Save]
button on the toolbar. The status bar shows the progress while saving the file, and the file
name after the completion.
End File Name: CAMSDeviation_FCS0101_TESTUSER_20110517_155022.csv
Figure A9.2.1-3 Display Example of File Name
The file format is CSV (.csv).

An external file is created for each result of alarm setpoint value difference detection. All dif-
ference information is output at once and it is not possible to select specific difference infor-
mation to be output.
If the result of difference detection changes as a result of operations such as updating the dis-
play on the alarm setpoint difference window or changing the scope of detecting differences,
another external file is created. If the result of difference detection is the same, an existing
external file is overwritten.
It is possible to reflect the current alarm setpoints values to the master setpoints, by importing
this external file using the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to import an external file in which difference information is saved,
refer to:
l External File Saving Destination

External files shall be saved in the following folder.
<CENTUM VP Installed Folder>/CAMS/save/AlarmSetpoint
l Maximum Number of External Files that can be Saved: 10

Up to 10 external files can be saved. If you attempt to save more than 10 files, an error dialog
box appears and the file cannot be saved. In this case, delete external files no longer neces-
sary.
l Deleting External Files

Manually delete external files no longer necessary.

<A9.3 Setting Master Alarm Setpoint Values to Current Setpoints (Master Setting)> A9-17
A9.3 Setting Master Alarm Setpoint Values to

Current Setpoints (Master Setting)
It is possible to set the master alarm setpoint values to the current setpoints. This operation is
called the master setting. This section explains how to perform the master setting.
n Starting Master Setting

Set the master setpoints corresponding to the alarm setpoint values selected in the deviation
detection result display area to the current setpoints. The operation is as follows.
1. Start the alarm setpoint difference window.
Detected differences are displayed in the deviation detection result display area.
2. Select the [Enforcement] check box for the alarm setpoint values to which the master set-
ting is performed. If you want to select all the [Enforcement] check boxes, click the [Select
All] button on the toolbar.
3. Click the [Enforcement] button on the toolbar.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
4. If there are no errors in enabling/disabling check boxes, click the [OK] button.
The master setting is started. The progress is displayed on the status bar while the mas-
ter setting is being performed.
When the master setting is completed, "Enforcement Completed" is displayed in the [Result]
field of the deviation detection result display area. The [Enforcement] check box grays out.
4 Enforcement Completed PID001 PL Discharge line B 150.0 M3/H
Figure A9.3-1 Display Example when Master Setting is Completed
If the master setting failed, "Enforcement Failed" is displayed in the [Result] field of the devia-
tion detection result display area.
1 Enforcement Failed PID001 HH Discharge line B 450.0 M3/H 500.0 M3/H 50.0 M3/H 10.0%
Figure A9.3-2 Display Example when Master Setting Failed
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to start the alarm setpoint difference window, refer to:
A9.1.1, “How to Start the Alarm Setpoint Difference Window” on page A9-3
l Targets of Master Setting

The [Enforcement] button is enabled when the target difference information is displayed on a
single page. If difference information is displayed over multiple pages, filter and narrow down
the difference information so that it is displayed on a single page before performing the mas-
ter setting. You can narrow down the difference information in the following operation.
• Filtering difference information
• Changing the scope of detecting differences and re-starting the alarm setpoint difference
window

<A9.3 Setting Master Alarm Setpoint Values to Current Setpoints (Master Setting)> A9-18
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to change the scope of detecting differences, refer to:
“n Changing Scope of Detecting Differences” on page A9-13
For more information about the operation to filter difference information, refer to:
“n Filtering Difference Information” on page A9-14
l Behavior of Master Setting with Tag Mark Confirmation

User authentication with a confirmation dialog box is not performed, but the master setting is
performed.
l Behavior of Master Setting when Master Alarm Setpoint Values are Outside
the Setting Range
An error message is not displayed, but the master setting is performed.
l Behavior of Master Setting when Master Alarm Setpoint Values are Outside
the Scale Range
The master setting cannot be performed. An error message appears, and "Enforcement
Failed" is displayed in the [Result] field of the deviation detection result display area.
n Stopping Master Setting

Click the [Stop Enforcement] button on the toolbar. The results of master setting performed at
that point are displayed in the deviation detection result display area.
Since this is the pause function, it is possible to resume the master setting from the stopped
position.
n Resuming Master Setting

Click the [Enforcement] button on the toolbar while the master setting is stopped. It is possible
to change the selected/cleared status of [Enforcement] check box(es) before resuming the
master setting.
n Operation History of Master Setting

The operation history of the master setting is logged every time it is performed.

<A10. Messages of CENTUM-XL and μXL> A10-1
A10. Messages of CENTUM-XL and μXL

CAMS for HIS can also handle the A&E messages of CENTUM-XL and μXL stations (herein-
after referred to as the legacy stations) connected on the network through bus converter
(BCV). The unique specifications and actions regarding the messages of the legacy stations
will be explained in this section.
n Characteristics of Displays on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

The displays of the process alarm messages of the legacy stations (not including the annun-
ciators) on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS are different from the CENTUM VP process
alarm messages.(*1) The main differences between the process alarm messages of the leg-
acy stations and the process alarm messages of CENTUM VP are as follows:
• The number of messages from legacy stations is limited to 20 per each tag.
• The alarm tree view (or eclipsing) is only grouped per each tag.
• Continuous Shelving is processed per each tag.
• Acknowledge operation is performed per each tag.
• For multiple alarm messages of one tag, the recovery messages not paired with all the
alarm messages, there is only one recovery message for the tag.
This feature is the same regardless if the CAMS for HIS is enabled or disabled.
• The message text does not contain the process data.
• The message with alarm status of [NR] , the messages with status of [CAL] and the
message with status of [AOF] may also be displayed.
*1: For displaying annunciator messages, up to ten messages per each tag can be displayed. Since each tag only has On and
Off messages, displaying messages by tag and displaying messages by alarm will have the same result. Moreover, the ac-
tions are the same regardless if the CAMS for HIS is enabled or disabled.
l When Multiple Messages Occurred Simultaneously

When multiple messages occurred simultaneously, only the message with the highest alarm
priority will be displayed, and displayed as an unacknowledged message. This action of the
simultaneously occurred messages including the messages occurred at the timing of occur-
ring or recovering of a process alarm, releasing CAL (NCL) and AOF (AON) statuses.
l When Messages with Alarm Status of [NR] are Received

When a message with the alarm status of [NR] is received, CAMS for HIS will delete the other
acknowledged messages of the same tag. If all the messages of the same tag are all ac-
knowledged, all the messages of the tag including the message with status of [NR] will be de-
leted. If there is one or more than one messages of the tag is not yet acknowledged, the mes-
sage with alarm status of status to [NR] will be displayed as unacknowledged.
l When Messages with Data Status of [CAL] or AOF are Received

The message may be displayed as an unacknowledged when an alarm status in [CAL] or
[AOF] of a function blocks changes.
n Characteristics of Displays on the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS

When displaying the process alarm message (not including the annunciators) of legacy sta-
tions on Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS, the message may be displayed twice. One is dis-
played with the process data while the other is displayed without process data. The previous
one is for printout and the later one is for display on screen. Moreover, on Historical Message

<A10. Messages of CENTUM-XL and μXL> A10-2
Report window, only the messages with process data which are originally for printout are dis-
played.
n Restriction Regarding Simulation Alarm Generation Tests

Actions of A&E messages of legacy stations cannot be checked by generating simulation
alarms. If A&E messages (simulation alarms) with tag names of legacy stations are gener-
ated, they are displayed as A&E messages (simulation alarms) in the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).
n HIS and CAMS for HIS Regarding Messages of Legacy Stations

On HIS operation and monitoring window, the process alarm messages of legacy stations will
be displayed regardless the alarm inhibition settings on CAMS for HIS.

<B. Engineering for Using CAMS for HIS > B-1
B. Engineering for Using CAMS for HIS

This part describes the types and operations of the engineering tasks that are required to use
CAMS for HIS.

Blank Page
<B1. Engineering for Alarm Management with CAMS for HIS> B1-1
B1. Engineering for Alarm Management

with CAMS for HIS
This chapter explains engineering required for alarm management using the CAMS for HIS
functions.
n Message Actions when CAMS for HIS is Undergoing Engineering

Maintenance
When CAMS for HIS is undergoing the engineering maintenance, the A&E messages will act
as follows.
• Messages defined on CAMS for HIS act according to the corresponding settings.
• Messages not defined on CAMS for HIS act according to the settings defined in the corre-
sponding function block(s).
• The output of repeated warning alarm varies with the alarm priority defined for the corre-
sponding function block.
n Workflow of CAMS for HIS Engineering

The workflow of CAMS for HIS engineering is as follows.
1. Configure alarm actions and other items in Project Property.
2. Perform necessary engineering work for items other than CAMS for HIS, such as configu-
ration of items common to the project and configurations of HIS, FCS, and function block.
3. Perform necessary engineering work on the four CAMS for HIS builders.
4. Enable CAMS for HIS on HIS Utility, and then reboot the PC after defining the equaliza-
tion scope and downloading master.
5. Perform engineering work as necessary, other than steps 2 and 3, using the Configurator
of CAMS for HIS.
6. Customize the Message Monitor of CAMS of HIS as necessary in the Option window of
the Message Monitor of CAMS of HIS.
7. Simulate the alarm management operations using the CAMS for HIS functions in the
Function Check mode of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, if necessary.

<B1.1 Alarm Actions and Other Configurations> B1-2
B1.1 Alarm Actions and Other Configurations

Alarm actions, alarm status display action when an alarm to be suppressed occurred, and
other actions are configured in the CAMS for HIS tab of Project Property. This section ex-
plains the applicable settings items.
n Project Property
The figure below shows the CAMS for HIS tab of the Project Property.
Properties
Name and Position Outline Constant Detailed Setting Graphic CAMS for HIS
Alarm action
Method Consolidated
Display Alarm status of suppressed tag

Detection=Disable Display alarm status in CAMS for HIS style
Priority=Logging/Reference Display alarm status in CAMS for HIS style
Suppression=ON Display alarm status in CAMS for HIS style
Create R3/R4.01 Compatible Database

Multiple Project Connection
Equalize the alarm event data and CAMS engineering data with connected project(M)
(Make sure that this option is also enabled in the connected project)
OK Cancel
Figure B1.1-1 Project Property
n Alarm Action
Alarm actions can be determined, not for each function block, but for each project, using
CAMS for HIS. There are two types of alarm action.
TIP When multiple projects are connected, the alarm action should be standardized in all the connected projects.
• Consolidated
Irrelevant to the priority configured on the Alarm Priority builder, the alarm flashing action
and the flow from occurrence to deletion of an alarm are consolidated into the action con-
figured by CAMS for HIS. The flow from occurrence to deletion of an alarm is usually dis-
played in four different statuses by CAMS for HIS.
• CENTUM original
CENTUN process alarm messages act according to the priority defined on the Alarm Pri-
ority builder.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the four statuses from occurrence to deletion of an alarm, refer to:
“n When Alarm Action is Set to [Consolidated] and then Auto Clear is Set to [None] or [Disable]” on
page A3-6
n Display Alarm Status of Suppressed Tag

In the CAMS for HIS default setting, when A&E messages are suppressed by a method other
than shelving, the alarm status also displays the result of suppression. However, CENTUM

process alarm messages can be changed to be displayed as unsuppressed. There are follow-
ing two options:
• Display alarm status in CAMS for HIS style (Default)
The result of alarms suppressed by CAMS for HIS is displayed.
• Display alarm status in FCS style
The alarm status actually detected is displayed. The actual FCS status is indicated.
l Message Suppression Operation in which the Type of the Tag's Alarm

Status Display can be Selected
There are four ways to hide unnecessary A&E messages in CAMS for HIS, but there are only
the following three ways by which the tag’s alarm status display can be selected.
• Detection=Disable
Select [Disable] for [Detection] on the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
• Priority=Logging/Reference
Select [Logging] or [Reference] in [Alarm Priority - modified] of the CAMS for HIS Alarm
builder.
• Suppression=ON
Target messages are suppressed.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the display actions on operation and monitoring windows when [Disable] is selec-
ted for [Detection], refer to:
“n Detection Setting” on page B2-23
For more information about the display actions on the operation and monitoring windows when [Logging] or
[Reference] is selected for [Alarm Priority - modified], refer to:
“n AlarmPriority Setting” on page B2-20
For more information about Suppression, refer to:
A4.2.5, “Suppression” on page A4-19
For more information about the display actions on the operation and monitoring windows when messages are
suppressed, refer to:
“n When Messages are Suppressed by the Function Unique to CAMS for HIS” on page A6-2
n Create R3/R4.01 Compatible Database

This check box is cleared when a new project is created.
Be sure to check this option if the software version is older than R4.02.00 but CAMS for HIS
is also enabled in the HIS. And then you need to manually create a compatible database.
1. Start each of the following builders, save the database, and then exit.
• Security builder
• User Definition Status Character Strings builder
• CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
• CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder
• CAMS for HIS Shelf builder
• CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder
2. Download the project common section to HISs of R4.02.00 or later revision.

l Case in which This Check Box is Selected Automatically

When a project created by a revision older than R4.02.00 is opened in System View of
R4.02.00 or later, the revision is automatically updated for the project, and a R3/R4.01 com-
patible database is created. At this time, this check box is automatically selected.
l Circumstance that the Option is not Needed

If the software version in all CAMS for HIS enabled HISs of the project are R4.02.00 or newer,
this option should not be checked.
n Equalize the Alarm Event Data and CAMS Engineering Data with
Connected Project
HISs with R4.03.00 or Newer Software Support Multiple Project Connection.
If the multiple projects are connected, and if some of the connected projects use older soft-
ware than R4.03.00 and the CAMS for HIS is enabled, this option needs to be cleared. when
a new project is created, by default, this option is cleared.
n Downloading to an HIS
Download the project common section to apply the contents configured in the CAMS for HIS
tab of Project Property. HISs on which the download has been completed will operate based
on the new settings. They do not need to be rebooted.
TIP When downloading the project common section, some other settings may be downloaded together. Conse-
quently, the HIS needs to be restarted.

<B1.2 CAMS for HIS Builder Engineering> B1-5
B1.2 CAMS for HIS Builder Engineering

The CAMS for HIS consists of following builders:
• CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder, CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
For alarm engineering
For shelf configuration
For assignment of the authority to customize the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
This section explains setting items for these builders.
n Priorities of Permitting and Denying Operation and Monitoring

On the CAMS for HIS, all users are granted with the operation and monitoring authority as a
rule. To restrict the authority, set the applicable users as part of the Denied User or the Denied
User Group. Note also that if the same user is permitted and denied for operation and moni-
toring at the same time, the denial setting has a higher priority. Therefore, it is necessary to
pay attention when setting the permission or denial for operation and monitoring respectively
on the CENTUM VP Security builder, the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, and the CAMS for HIS
Alarm Group builder.

B1.2.1 Operations Common to Builders

This section explains the operations that are common to all CAMS for HIS builders. The infor-
mation primarily includes the following:
• Starting the builder
• Window configuration of the builder
• General operations for configuring engineering information
• Downloading engineering information
• Exiting the builder
n Starting the Builder

1. In System View, select [<Project Folder>] - [COMMON] - [CAMS_FOR_HIS].
The builder names in the CAMS_FOR_HIS folder will be displayed.
System View (CENTUM VP) - CAMS_FOR_HIS
File Edit View Tools Load Project FCS HIS Help
a
87
z
All Folders Opened Folder : CAMS_FOR_HIS

- SYSTEM VIEW Name Type Modified
- MYPJT CAMSAlm CAMS for HIS Alam
+ COMMON CAMSAlmgrp CAMS for HIS Alam Group 2009/10/20 12 :25
CAMS_FOR_HIS CAMSShelf CAMS for HIS Shelf
MATRIX CAMSMsgMonitor CAMS for HIS Message M... 2009/10/20 12 :25
+ BATCH
+ FCS0101
+ HIS0164
4 objects
Figure B1.2.1-1 Builders in CAMS_FOR_HIS Folder
2. Double-click a builder name.
l Updating the Content Displayed on the Builder

When starting the CAMS for HIS builders, the settings defined on the control drawing builder
and other builders will be acquired and displayed. The displayed settings are referred to as
project information. When downloading the modified projected information while the CAMS for
HIS builder is running, the contents need to be manually updated to the CAMS for HIS build-
er.
TIP When project information is reloaded by the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, the definition information of the
CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder will also be reloaded. Consequently, the alarm group information will also
be updated.

1. Save the CAMS for HIS builders being edited, if any.

• Select [View] - [Reload Project Information] in the menu bar.
• Click [Reload Project Information] in the toolbar.
The progress bar is displayed in the status bar while the information is being loaded.
The builder operations are disabled until all information has been loaded completely.
The project information loaded by the CAMS for HIS builders is as follows.
Table B1.2.1-1 Project Information Loaded by the CAMS for HIS Builders
Related other builder/viewer Applicable project information CAMS for HIS Builder reading in-
formation
Function Block List Builder Tag name Alarm Builder
Control Drawing Builder Model name
UGS Builder Tag comment
Engineering unit
Engineering Unit Builder Engineering unit Alarm Builder
Annunciator Builder Annunciator message Alarm Builder
Operator Guide Builder Operator guide message Alarm Builder
Alarm Status Character String Alarm status Alarm Builder
Builder
System Fixed Status Character
String Viewer
Plant Hierarchy Builder Plant hierarchy Alarm Builder
New Creation of System View
(FCS/SCS/BCV)
Alarm Process Table Priority (original) Alarm Builder
Tag mark color (original)
Security Builder User Alarm Builder
User group Alarm Group Builder
Shelf Builder
Message Monitor Definition Build-
er
n Window Configuration of the Builder

The external appearance of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder is shown below as an example.

CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder - [Pjt:MYPJT File:CAMSALm.edf]
Menu bar File Edit View Tool Window Help
Toolbar 1000 Alarm/Sheet
Pjt:MYPJT File:xxxxxxxx.edf
Tree view
Setting item display area
Message display area
Status bar
Figure B1.2.1-2 External Appearance of CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder
The builder consists of six areas.

• Menu bar
• Toolbar
• Tree view
• Setting item display area
• Message display area
• Status bar
Each area is explained below.
l Menu Bar
The operation to be executed on the builder can be selected. The list of menu items common
to all builders is shown below.
Table B1.2.1-2 CAMS for HIS Builder Menu List

Menu ti- Menu item Function
tle
File Save Save engineering result defined in the builder.
External File Import… Load data of an external file into the builder.
Export… Output data displayed in the builder to an external file.
Print Preview Display the output result to a printer on the screen.
Print... Output data displayed on the builder to a printer.
Download Download engineering result defined with the builder to
HIS.
Exit Close the builder.

Menu ti- Menu item Function
tle
Edit Undo Return the edited cell value to the value before the edi-
tion. (*1)
Cut Cut the value of the selected cell.(*1)
Copy Copy the value of the selected cell.(*1)
Paste Paste the value of the text copied to the clipboard to the
selected cell.(*1)
Delete Delete the value of the selected cell. (*1)
Search… Search for a character string of the setting item display
area.
Replace… Replace a character string of the setting item display
area.
Edit Grid… Enter the selected cells at the same time. (*1)
Default Return the value of the selected cell to the default. (*1)
View Reload Project Information Reload the project information held by the builder.
Setting Column… Set movement of a column and show/hide a column.
Reset Column Width Return the change of column width to the initial status.
Zebra Background Color Switch between enable/disable of the zebra background
color of the setting item display area.
Window Cascade Cascade active document windows.
Horizontal Tile Arrange active document windows side by side.
Vertical Tile Arrange active document windows above and below.
Arrange Icons Arrange icons of minimized document windows.
(Number) (Document window name) All the document window names are displayed in the or-
der of opening and the selected document windows be-
come active.
Help Using the Online Manual… Start StoryVIEW and display how to use the online man-
ual.
Builder Definition Items… Start StoryVIEW and display items defined in the builder.
Version Information… Start the Software Configuration Viewer and display ver-
sion information.
*1: Cell means a cell in the column for defining engineering information.
SEE
ALSO For more information about cell, refer to:
“n General Operations for Configuring Engineering Information” on page B1-11
l Toolbar
The toolbar buttons are explained below.
Figure B1.2.1-3 Save
Save the engineering result defined in the builder.
Figure B1.2.1-4 Print

Output data displayed on the builder to a printer.
Figure B1.2.1-5 Print Preview
Display the output result to a printer on the screen.
Figure B1.2.1-6 Cut
Cut the value of the selected cell.(*1)
Figure B1.2.1-7 Copy
Copy the value of the selected cell.(*1)
Figure B1.2.1-8 Paste
Paste the value of the text copied to the clipboard to the selected cell.(*1)
Figure B1.2.1-9 Undo
Return the edited cell value to the value before the edition.(*1)
Figure B1.2.1-10 Search
Search for a character string of the setting item display area.
Figure B1.2.1-11 Reload Project Information
Reload the project information held by the builder.
Figure B1.2.1-12 Row Display Setting
Set movement of a column and show/hide a row.
Figure B1.2.1-13 Zebra Background Color
Switch between enable/disable of the zebra background color of the setting item display
area.
*1: Cell means a cell in the column for defining engineering information.

SEE
ALSO For more information about cell, refer to:
“n General Operations for Configuring Engineering Information” on page B1-11
l Tree View
Folders are displayed in a hierarchical structure.
Tree view is not available for the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder and the CAMS for HIS
Shelf builder.
l Setting Item Display Area

In this area, you can enter and/or select definition information, such as the attributes and ad-
ditional attributes of alarm sources. If the information is displayed in the table format, you can
change the row height and column width by dragging the boundary. The minimum size is as
follows.
• Row height: No limit. The default height is restored when the builder is rebooted.
• Column width: 20-pixels. The setting immediate before is applied when the builder is re-
booted.
To restore the default column width, perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [View] - [Reset Column Width] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu in the column header area and select [Reset Column Width].
l Message Display Area

Messages are displayed depending on the status.
l Status Bar
The progress bar is displayed depending on the status.
n General Operations for Configuring Engineering Information

This section explains the general operations for configuring engineering information when the
Setting item display area is shown in the table format.
Source Alarm Priority - Alarm Priority - Tag Mark Color Column

original modified - original Header
1 PID1.OOP Medium Medium ■ Red
Line Header 2 PID1.IOP Medium Medium ■ Red Cell
3 PID1.IOP- Medium Medium ■ Red
4 PID1.HH Medium Medium ■ Red
Figure B1.2.1-14 Example of the Setting Item Display Area
Each frame is called a cell. Set engineering information in each cell.

The context menu can be displayed in the cells and the column header area to select the tar-
get operation.
l Setting All Cells at Once

The same information can be set in multiple cells all at once. The operation is as follows.
1. Select the range to be set. If any cells that cannot be edited are selected, they will be ex-
cluded from the setting range. Since the cell selected last is used to set the engineering
information, you cannot set all cells at once if that last cell cannot be edited.

• Select [Edit] - [Edit Grid…] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu from the selected object and then choose [Edit Grid…] in
the context menu.
The cell selected last can now be edited.
3. Set the engineering information in the cell that can now be edited.
The same definition information will be applied to the selected range.
l Undoing
You can undo up to five operations of the following two types.
• Entry/deletion of data to/from a cell
• Addition/deletion of a row
Perform either one of the following three methods.
• Select [Edit] - [Undo] in the menu bar.
• Click [Undo] in the toolbar.
• Display the context menu in the Setting item display area and select [Undo].
The cell that has been undone cannot be redone to the condition before the undo operation
was performed.
l Resetting to [Not Yet Engineered] Status (Returning to Default)

You can reset a cell to the [Not yet engineered] status (default value) by the following opera-
tions.
1. Select the cell to be reset to the default setting. A single cell or multiple cells can be se-
lected. Note, however, that if a row or a column of cells are selected, or all cells are selec-
ted at once, the default setting cannot be restored.
2. Perform either one of the following six methods.
• Select [Edit] - [Default] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu from the selected object and then choose [Default] in the
context menu.
• Select [Edit] - [Cut] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu from the selected object and then choose [Cut] in the con-
text menu.
• Press the [Ctrl] key and the [X] key at the same time on the keyboard.
• Press the [Delete] key on the keyboard.
l Searching
A character string in the cells can be searched for. If there are multiple sheets, all sheets will
be searched. The operation is as follows.
1. Perform either one of the following three methods.
• Select [Edit] - [Search…] in the menu bar.
• Click [Search…] in the toolbar.
• Press the [Ctrl] key and the [F] key at the same time on the keyboard.
The Search dialog box will be displayed.

Search
The following strings :
OR Search next
OR Close
Case sensitivity
Figure B1.2.1-15 Search Dialog Box
2. Enter the character strings, and then click [Search next]. Wildcards such as “*” and “?”
can be used.
l Replacing
A character string in the cells can be replaced. If there are multiple sheets, only those on the
sheet currently displayed are replaced. Character strings in the columns that are not dis-
played in the Setting item display area are also replaced. The operation is as follows.
• Select [Edit] - [Replace…] in the menu bar.
• Press the [Ctrl] key and the [H] key at the same time on the keyboard.
The Replace dialog box will be displayed.
Replace
Search String :
Replace String :
All Replace Close
Figure B1.2.1-16 Replace Dialog Box
2. Enter the character strings and then click [All Replace]. Uppercase and lowercase char-
acters are differentiated.
A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
3. Click [OK].
l Differentiating the Default Value and Set Value

You can tell if the value entered in a cell is a default value or a set value according to the cell
background color or the text color. The explanation is shown in the table below.
Table B1.2.1-3 Explanation about the Cell Background Color and Text Color
Status Background color Charac- Remarks
ter color
Not yet engineered White Gray
Pale violet: If [Zebra Back-
ground Color] is used, only
the even numbered lines
are displayed in pale violet
Already engineered White Black Information saved in database
Cell selected Blue White Highlighted

Status Background color Charac- Remarks
ter color
Cell being edited(*1) White Black The cursor is displayed
Edited (but not yet White Green Same when the default value is restored
saved) Pale violet: If [Zebra Back-
Edited (but not yet Green In the case of cells just like the tag mark
saved) color of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
(when a cell without de-
fault value is restored to
default)
Invalid set data (error Red Black Already set information is displayed(*2)
display cell)
Uneditable cell rows Gray White In the case of cells of rows where more
(excluding uneditable than 32 alarm statuses exist in the same
status of individual cells) tag of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
Status with difference Gray Red In case there is difference in values be-
fore and after migration (*3)
*1: Items of the File menu other than Save, Download, and Exit, as well as the Edit, View, and Tool menu functions become disa-
bled.
*2: Values outside the input range cannot be entered in cells, including pasting and importing.
*3: Will be displayed only in the CAMS for HIS builder started from migration tool. If you move the mouse pointer to a cell, the
setting value before migration will be displayed.
l Selecting a Column Item

A column item can be selected to be displayed in the Setting item display area. The operation
is as follows.
• Select [View] - [Setting Column…] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu in the column header area and select [Setting Column].
The Column Display Setting dialog box will be displayed.

Setting Column
Choose a column name you want to configure display setting for.

Check to display. Uncheck to hide.
Settings arranged in descending order are displayed from left to right on CAMS for HIS Builder
Column Name :
Model Up
Unit
Tag Comment Down
Alarm Priority - original
Disp
Alarm Priority - modified
Tag Mark Color - original UnDisp
Tag Mark Color - modified
Detection
User
Purpose
Consequence
Time-to-respond
Guidance
Auto Clear
Monitoring Denied User
Monitoring Denied User Group
Acknowledgement Denied User
Acknowledgement Denied User Group
Manual Reset Permitted User
Manual Reset Permitted User Group
Alarm Group
OK Cancel
Figure B1.2.1-17 Column Display Setting Dialog Box
2. Select the check boxes of the column items to be displayed. The items will be displayed
in the order they are selected starting from the top. To change the order of display, select
the applicable item and click [Up] or [Down].
3. Click [OK].
The new setting will be applied the next time the builder is started.
l Adding a Row
When you edit the lowest row of the table in the Setting item display area, a new row is auto-
matically added below it. If there is a limit to the number of rows, a new row will no longer be
added after the limit is reached.
SEE
ALSO For more information about alarm sources that can be added for one row at a time, refer to:
“l Alarm Sources that can be Added by a Row at a Time” on page B1-29
l Deleting a Row
• Select a row, and then select [Edit] - [Delete] in the menu bar.
• Select a row, and then select [Delete] from the context menu.
A single row or multiple rows can be selected.
SEE
ALSO For more information about alarm sources that can be deleted for one row at a time, refer to:
“l Alarm Sources that can be Deleted by a Row at a Time” on page B1-29
l Inserting a Row
Rows cannot be inserted.

l Zebra Background Color

You can make the list view easier to see by shading the rows alternately. This is called the
zebra background color. Perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [View] - [Zebra Background Color] in the menu bar.
• Click [Zebra Background Color] in the toolbar.
The following is a display example where the zebra background color is applied.
Tag Tag Mark Color Tag Mark Color Alarm Priority -
Source Model Alarm Group Unit
Comment - original - modified original
1 1TAG-AVE.OOP AVE ■ Red AGStockPrep1 % Medium
2 1TAG-AVE.IOP AVE ■ Red AGStockPrep1 % Medium
3 1TAG-AVE.IOP- AVE ■ Red AGStockPrep1 % Medium
4 1TAG-AVE.HH AVE ■ Red AGStockPrep1 % Medium
5 1TAG-AVE.LL AVE ■ Red AGStockPrep1 % Medium
6 1TAG-AVE.HI AVE ■ Red AGStockPrep1
(NONE) % Medium
7 1TAG-AVE.LO AVE ■ Red AGStockPrep1
AGStockPrep1 % Medium
8 1TAG-AVE.DV+ AVE ■ Yellow AGStockPrep1 % Medium
9 1TAG-AVE.DV- AVE ■ Yellow AGStockPrep1 % Medium
10 1TAG-AVE.VEL+ AVE ■ Yellow AGStockPrep1 % Medium
11 1TAG-AVE.VEL- AVE ■ Yellow AGStockPrep1 % Medium
12 FPB.OOP INDST2 ■ Yellow AGStockPrep2 % Medium
13 FPB.IOP INDST2 ■ Yellow AGStockPrep2 % Medium
Figure B1.2.1-18 Display Example of the Zebra Background Color
l Print Instruction from a Builder

You can print out the Setting item display area. Display the Print dialog box from the builder to
print. The items that can be set in the Print dialog box are as follows.
• Name:
• Print to file
• Print range (All or Selection)
Note that it is not possible to print only the selected area.
• Number of copies (including whether or not collated)
Do not specify any other settings.
The print format is set to tab format in which the title is positioned on the left, and the data
provided on the right. Either A4 or letter size paper can be used.
l Self-Documentation
When the Self-Documentation function is executed, the engineering database is copied for
printing. During the copying process, the engineering database gets locked, and no data can
be saved by the CAMS for HIS builder. Wait for a while before saving the data.
The amount of time required to copy the data depends on the database size.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Self-Documentation, refer to:
5, “Self-Documentation” in the Engineering Reference Vol.3 (IM 33K03G23-50E)
l Exporting
When you export data, the content configured by the CAMS for HIS builder is output to an
external file in csv format (.csv). The information to be exported can be selected for one col-
umn at a time in the Setting item display area. Columns that are not displayed in the Setting
item display area can be included in the range to be exported. The operation is as follows.
1. Select [File] - [External File] - [Export...] in the menu bar.

The Export dialog box is displayed.
Export
No. Export Column Name on Builder Column Name on File

1 Source Source
2 Model Model
3 Unit Unit
4 Tag Comment Tag Comment
5 Alarm Priority - original Alarm Priority - original
6 Alarm Priority - modified Alarm Priority - modified
7 Tag Mark Color - original Tag Mark Color - original
8 Tag Mark Color - modified Tag Mark Color - modified
9 Detection Detection
10 User User
11 Purpose Purpose
12 Consequence Consequence
13 Time-to-respond Time-to-respond
14 Guidance Guidance
15 Auto Clear Auto Clear
16 Monitoring Denied User Monitoring Denied User
Up Down
Mapping Information.
Read... Save... Delete... Browse...
Export Option
Export with File Headers
Export... Cancel
Figure B1.2.1-19 Export Dialog Box
2. Select the definition information to be exported. The information will be output in the order
it was selected starting from the top. To change the order of output, select the applicable
item, and click [Up] or [Down]. If you want to change the item names for use in the exter-
nal file, enter the desired names directly in the cells of the [Column Name on File] col-
umn. You can enter up to 200 characters without distinction of single-byte characters and
double-byte characters.
3. Click [Export…].
A file in csv format is created.
When exporting data, you can select whether or not to output the header information of the
CAMS for HIS builder. Up to four rows from the top will be reserved as the header information
to output.
l Saving the Export Mapping Information

To arrange the information to be exported for the columns on the CAMS for HIS builder is re-
ferred to as mapping. Furthermore, the output order of the mapped columns on the CAMS for
HIS builder corresponding to the external files is called mapping information. You can save up
to 30 pieces of mapping information. The operation is as follows.
1. Select [File] - [External File] - [Export…] in the menu bar.
The Export dialog box will be displayed.
2. Select the check boxes of the definition information to be exported. The information will
be output in the order it was selected starting from the top. To change the order of output,
select the applicable item, and click [Up] or [Down].
3. Click [Save…].
The Save Mapping Information dialog box will be displayed.

Save Mapping Information
Mapping Name UserMapping00001
Description Description=UserMapping00001
OK Cancel
Figure B1.2.1-20 Save Mapping Information Dialog Box
4. Enter the mapping name. You can enter up to 50 single-byte characters.

As necessary, enter a comment in the [Description] box. You can enter up to 200 charac-
ters without distinction of single-byte characters and double-byte characters. Note that a
line feed is counted as two characters.
5. Click the [OK] button.
l Reading the Export Mapping Information

Mapping information that has been saved can be used again for export. The operation is as
follows.
1. Select [File] - [External file] - [Export…] in the menu bar.
2. Click [Read…].
The Read Mapping Information dialog box will be displayed.
Read Mapping Information
Title Line 1
Export Import Column Name on File Column Name on Builder

Source Source
Model Model
Unit Unit
Tag Comment Tag Comment
Alarm Priority - original Alarm Priority - original
Alarm Priority - modified Alarm Priority - modified
Tag Mark Color - original Tag Mark Color - original
Tag Mark Color - modified Tag Mark Color - modified
Detection Detection
User User
Purpose Purpose
Consequence Consequence
Time-to-respond Time-to-respond
Guidance Guidance
OK Cancel
Figure B1.2.1-21 Read Mapping Information Dialog Box
3. Enter the Mapping Name, and then click [OK]. The Mapping Name can also be selected
from the drop down list.

l Deleting the Export Mapping Information

Mapping information that has been saved can be deleted. The operation is as follows.
1. Select [File] - [External File] - [Export…] in the menu bar.
2. Click [Delete…].
The Delete Mapping Information dialog box will be displayed.
Delete Mapping Information
Title Line 1
Export Import Columun Name on File Columun Name on Builder

Source Source
Model Model
Unit Unit
Tag Comment Tag Comment
Alarm Priority - original Alarm Priority - original
Alarm Priority - modified Alarm Priority - modified
Tag Mark Color - original Tag Mark Color - original
Tag Mark Color - modified Tag Mark Color - modified
Detection Detection
User User
Purpose Purpose
Consequence Consequence
Time-to-respond Time-to-respond
Guidance Guidance
Delete Cancel
Figure B1.2.1-22 Delete Mapping Information Dialog Box
3. Enter the Mapping Name, and then click [Delete]. The Mapping Name can also be selec-
ted from the drop down list.
l Importing
When you import data, an external file in csv format (.csv) is loaded and input as the definition
information of the CAMS for HIS builder. The information to be imported can be selected for
one column at a time in the Setting item display area. Columns that are not displayed in the
Setting item display area can be included in the range to be imported.
TIP Abnormal data due to input error and so forth, or data with attributes that cannot be edited in the CAMS for
HIS builder, will not be imported.

1. Select [File] - [External File] - [Import…] in the menu bar.
The Import dialog box will be displayed.

Import
Import File
File Path :
C:\CENTUMVP\ExternalFiles\CAMSAlm-CENTUM-FCS0101.csv Open...
Title Line 5
No. Import Column Name on File Column Name on Builder

1 Source Source
2 Model (None)
3 Unit (None)
4 Tag Comment (None)
5 Alarm Priority - original (None)
6 Alarm Priority - modified Alarm Priority - modified
7 Tag Mark Color - original (None)
8 Tag Mark Color - modified Tag Mark Color - modified
9 Detection Detection
10 User User
11 Purpose Purpose
12 Consequence Consequence
13 Time-to-respond Time-to-respond
14 Guidance Guidance
15 Auto Clear Auto Clear
16 Monitoring Denied User Monitoring Denied User
Mapping Information.
Read... Save... Delete... Browse...
Import Option
Set to the default value with blank data entry
Import other files from same folder
Node to Import
OPC Program ID :
Import... Cancel
Figure B1.2.1-23 Import Dialog Box
2. Enter the File Path where the external file is stored. You can select the external file in the
dialog box that is displayed when you click [Open…].
3. Select the check boxes for the definition information to be imported, and then click [Im-
port…].
The external file will be loaded.
l Saving the Import Mapping Information

To arrange the information to be imported for the columns on the CAMS for HIS builder is re-
ferred to as mapping. Furthermore, the import order of the mapped columns on the CAMS for
HIS builder is called mapping information. You can save up to 30 pieces of mapping informa-
tion. The operation is same as described for the operation for saving mapping information on
Export dialog box.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to save mapping information on Export dialog box, refer to:
“l Saving the Export Mapping Information” on page B1-17

l Reading the Import Mapping Information

Mapping information that has been saved can be used again for import. The operation is the
same as that of reading the mapping information in the Export dialog box.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to read mapping information on Export dialog box, refer to:
“l Reading the Export Mapping Information” on page B1-18
l Deleting the Import Mapping Information

Mapping information that has been saved can be deleted. The operation is the same as that
of deleting the mapping information in the Export dialog box.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to delete mapping information on Export dialog box, refer to:
“l Deleting the Export Mapping Information” on page B1-19
n Downloading Engineering Information

• Select [File] - [Download] in the menu bar of the CAMS for HIS builder.
• In System View, select [Load] - [Download Project Common Section].
n Exiting the Builder

• Select [File] - [Exit] in the menu bar of the CAMS for HIS builder.
• Click the Close button of the builder.
You will exit the builder when the System View is closed or when the target project is deleted.

B1.2.2 Compliance with FDA:21 CFR Part11

All CAMS for HIS builders are compliant with FDA:21 CFR Part11.
SEE
ALSO For more information about FDA:21, refer to:
5., “Access Control and Audit Trail for Builders“ in the Compliance with FDA: 21CFR Part 11 (IM
33K03Q10-50E)
n Access Control
The unit of access control is each CAMS for HIS Builder. Accordingly, access cannot be con-
trolled for stations, tags, plant hierarchies and other parts of CAMS for HIS Builder projects.
n Revision History
Any downloading after a change performed on the CAMS for HIS Builder will be logged to the
database of audit trails.
n Viewing Revision History

The revision on the CAMS for HIS builder will be saved into CAMS for HIS engineering data-
base. You can view the revisions performed on CAMS for HIS Builder in the Modification Re-
cords Viewer. Start the CAMS for HIS Builder in View mode. However, CAMS for HIS Builders
does not support to show the discrepancies in the view mode.
If you want to reutilize the previously defined settings, you can start a CAMS for HIS Builder in
View mode from the Modification Records View. And then you can export the defined settings
to a CSV file using the export feature of the builder, and then import the settings to a new
builder.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Modification Records Viewer, refer to:
3.4.2, “Modification Records Viewer“ in the Compliance with FDA: 21CFR Part 11 (IM 33K03Q10-50E)
l Reading Permitted Revision Information

On Modification Records viewer, the revisions performed before saving the CAMS for HIS set-
tings are reading permitted revision information.

B1.2.3 CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder

The CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder can be used to design alarm groups to be assigned
to individual A&E messages. This section explains the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder.
n Display Example of the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder

The following is a display example of the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder.
CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder - [Pjt:PJT01 File:CAMSAlmgrp.edf]
File Edit View Window Help
Monitoring Monitoring Acknowledgement

Alarm Group Name Apply to All
Denied User Denied User Denied User
Group
1 ARMGRP1 OFFUSER
2 ARMGRP2 ONUSER
3 ARMGRP3 ENGUSER
4
Message Edit
Position Linel Column1 ARMGRP1
Figure B1.2.3-1 Display Example of the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder
n Contents Configured by the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder

The following items are configured by the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder.
• Enter the [Alarm Group Name].
• Enable or disable [Apply to All].
Specify whether or not to share the result of acknowledging or manually resetting the
messages within an alarm group.
• Assign users or user groups in an alarm group to whom the operation and monitoring au-
thority is to be granted, and to whom such authority is not to be granted.
n Default Operation and Monitoring Settings on CAMS for HIS Alarm

Group Builder
rule. The default settings for the following three points are different from this basic rule.
• Manual resetting of process alarms is denied to all users.
• The authority for manual resetting of alarms other than process alarms is granted to all
users except for OFFUSER.

• Alarm Group Sub-State Change: This item is used to select the user who can start sup-
pression. The authority to start suppression is denied to all users, while the authority to
stop suppression is granted to all users.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the priorities of permitting and denying operation and monitoring, refer to:
“n Priorities of Permitting and Denying Operation and Monitoring” on page B1-5
n CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder Setting Items

SEE
ALSO For more information about the setting items, refer to:
“n List of CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder Setting Items” on page B2-5

B1.2.4 CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder

The CAMS for HIS Alarm builder can be used for engineering such as setting the alarm priori-
ty of individual A&E messages and adding additional attributes for the operator. This section
explains the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
n Alarm List Settings Screen of the CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder
The CAMS for HIS Alarm builder can be categorized into two types based on the differences
of the Setting item display area.
• Alarm List Settings screen
A list of alarm sources is displayed. Engineering for the A&E messages like system alarm
messages and process alarm messages, or those generated from the elements with no
assignment of tag numbers now becomes possible.
• Alarm Details Settings screen
Alarm sources found in the search by tag name are displayed. This is useful for engineer-
ing by narrowing down the target, but the setting items are limited.
When the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder is started, the Alarm List Settings screen will be dis-
played. Thereafter, two types of screens can be switched to one another. Both cannot be dis-
played at the same time.
The following is a display example of the Alarm List Settings screen.
CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder - [Pjt:MYPJT File:CAMSAlm.edf]
File Edit View Tool Window Help
1000 Alarm/Sheet
Alarm
Filter Tag Alarm Priority - Alarm priority - Tag Mark Color
Source Overview Position Model Unit
Sample Comment Original Modified - original
Error 1 PID1.OOP CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Red
Editing 2 PID1.IOP CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Red
Invalid Alarms 3 PID1.IOP- CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Red
CAMS for HIS Alarm 4 PID1.HH CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Red
Disabled Alarms 5 PID1.LL CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Red
Consequence:Very 6 PID1.HI CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Red
Consequence:Mediu 7 PID1.LO CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Red
OtherProject 8 PID1.DV+ CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Yellow
9 PID1.DV- CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Yellow
10 PID1.VEL+ CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Yellow
Overview 11 PID1.VEL- CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Yellow
CENTUM 12 PID1.MHI CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Yellow
FCS0101 13 PID1.MLO CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Yellow
%DR0001S010101 14 PID1.CNF CENTUM:FCS0101:%DR0002S010101 PID % Medium Medium ■ Red
%DR0002S010101
%DR0003S010101
%DR0009S010101
%DR0010S010101
%DR0011S010101
%DR0012S010101
OpeguideFCS0101
OtherProject
SystemAlarm
Delete
OPC
1 /1
Message Edit
Position Line1 Column2 PID1.OOP
Figure B1.2.4-1 Display Example of Alarm List Settings Screen

SEE
ALSO For more information about the Alarm Details Settings screen, refer to:
“n CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder Alarm Details Settings Screen” on page B1-41
l Filters Pane
The hierarchy of filters is displayed in tree view. When you click a filter in this area, all alarm
sources that belong to the filters below that hierarchy will be displayed in the Setting item dis-
play area. Up to 100,000 alarm sources will be displayed. When this limit is reached, stop
searching and the Alarm Message dialog box is displayed.
When a project is created, sample filters are created by default.
Filter
Sample
Error
Editing
Invalid Alarms
CAMS for HIS Alarms
Alarm Setpoint
Defined
Undefined
Disabled Alarms
Consequence : Very Large or Large
Consequence : Medium or Small
Disabled alarms
OtherProject
ProjectID : (NONE)
Figure B1.2.4-2 Display Example of Sample Filters
Sample filter has following filters:

• Error
Alarm sources for which inappropriate value is set are displayed.
• Editing
Alarm sources of which the setting content has been changed but not saved, are dis-
played.
• Invalid Alarms
Alarm sources that have become invalid when the instrument type was changed, or
when the tag name was changed or deleted, are displayed.
• CAMS for HIS Alarms
Alarm sources for which certain information is set by the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
are displayed.(*1)
• Alarm Setpoint
Alarm sources that support the Alarm Setpoint configuration are displayed.
• Alarm Setpoint - Defined
Alarm sources for which the Alarm Setpoint is configured, are displayed.
• Alarm Setpoint - Undefined
Alarm sources that support the Alarm Setpoint configuration and for which the Alarm
Setpoint is not configured, are displayed.
• Disabled Alarms
Alarm sources for which [Detection] is set to [Disable] in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
are displayed.(*1)
• Consequence: Very Large or Large
Alarm sources for which [Consequence] is set to [VeryLarge] or [Large] in the CAMS for
HIS Alarm builder are displayed.

• Consequence: Medium or Small
Alarm sources for which [Consequence] is set to [Medium] or [Small] in the CAMS for
HIS Alarm builder are displayed.
• Consequence: Medium or Small - Disabled Alarms
Alarm sources for which [Consequence] is set to [Medium] or [Small], and [Detection] is
set to [Disable] in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder are displayed.
• OtherProject
Alarm sources of other projects are displayed.(*2)
*1: For message Nos. 394, 510 and 514, [Detection] is set to [Disable] in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder. As a result, if [CAMS
for HIS Alarms] or [Disabled Alarms] is selected, the corresponding alarm sources will also be displayed.
*2: These are displayed when multiple projects are connected.
Filters can be added, and added filters can be changed and/or deleted.
l Overview Pane
The hierarchy of the nodes to which alarm sources belong is displayed in the tree view. When
you click a node in this area, all alarm sources that belong to the nodes below that hierarchy
will be displayed in the Setting item display area.
Overview
CENTUM
FCS0101
%DR0001S010101
%DR0002S010101
OpeguideFCS0101
OtherProject
SystemAlarm
Delete
OPC
Yokogawa.ExaopcAESTARTDOMFCX.1
Yokogawa.ExaopcAEPRM.1
Figure B1.2.4-3 Display Example of Overview Pane
Nodes can be broadly categorized into two types.

• CENTUM
The nodes to which the CENTUM alarm sources belong are displayed according to the
hierarchy configured by the Plant Hierarchy builder. Alarm sources for which the instru-
ment type has been changed are displayed when you click on a node to which the tag of
the applicable instrument belongs. At that time, the “x” symbol will be added at the begin-
ning of the applicable alarm source row. Furthermore, the Delete node includes the alarm
sources for which the tag name has been changed or the tag has been deleted.
• OPC
The OPC A&E Server Program ID to which non-CENTUM alarm sources, such as STAR-
DOM and PRM, belong.
l Setting Item Display Area

When there are many alarm sources, they may be displayed on multiple sheets. In such a
case, the sheet number and the total number of sheets are displayed at the bottom of the
area along with a button to switch the sheet.

Previous Sheet button Sheet number Next Sheet button
163 / 163
First Sheet button Total number of sheets Last Sheet button
Figure B1.2.4-4 Display Example of Sheet Number and the Total Number of Sheets
If you switch to a different sheet or to another hierarchy in the tree view, the operation history
on the original sheet will be cleared. Accordingly, the [Undo] operation will no longer be avail-
able.
l Setting the Number of Alarm Sources to be Displayed in the Setting Item

Display Area
The number of alarm sources to be displayed on one sheet can be set to a value between 10
and 20,000. The default setting is 1,000. In Alarm/Sheet in the toolbar, perform either one of
the following two methods.
• Directly enter a numerical value in single-byte characters, and press the [Return] key.
• Select a numerical value from the drop down list.
1000 Alarm/Sheet
Figure B1.2.4-5 Display Example of Alarm/Sheet in the Toolbar
The number of alarm sources set here is saved to the engineering PC for each user when the
CAMS for HIS Alarm builder is exited. The set value is inherited when the builder is started
the next time. Note, however, that the target projects are not taken into account. For example,
if the same user logs on to the same engineering PC and starts the CAMS for HIS Alarm
builder, the value is inherited even if the target project is different.
Furthermore, the alarm sources that belong to a unique tag name are always displayed on
one sheet. For example, if there are 14 alarm sources that belong to one tag name, all 14
alarm sources will be displayed on one sheet even when the number of alarm sources to be
displayed is set to 10.
n Contents Configured by the CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder

Mainly the following items are configured by the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
• Select [Critical], [High], [Medium], [Low], [Logging] or [Reference] as the [Alarm Priority -
modified].
• Select [Enable] or [Disable] for [Detection].
Specify whether or not to detect the A&E message for each alarm status.
• Assign the user name or user group name of the operator in charge to the [User].
• Select [Enable] or [Disable] for [Auto Clear], or keep the default setting.
Set the alarm flashing action when the acknowledged process alarm is recovered. Note,
however, that this can be used when the warning action is set to Consolidated in the
CAMS for HIS tab of Project Property.
• For each alarm, assign users or user groups to whom the operation and monitoring au-
thority is to be granted, and to whom such authority is not to be granted.
Note, however, that the operation cannot be performed even when the authority is gran-
ted, unless it is granted to the alarm group to which each alarm belongs.

• For [Alarm Group], select and assign the applicable alarm group among the alarm groups
set by the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder.
• Specify whether or not to permit shelving.
• Defined Alarm Setpoint Master Values.
l Maximum Number of Alarm Sources that can be Engineered

By using the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, you can engineer up to 400,000 alarm sources per
project. When multiple projects are connected, the number of alarm sources the CAMS for
HIS Alarm builder can handle is 400,000 for the entire projects. Design and build you alarm
system within this scale.
The number of alarm sources that you can engineer continuously without saving in the CAMS
for HIS Alarm builder is 20,000. When you engineer more than 20,000 alarm sources at a
time, engineer them in an external file and import it to the builder.
l Capacity of Engineering Data File

The maximum size of the engineering data file that you can save in the CAMS for HIS Alarm
builder is 200 MB per project. When multiple projects are connected, the maximum size of the
data file the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder can handle is 200 MB for the entire projects. Design
and build your alarm system within this scale.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to find out the size of engineering data files, refer to:
“l Scope of Verification by Engineering Report” on page B1-38
l Alarm Sources that can be Added by a Row at a Time

There are two types of alarm sources that can be added by a row at a time.
• OPC alarm sources
• Alarm sources of other projects
These, however, are limited to those below the OtherProject node. Alarm sources are im-
ported to be added.
l Alarm Sources that can be Deleted by a Row at a Time

There are three types of alarm sources that can be deleted by a row at a time.
• OPC alarm sources
• Alarm sources that belong to the hierarchy below CENTUM and that belong to the Delete
node
• Alarm sources marked with “x” at the beginning of the row among those that belong to the
hierarchy below CENTUM and that belong to a node other than the Delete node
SEE
ALSO For more information about the Delete node, refer to:
“l Overview Pane” on page B1-27
n Exceptions to the Priorities of Permitting and Denying Operation

and Monitoring by the CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder
rule. The default settings for the following two points, however, are different from this basic
rule.
• Manual resetting of process alarms is denied to all users.

• The authority for manual resetting of alarms other than process alarms is granted to all
users except for OFFUSER.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the priorities of permitting and denying operation and monitoring, refer to:
“n Priorities of Permitting and Denying Operation and Monitoring” on page B1-5
n CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder Setting Items

SEE
l Defining Link Addresses as User-defined Attributes

If you define a link address as a user-defined attribute, it is displayed as hyperlink text on the
Alarm Attribute tab of the Details pane. Define link addresses as follows:
• Specify a link address starting with "http:// " or "https:// "
• Specify a link address starting with "file:// "or "files:// "
TIP • You can also define link addresses as [Guidance], but it is recommended to define them as user-defined
attributes.
• You can define links to HTML document files, but you must note the following point regarding security:
Right-click menus displayed in the window of the linked document may lead to unintended rewriting or
deletion of files in the HIS. If security is given priority, rewrite <BODY> tags in the HTML file with <BODY
onContextmenu="return false">.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to add user-defined attributes, refer to:
“n Adding User-defined Attributes” on page B1-31
l Operation to Apply Alarm Rule Assistant in the Alarm List Setting Screen
Using Alarm Rule Assistant, the recommended values for [Detection] and [Alarm Priority -
modified] can be automatically set based on the relationship between [Purpose] and [Conse-
quence]. When Alarm Rule Assistant is applied in the Alarm List Settings screen, the resulting
action will be as follows.
• Alarm Rule Assistant will be applied to all alarm sources in the sheet. Individual alarm
sources cannot be selected. However, that the [Detection] and [Alarm Priority] settings
can be changed even if the values were defined using Alarm Rule Assistant.
• If there are more than one sheet, Alarm Rule Assistant will be applied only to the sheet
currently displayed.
1. Enter [Purpose] and [Consequence] in the Setting item display area.
2. Select [Tool] - [Alarm Rule Assistant] - [Apply] in the menu bar.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Alarm Rule Assistant, refer to:
“l Applying Alarm Rule Assistant” on page B1-41

n Adding User-defined Attributes

Up to 50 items of definition information can be added, such as the attributes and additional
attributes of alarm sources. These are called user-defined attributes, and they can be
changed or deleted.
The operation to add user-defined attributes is as follows.
1. Select [Edit] - [Edit Attribute] in the menu bar.
The Edit Attribute dialog box will be displayed.
Edit Attribute
UserAttr001
UserAttr002
UserAttr003
Add... Modify... Delete... Save... Close
Figure B1.2.4-6 Edit Attribute Dialog Box
2. Click [Add…].
The Add Attribute dialog box will be displayed.
Add Attribute
Attribute name
Setting type
OK Cancel
Figure B1.2.4-7 Add Attribute Dialog Box
3. Enter the attribute name.

Up to 50 single-byte characters, including alphanumeric characters and periods, can be
entered for an attribute name. The first letter must be an alphabet character. Uppercase
and lowercase characters are not differentiated. Do not enter the following character
strings.
• The character strings identical with the setting item names on CAMS for HIS Alarm
builder
• Same character string as that of an existing user-defined attribute
• Input character string for conditional expression of any attribute that can be specified
in the Create Filter dialog box

4. Select the Setting type, and then select a character string, a numerical value or Combo-
Box from the drop down list.
Based on the selection, an entry field will be added at the bottom of the Add Attribute dia-
log box.
5. Make necessary entries and click [OK].
The user-define attribute will be added, and the screen will return to the Edit Attribute dia-
log box. Note, however, that the attribute has not yet been saved to the engineering data-
base at this point.
6. To save the user-defined attributes, click [Save…].
A message dialog box will be displayed to confirm the action.
7. Click [OK].
8. Download the data with the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
9. Download data using the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to download using the CAMS for HIS builder, refer to:
“n Downloading Engineering Information” on page B1-21
For more information about the operation to download using the Configurator of CAMS for HIS, refer to:
l Modifying User-defined Attributes

User-defined attributes that have been saved can be modified. The operation is as follows.
2. Select the check box for the user-define attribute to be modified, and then click [Modi-
fy…].
The Modify Attribute dialog box will be displayed. The external appearance of the Modify
Attribute dialog box is the same as that of the Add Attribute dialog box, but the Setting
type cannot be changed.
3. Enter the attribute to be modified, and click OK.
4. Download the data with the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
5. Download the data using the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to download using a CAMS for HIS builder, refer to:
l Caution when User-defined Attributes are Modified

When a numerical value or a ComboBox is selected as the Setting type, the background color
of the cell may change to red and an error status may be indicated if a user-defined attribute
is modified. Examples are shown below.
• The current setting value goes out of the input range when the minimum or the maximum
value is changed in the Modify Attribute dialog box.
• The current setting value is no longer included when the list content displayed in the
ComboBox is changed in the Modify Attribute dialog box.

TIP When user-defined attributes used for filter conditions are changed, the changes are also reflected in the filter
condition expressions automatically.
l Deleting User-defined Attributes

User-defined attributes that have been saved can be deleted. The operation is as follows.
2. Select the check box for the user-defined attribute to be deleted, and then click [De-
lete…].
A message dialog box will be displayed to confirm the action.
3. Click [OK].
4. Download the data using the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
5. Download the data using the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
TIP User-defined attributes that are used as filter conditions cannot be deleted.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to download using a CAMS for HIS builder, refer to:
n Creating Filters
In addition to the sample filters created by default, more filters can be added. Up to 100 filters
can be created in up to 10 hierarchies. The created filters can be changed or deleted.
The operation to create a filter is as follows.
1. Select the hierarchy directly above the hierarchy where the filter is to be created. If no hi-
erarchy is selected, it will be placed at the top of the tree (root).
2. Perform either of the following two operations:
• Select [Edit] - [Filter] - [Create Filter] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu in the Filters pane, and select [Create Filter].
The Create Filter dialog box will be displayed.
Create Filter
Filter Type CENTUM OPC
Filter Name
Description
Attribute
Operator = (Equal) <> (Not Equal)
Pattern
OK Cancel
Figure B1.2.4-8 Create Filter Dialog Box

3. Click the node to which the target alarm source belongs in [Filter Type]. Since the content
displayed in the Setting item display area is different between CENTUM alarm sources
and the OPC alarm sources, a filter that include both cannot be created.
4. Enter a name in [Filter Name]. Up to 50 single-byte characters can be entered. Do not
enter the same filter name as that of an existing filter of the same hierarchy.
5. Enter a comment to be attached to the filter in [Description]. Up to 50 single-byte charac-
ters can be entered.
6. Enter an attribute to be set as a filter condition in [Attribute]. It can also be selected from
the drop down list. Note, however, that a filter cannot be created if a non-existing attribute
is entered.
The following is a list of attributes that can be set as a filter condition.
Table B1.2.4-1 List of Attributes for Filter Condition

Attribute Description Pattern Remark
Display the alarm
Status.Error sources with improper
setting values.
Display the unsaved
Status.Editing alarm sources after
modification.
Display the alarm
sources having any Always enter 1.
Status.CAMSEngin-
defined items in the
eering
CAMS for HIS Alarm
builder. (*1)
Display the alarm
Display the alarm
sources only when the
Status.Diff sources somehow de-
builder is started from
fined during migration.
the migration tool.
If CENTUM is selected for [Filter
Type], there are the following three
options:
• Process: process alarm mes-
sages
Display designated • Guidance: operator guide mes-
Source.Type types of alarm sour- sages
ces. • System: system alarm messag-
es
If OPC is selected for [Filter Type],
and the corresponding alarm
source cannot be found, nothing
will be displayed.
Enter the character string designa-
Displayed the alarm ted for plant hierarchy. You can al-
Do not enter the root
sources of the nodes so prefix or affix an asterisk as a
Source.Plant hierarchies of
lower than the desig- wildcard character. However, the
CENTUM and OPC.
nated hierarchy. wildcard character cannot be used
in the middle of a character string.
Display the invalid
alarm sources that the
Source.Invalid tag name or instru- Always enter 1.
ment name are de-
leted or modified.
Display the alarm You can also use
Enter the character string used in
sources that match user-defined attribute.
the criteria. You can also prefix or
Alarm attribute or sta- the designated criteria If OPC is selected for
affix an asterisk as a wildcard
tus displayed in set- of attributes and alarm [Filter Type], Model,
character. However, the wildcard
ting item display area statuses. Unit and Tag Com-
character cannot be used in the
Example) Source = ment cannot be selec-
middle of a character string.
"*FIC*" ted.

*1: For message Nos. 394, 510 and 514, [Detection] of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder is set to [Disable]. Accordingly, the alarm
sources of these messages are also displayed.
7. Iin [Pattern], enter a filter condition for the attribute. Up to 300 single-byte characters can
be entered.
TIP No error will result even if a filter condition that is not applicable to the attribute is entered.
8. Select an operator to combine the Attribute and Pattern criteria.

9. Click [OK].
The filter will be created. Note, however, that the filter has not yet been saved to the engi-
neering database at this point.
10. To save the filter, select [File] - [Save] in the menu bar.
The filter that has been created will be saved to the engineering database. Filters, howev-
er, cannot be saved individually. All filters including the engineering information of other
builders are saved.
l Changing Filter Attributes

Filter attributes that have been saved can be changed. The operation is as follows.
1. Select the target filter.
• Select [Edit] - [Filter] - [Properties] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu in the Filters pane and select [Properties].
The properties of the filter will be displayed.
‘Filter01’ properties
Filter Type CENTUM OPC
Filter Name Filter01
Description
Path /Filter01/Filter01
Conditional expression Status.Editing = “*TAG*”
and Model= “PVI” and Detection = “Enable”
Move filter OK Cancel
Figure B1.2.4-9 Filter Properties
The following attributes can be changed.

• Filter type, only if it is a filter at the top of the tree (root)
• Filter name
• Description
• Path: Direct entry is not allowed.
• Conditional expression: Up to 400 single-byte characters can be entered.
3. Change the attributes that can be changed, excluding paths, as necessary. The condition-
al expression entry pattern is as follows.
Target attribute name = “Filter condition,” where the filter condition is enclosed in double
quotation marks.

Example 1: Source.Type = “Process”
Example 2: Alarm status = “HH”
Example 3: Source.Plant = “FCS0201.%DR0001S020101”
Multiple conditions can be combined into one conditional expression using “and” and “or.”
Example: Model = “PVI” and Detection = “Enable”
Note, however, that a filter cannot be created if a non-existing attribute is entered. Also
when a new filter is to be created by combining multiple filter conditions with OR, the filter
cannot be created if even one non-existing attribute is included.
4. To change the path, click the arrow for [Move filter]. Filters can be moved only within the
same hierarchy.
5. Click [OK].
The filter attribute will be changed.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to move the filters to a different hierarchy, refer to:
“l Moving Filters” on page B1-37
l Copying Filters
Filters that have been saved can be copied. The operation is as follows.
• Select [Edit] - [Copy] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu in the Filters pane and select [Copy].
• Press the [Ctrl] key and the [C] key on the keyboard at the same time.
If the target filter includes any lower-hierarchy filters, those will be copied as well.
l Cutting Filters
Filters that have been saved can be cut. The operation is as follows.
• Display the context menu in the Filters pane and select [Cut].
• Press the [Ctrl] key and the [X] key on the keyboard at the same time.
If the target filter includes any lower-hierarchy filters, those will be cut as well.
l Pasting Filters
Filters that have been copied or cut can be pasted. The operation is as follows.
1. Select the hierarchy directly above the hierarchy to which the filter is to be pasted. If no
hierarchy is selected, the filter will be placed at the top of the tree (root).
• Select [Edit] - [Paste] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu in the Filters pane and select [Paste].
• Press the [Ctrl] key and the [V] key on the keyboard at the same time.

Take note of the following points when pasting a filter.
• A filter cannot be pasted to a hierarchy of a different [Filter type].
• A filter cannot be pasted if the number of filters exceeds 100.
• A filter cannot be pasted if the destination hierarchy is the lowest hierarchy.
• A filter can be pasted when a filter of the same name exists in the destination hierarchy,
but the filter name will be automatically changed. The filter will be named “Copy of Filter
name.”
l Moving Filters
• Drag and drop the target filter into the move destination.
It can be moved to any hierarchy. If no hierarchy is selected, it will be placed at the top of
the tree (root).
• Open the filter properties, and click the arrow for [Move filter].
The filter can be moved only within the same hierarchy.
If the target filter includes any lower-hierarchy filters, those will be moved as well.
Take note of the following points when moving a filter.
• A filter cannot be moved to a hierarchy of a different [Filter type].
• A filter cannot be moved if a filter of the same name exists in the destination hierarchy.
l Deleting Filters
Filters that have been saved can be deleted. The operation is as follows.
• Select [Edit] - [Delete] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu in the Filters pane and select [Delete].
• Press the [Delete] key on the keyboard.
If the target filter includes any lower-hierarchy filters, those will be deleted as well.
n Creating the OPC A&E Server Program ID

The OPC A&E Server Program ID is a child node of the OPC node, to which non-CENTUM
alarm sources belong. This program ID can be added. The operation is as follows.
• Select [Edit] - [Overview] - [Create OPC A&E ServerProgramID] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu in the Overview pane and select [Create OPC A&E Server-
ProgramID].
The Create OPC A&E ServerProgramID dialog box will be displayed.
Create OPC A&E ServerProgramID
Program ID
OK Cancel
Figure B1.2.4-10 Create OPC A&E ServerProgramID Dialog Box

2. Enter a program ID in [Program ID]. You can enter up to 95 characters without distinction
of single-byte and double-byte characters. Do not enter the same character string as that
of an existing program ID in the same hierarchy. Do not use the following symbols: \, :, /,
*, ?, “, <, >, and |.
3. Click [OK].
4. Save the ID that has been created. Perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [File] - [Save…] in the menu bar.
• Click [Save] in the toolbar.
The program ID that has been added will be displayed in the Overview pane.
l Deleting the OPC A&E Server Program ID

Program IDs that have been saved can be deleted. STARDOM and PRM nodes that are pro-
vided by default cannot be deleted.
IMPORTANT
When a program ID is deleted, the alarm sources that belong to the corresponding node will
also be deleted.

1. Select the target program ID in the Overview pane.
• Select [Edit] - [Overview] - [Delete OPC A&E ServerProgramID] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu in the Overview pane and select [Delete OPC A&E Server-
ProgramID].
A confirmation dialog box will be displayed.
3. Click [OK].
4. Confirm the action to delete the program ID. Perform either one of the following two meth-
ods.
• Select [File] - [Save] in the menu bar.
• Select [Save] in the toolbar.
You can confirm that the program ID has been deleted in the Overview pane.
n Check if Alarms are Correctly Configured

Engineering Report can be used to check if the alarms are properly defined, if the unnecessa-
ry alarms exist and if the alarm engineering is appropriate. The details will be described be-
low.
l Scope of Verification by Engineering Report

The alarm source information within a project exists in the following two databases.
• CENTUM VP project database
This database contains the alarm source information within a project.
• CAMS for HIS engineering database
This database contains the alarm source information engineered by the CAMS for HIS
builders.

Using the Engineering Report, both databases can be verified together, or only the CAMS for
HIS engineering database can be verified. The operation is as follows.
2. To verify both databases together, select [Tool] - [Engineering Report] - [All Alarms] in the
menu bar.
To verify only the CAMS for HIS engineering database, select [Tool] - [Engineering Re-
port] - [CAMS for HIS Customized only] in the menu bar.
The Engineering Report dialog box will be displayed.
Engineering Report (All Alarms)
Number of alarms 13266

Number of engineering alarms 12631
Database size at runtime 2Mbyte
Details
GraphStyle
Pie Bar
GraphProperty
Attribute
Alarm Priority - modified
Source
Scope
CENTUM
SITE_00000000001
FCS0101
FCS0102
FCS0106
OtherProject
SystemAlarm
Delete
OPC
Yokogawa.ExaopcAESTARDOMFCX.1
Yokogawa.ExaopcAEPRM.1
UserOPC001
Show graphs Close
Figure B1.2.4-11 Display Example of Engineering Report Dialog Box
The following table explains the Engineering Report dialog box.
Table B1.2.4-2 Explanation of the Engineering Report Dialog Box

Item name Explanation
Number of alarms The number of alarms that exist under the active project is shown.
Number of engineering The number of alarms that have been engineered by the CAMS for HIS Alarm
alarms builder is shown.
Database size at run- The database size at runtime in the CAMS for HIS environment is shown. Confirm
time that this value is no more than 200 MB. When multiple projects are connected,
find the database size for each project and make sure that the total size is no
more than 200 MB.
Details button Details of the database size when executing it are shown.
Graph style Style of the graph showing alarm ratios.
For the graph style, you can select either [Pie] or [Bar].

Item name Explanation
Graph properties Properties displayed in the graph showing alarm ratios.
For the graph properties, you can select either [Attribute] or [Source].
Attribute List Displays a list of the attributes can be displayed in graphs.
The displayed contents of a graph depend on the selected attributes.
The definable attributes including the user defined attributes on the Alarm List Set-
tings Screen are all selectable except the Source.
Scope A plant hierarchy tree is displayed.
Show graphs Clicking this button displays a graph based on the selected graph style, properties
and scope.
3. Select the [GraphStyle], [GraphProperty] and [Scope], and then click [Show graphs].
n Optimizing Databases
When the alarm settings are repeatedly modified, the CAMS for HIS engineering database
may have the fragmented free space. In this case, you need to optimize the database so as to
def rag the fragmentations. Consequently, the downloading or builder starting will be faster.
When CAMS for HIS Alarm builder engineering is completed, it is recommended to optimize
the database. After optimization, there is no need to download again. The procedure is as fol-
lows:
2. Select [Tool] > [Optimize Database] in the menu bar.
The usage condition of the database will be diagnosed. Upon completion of the diagno-
sis, the Optimize Database dialog box will be displayed.
Optimize Database
File size 500 Mbyte
Size of free space 200 Mbyte (40%)
Start Cancel
Figure B1.2.4-12 Display Example of Optimize Database Dialog Box
3. To optimize the database, click [Start]. If the size of the free space is 0 Mbyte, however,
the optimization cannot be performed.
To cancel the optimization, click [Cancel]. The original condition of the database before
the optimization process was started will be restored.
The database does not need to be downloaded after it has been optimized.
n Importing Alarm Setpoint Value Difference Information

It is possible to import difference information of alarm setpoint values saved in an external file.
When the difference information is imported, the current alarm setpoint values saved to an ex-
ternal file will be loaded and input to [Alarm Setpoint - master]. The import result is displayed
in the setting item display area. Abnormal data such as alarm setpoint values outside of the
setting range will not be imported.
If there are corresponding alarm sources on the OtherProject node, the sources are imported
together, including the node.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to save difference information in an external file, refer to:
“n Outputting Difference Information and Saving in External File” on page A9-16
For more information about the operation to import difference information, refer to:
n Setting of All Alarm Setpoint Values at Once

It is possible to set [Alarm Setpoint - master] in the control station at once. By performing this
function, it becomes possible to reflect engineered alarm setpoints (master) to the control sta-
tion, according to Alarm Setpoint Management of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation, refer to:
“n Setting All Alarm Setpoint Values at Once on Control Station” on page B2-39
n CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder Alarm Details Settings Screen

When a CAMS for HIS Alarm builder is started, the Alarm List Settings screen will be dis-
played. To switch from the Alarm List Settings screen to the Alarm Details Settings screen,
perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [View] - [Individual] in the menu bar of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
• Click [Switch View] in the toolbar.
The following is a display example of the Alarm Details Settings screen.
Alarm/Sheet
Alarm
Filter
Tag Name FAZER8 Search Model PVI
Sample
Tag Comment Unit %
Overview Alarm Status IOP User (NONE) Alarm Setpoint - high limit
CENTUM Time-to-respond (NONE) Tag Mark Color Alarm Setpoint - low limit
FCS0101
(NONE) Alarm Setpoint - master (N/A)
%DR0001S01
%DR0002S01 Guidance
%DR0003S01
%DR0009S01
%DR0010S01
Alarm Rule Detection
%DR0011S01 Purpose (NONE)
Assistant
Enable
%DR0012S01 Apply
OpeguideFCS Consequence (NONE) Alarm Priority Medium
OtherProject
Figure B1.2.4-13 Display Example of Alarm Details Settings Screen
When you enter the Tag Name and click Search, the applicable alarm sources will be dis-
played. You cannot specify the number of alarm sources to be displayed on one sheet.
When you click [Reset], the engineering information of the alarm sources narrowed down by
the tag name and the alarm status will be reset to the default setting.
When you click [Reset All], the engineering information of all the alarm sources found in the
search by the tag name will be reset to the default setting.
l Applying Alarm Rule Assistant

Alarm Rule Assistant is the function used to automatically set a recommend value for [Detec-
tion] and [Alarm Priority - modified] based on a matrix of the elements of both [Purpose] and

[Consequence] and the relationship between the two. The workflow of applying Alarm Rule
Assistant is illustrated in the figure below.
4
Alarm Details Setting Screen
Alarm Rule
▼
Purpose Safety ▼ Assistant Detection Enable Enable ▼
Apply
▼
Consequence Large ▼ Alarm Priority High High ▼
▼
1 Recommended values Set values
Consequence
Very Large Large Medium Small
Purpose
Safety High
Environment
Financial 3
2
Value defined by Alarm Rule Assistant
Value defined by Recommended Value

Alarm Rule Assistant Detection Alarm Priority
High Enable High
Figure B1.2.4-14 Workflow of Applying Alarm Rule Assistant

1. Enter [Purpose] and [Consequence] in the Alarm Details Settings screen. You can also
select each from the drop down list.
Recommended values for [Detection] and [Alarm Priority] will be displayed.
2. To apply the recommended values, click [Apply].
TIP The following methods are also available to apply Alarm Rule Assistant.
1. Enter [Purpose] and [Consequence] in the Alarm Details Settings screen.
2. Select [Tool] - [Alarm Rule Assistant] - [Apply] in the menu bar.
The [Detection] and [Alarm Priority] settings can be changed even if Alarm Rule Assistant is
used.
l Operation to Assign [Detection] and [Alarm Priority - Modified]

Recommended Values
This section explains the operation to assign a combination of [Detection] and [Alarm Priority -
modified] recommended values in the [Purpose] and [Consequence] matrix.
Seven combinations are available to be assigned. Furthermore, the setting that represents
each combination is called the value defined by Alarm Rule Assistant. The combinations are
as shown in the table below.
Table B1.2.4-3 Value Defined by Alarm Rule Assistant and Combinations of Detection and Alarm Prior-
ity Recommended Values
Value defined by Alarm Rule As- Recommended value
sistant Detection Alarm Priority
Critical Enable Critical
High Enable High

Value defined by Alarm Rule As- Recommended value
sistant Detection Alarm Priority
Medium Enable Medium
Low Enable Low
Logging Enable Logging
Reference Enable Reference
Disable Disable (Default value)
1. Select [Tool] - [Alarm Rule Assistant] - [Display] in the Alarm Details Settings screen.
The Decision Support dialog box will be displayed.
Decision Support
Consequence
VeryLarge Large Medium Small
Purpose
Safty Critical Critical High Disable
Environment Critical High Medium Low
Financial High Medium Low Disable
OK Cancel
Figure B1.2.4-15 Decision Support Dialog Box
2. In the Decision Support dialog box, enter the value defined by Alarm Rule Assistant in the
field where the Purpose and the Consequence elements intersect.
3. Click [OK].
l Operation to Switch to the Alarm List Settings Screen

To switch from the Alarm Details Settings screen to the Alarm List Settings screen, perform
either one of the following two methods.
• Select [View] - [List] in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder menu bar.
• Click [Switch View] in the toolbar.

B1.2.5 CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder

The CAMS for HIS Shelf builder configures shelves to be used for shelving. This section ex-
plains the CAMS for HIS Shelf builder.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Shelving, refer to:
A4.2.4, “Shelving” on page A4-12
n Display Example of CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder

The following is a display example of the CAMS for HIS Shelf builder.
CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder - [Pjt:PJT02 File:CAMSShelf.edf]
Type of Shelving Shelving Shelving

Shelving Extent of
Shelf Name Discription Icon Shelving Duration(Hours Duration(Minut Permitted
Type Shelf
Duration Time(Hour) Time(Minute) User
1 Shelf_01 (NONE) Shelf.ico Continuous Duration 0 30 System (NONE)

5
Message Edit
---- ERROR = 0 WARNING = 0 ----
Position Line1 Column1 Shefl01
Figure B1.2.5-1 Display Example of CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder
n Contents Configured by the CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder

The CAMS for HIS Shelf builder configures primarily the following:
• Enter the [Shelf name].
• Select the Shelving Type from Continuous, One-Shot and Auto.
• Set the duration to continue shelving.
• Set the range in which the result of shelving is to be shared.
• Assign the user to whom the shelving authority is granted.

n CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder Setting Items

SEE
n Contents Configured in the Shelf Option Dialog Box

The following points are defined in the Shelf Option dialog box. They are applied to all
shelves.
• Whether to display or hide the length of time to continue shelving in the shelves
Two options, Hide (Permitted time not displayed) and Label (Permitted time displayed),
are available. It is set to Hide in the default setting.
• Whether or not to permit shelving of the SIS messages
Two options, [Disable] (Shelving not permitted) and [Enable] (Shelving permitted), are
available. The default setting is [Disable].
TIP In projects of revisions older than R4.03, this is set to [Enable] by default. It is now set to [Disable] in order
maintain the operational compatibility when a project is upgraded from a revision older than R4.03 to a revi-
sion of R4.03 or later.
l Operation to Display the Duration to Continue Shelving in Shelves

Specify whether to display or hide the duration to permit shelving entered in the CAMS for
HIS Shelf builder in shelves. The default setting is [Hide]. The following is a method to display
the duration.
2. Select [Tool] - [Shelf Option] in the menu bar, and then click the View tab.
Shelf option
View Operation
Download required to reflect changes.

Display format of time allowed in Shelving area
Hide
Hide
Label
OK Cancel
Figure B1.2.5-2 View Tab in the Shelf Option Dialog Box
3. Select [Label] from the drop down list, and click [OK].
The content set in the Shelf Option dialog box will be saved to the CAMS for HIS engi-
neering database.
4. Download the data using the CAMS for HIS Shelf builder.
The data will be reflected in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
l Operation to Permit Shelving of SIS Messages

When [NONE] is selected on the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder as the Shelving attribute of SIS
messages issued by ProSafe-RS, specify whether or not to permit shelving of SIS messages.
The default setting is [Disable]. The following is a method to permit shelving.

2. Select [Tool] - [Shelf Option] in the menu bar, and then click the Operation tab.
Shelf option
View Operation
Download required to reflect changes.

Shelving SIS message(Default)
Disable
Enable
Disable
OK Cancel
Figure B1.2.5-3 Operation Tab of the Shelf Option Dialog Box
3. Select [Enable] from the drop down list, and click [OK].
The content set in the Shelf Option dialog box will be saved to the CAMS for HIS engi-
neering database.
4. Download the data using the CAMS for HIS Shelf builder.
The data will be reflected in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.

B1.2.6 CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder

This section explains the CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder.
n Display Example of the CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition

Builder
The following is a display example of the CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder.
CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder - [Pjt:MYPJT1 File:CAMSMsgMonitor.edf]
File Edit View Window Help
Overview
Change
User Name User Group Change Color Menu Bar
Window Layout
Shelving area 1 OFFUSER DEFGRP
Filter area
2 ONUSER DEFGRP
A&E browser area
A&E message list area 3 ENGUSER DEFGRP
4 PROG DEFGRP
5 TESTUSER DEFGRP
Message Edit
Position Line1 Column1 OFFUSER
Tree view Setting item display area
Figure B1.2.6-1 Display Example of CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder
l Adding and Deleting Rows in the Setting Item Display Area

Alarm sources marked with “x” at the beginning of the row can be deleted. If an attempt is
made to select and delete alarm sources marked with “x” and those not marked with “x” at the
same time, none can be deleted.
Rows cannot be added.
n Contents Configured by the CAMS for HIS Message Monitor

Definition Builder
The CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder sets the basic layout of the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS, and assigns the operator the authority to customize the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
l Display Message Timestamp in Millisecond

The timestamps of the A&E messages can be set to be displayed in milliseconds in the mes-
sages pane of Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The procedure is as follows:
1. Select [Tool] - [Message Monitor Definition Option...] in the menu bar.
The Message Monitor Definition Option dialog box will be displayed.
2. Select the check box of [Display message time with milliseconds].

n CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder Setting Items

SEE
“n List of CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder Setting Items” on page B2-7

<B1.3 Settings to Enable CAMS for HIS> B1-49
B1.3 Settings to Enable CAMS for HIS

To enable CAMS for HIS, set the applicable items in the CAMS for HIS tab of the HIS Utility.
This section explains the HIS Utility operations and the setting items.
IMPORTANT
Download the engineering data of the project to the HIS before performing any of the opera-
tions.
n Operation to Enable CAMS for HIS

The operation is as follows. Perform the operation on all HISs included in the Equalization
Scope.
1. Open the CAMS for HIS tab of the HIS Utility.
HIS Utility
User Action Security CAMS for HIS
CAMS for HIS (The computer should be restarted.)

Enable/Disable CAMS for HIS (The computer should be restarted.)
Enable CAMS for HIS

(The system configuration must be downloaded before
enabling CAMS for HIS)
Settings (The computer should be restarted.)
Maximum size of alarm buffer 2000
Set this HIS as Download Master

(Set one Download Master only for each equalization scope.)
Configuration Operation Keyboard
ACK key acknowledges the selected A&E Message

ACK key acknowledges all the displayed A&E Messages
Exclude operation guide messages
Detailed Setting
OK Cancel
Figure B1.3-1 CAMS for HIS Tab of the HIS Utility
2. Select the check box for [Enable CAMS for HIS]. Set other items as necessary.
3. Click [OK], and then close the HIS Utility.
4. Reboot the PC.
CAMS for HIS will be enabled after the PC is rebooted.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to start the HIS Utility, refer to:
“■ Starting the HIS Utility” in 1.2, “The Settings on HIS Utility” in the Human Interface Stations Reference
Vol.1 (IM 33K03F21-50E)
n Items Set in the CAMS for HIS Tab

This section explains the items set in the CAMS for HIS tab.
• Enable CAMS for HIS
Select this check box to enable CAMS for HIS. It is cleared by default.
The following items can be set when the check box for [Enable CAMS for HIS] is selected.
• Maximum size of alarm buffer
Specify the maximum number of messages that can be stored on CAMS for HIS. The set-
ting value must be from 100 to 2,000 and can be specified in units of 100. It is set to
2,000 by default.
The value set here is also applied to the maximum number of suppressed messages that
can be stored.
IMPORTANT
Within an equalization scope, the maximum size of alarm buffer must be set to the same val-
ue on all HISs and Exaopc stations.
• Download Master
Assign the PC on which the Configurator of CAMS for HIS is started to be the Download
Master. Only one PC in the Equalization Scope can be assigned. Select this check box to
set the PC as the Download Master. It is cleared by default.
• ACK key acknowledges the selected A&E Message
Specify the action of the ACK key on the operation keyboard. Select this check box to ac-
knowledge one message at a time. It is selected by default.
• ACK key acknowledges all the displayed A&E Messages
Specify the action of the ACK key on the operation keyboard. Select this check box to ac-
knowledge all messages at once.
• Exclude operation guide messages
Select this check box to display operator guide messages independently. When selected,
operator guide messages are displayed in the Operator Guide view, and will not be dis-
played in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. It is cleared by default.
• Detailed Setting
Click this button to open the Detailed Setting dialog box.

Detailed Setting
Check the equalization target stations.

All stations are checked on first boot.
Station Name Station Number IP Address

STN0261 2.61 172.17.2.61
HIS0163 1.63 172.17.1.63
HIS0164 1.64 172.17.1.64
HIS0262 2.62 172.17.2.62
HIS0263 2.63 172.17.2.63
HIS0264 2.64 172.17.2.64
OK Cancel
Figure B1.3-2 Detailed Setting Dialog Box
In the Detailed Setting dialog box, specify the HISs and Exaopc stations to be included in
the Equalization Scope. This dialog box lists the HISs and Exaopc stations of the project
that includes the HIS you are working with. However, the dialog box only lists the Exaopc
stations for which "Actual Device" is specified. Be sure to select the check boxes of the
same stations on all HISs and Exaopc stations within the same Equalization Scope.
• OPC A&E Server Connection
Click this button to open the OPC A&E Server Connection dialog box.
Computer Name of CAMS for HIS HIS0164
Computer Name of OPC A&E Server SIOS0138
Program ID in OPC A&E Server Yokogawa. ExaopcAESTARDOMFCx
OPC A&E Server

Computer Name of CAMS for HIS Computer Name of OPC A&E Server Progra
HIS 0164 SIOS 0138 Yokoga
HIS 0164 SIOS 0137 Yokoga
Apply Delete
OK Cancel
Figure B1.3-3 OPC A&E Server Connection Dialog Box
Specify the conditions for receiving A&E messages from systems other than CENTUM.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the Actual Device attribute of Exaopc stations, refer to:
"■ Actual Device" in 6.3.1, "Engineering Upper Projects" in the CENTUM VP Optional Functions Refer-
ence (IM 33K03N10-50E)

l Settings for Receiving A&E Messages from Systems Other than CENTUM
To receive A&E messages from systems other than CENTUM, such as PRM and STARDOM,
specify the conditions to connect CAMS for HIS and the OPC A&E Server in the OPC A&E
Server Connection dialog box. The operation is as follows.
1. Open the OPC A&E Server Connection dialog box.
The PC name of the HIS will be displayed in [Computer Name of CAMS for HIS]. A list of
PCs to be connected that are registered to the [OPC A&E Server] will also be displayed.
2. Enter the PC name of the OPC A&E Server in [Computer Name of OPC A&E Server].
3. Enter the OPC A&E Server Program ID in [Program ID in OPC A&E Server]. You can also
select it from the drop down list.
TIP The followings shall be observed when PRM is defined as the connected OPC A&E server.
• For Computer Name of OPC A&E Server, specify the PC on which the PRM Server Package is installed.
• For Program ID in OPC A&E Server, specify Yokogawa.ExaopcAEPRM.1.
• After you complete settings for CAMS for HIS and restart HIS, restart the PRM server as well.
• To display the PRM maintenance alarms on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, set operators to
[sending targets] of the maintenance alarms on PRM’s Alarm Filtering Configurator.
• The receivable PRM maintenance alarms include the device alarms, PAS alarms and diagnostic alarms.
The type of alarms (TypeOfAlarm) of the PRM maintenance alarms received by CAMS for HIS are cate-
gorized as Asset. Note, however, that if the advanced diagnostic package is installed in PRM and the
option of [Use Messages from the following HIS] is checked on the Diagnosis tab of the PRM Setup
Tool, the type of alarms (TypeOfAlarm) of the PRM maintenance alarms received by CAMS for HIS will
be categorized as Guidance instead of Asset.
4. To register the entered setting, click [Apply].

The User Authentication of OPC A&E Server dialog box will be displayed.
User Authentication of OPC A&E Server
User Name
Password
OK Cancel
B010304E.ai
Figure B1.3-4 User Authentication of OPC A&E Server Dialog Box
5. Click [OK] without entering anything under normal circumstances.

The new PC to be connected will be registered, and the screen will return to the OPC
A&E Server Connection dialog box. At this time, the new PC to be connected will be dis-
played on the list of the connected OPC A&E Servers.
TIP The DCOM settings of the OPC server designated as the connected server may contain the OPC Enum or
OPC A&E server access control. In this case, enter User Name and Password and then click [OK] button on
the User Authentication of OPC A&E Server dialog box.
6. Click [OK].
Save the information of the registered PC to be connected and close the OPC A&E Serv-
er Connection dialog box.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the PRM Alarm Filtering Configurator, refer to:
E1.2.3, “Alarm Management Rules” in “Plant Resource Manager Reference (IM 33Y05Q10-11E).”
l How to include Exaopc Stations to an equalization scope

To include Exaopc stations to an equalization scope, you need to perform the settings below
on the Detailed Setting dialog box. The procedure is as follows:
1. Confirm that the attribute "Actual Device" is specified for the station you want to include.
If not specified, select the [Actual Device] check box of the station.
2. Confirm that the IP addresses of the target stations are correctly defined.
If the defined IP address is not correct, or defined as 0.0.0.0, you need to correct the IP
address on System View and download the project common section to all HISs. And then
check the defined IP address is correct.
3. Open the Detailed Setting dialog box.
A list of stations that can be included in the equalization scope is displayed. By default,
the check boxes of all stations including Exaopc stations are selected.
4. Confirm that the check box of the target Exaopc station is selected and click [OK].
Save the new settings and close the Detailed Setting dialog box and HIS Utility.
TIP After performing the above setting, if you change the IP address of any relevant stations and download the
project common section, the check boxes of the stations that you changed the IP address will be clear when
you open the Detailed Setting dialog box again. In this case, select the check boxes of such stations again
and click [OK] to make the change.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the Actual Device attribute of Exaopc stations, refer to:
"■ Actual Device" in 6.3.1, "Engineering Upper Projects" in the CENTUM VP Optional Functions Refer-
ence (IM 33K03N10-50E)
l After clicking [Cancel] on the Detailed Setting dialog box

When adding or removing an HIS or Exaopc station to or from the equalization scope, or
changing IP addresses of those, the setting information stored in the equalization scope may
be different from the information displayed in the Detailed Setting dialog box. In this case, the
following message appears when you click the [Cancel] button.
Detailed Setting
Equalization scope has been changed from the previous settings.

Are you sure you want to finish it without applying these
changes? To apply new settings, go back to the Detailed Setting
dialog box by using the CANCEL button, and then click the OK
button.
OK Cancel
Figure B1.3-5 Message box for confirming the equalization scope
If you do not want to set the equalization scope again, click the [OK] button. The message
box and the Detailed Setting dialog box close. If you want to set the equalization scope again,
click the [Cancel] button. You are brought back to the Detailed Setting dialog box.

n Required Settings When Enhanced Security Level is Applied to

Internet Explorer
When the enhanced security level is applied to the Internet Explorer, the following settings are
required.
• Trusted Sites
• Proxy server (if required)
Each procedure is explained below.
l Setting Trusted Sites

Register http://127.0.0.1 as a trusted site. The procedure is as follows:
1. Start Internet Explorer
2. On menu bar, choose [Tools] > [Internet Options].
Internet Options dialog box will be displayed.
3. Open Security tab, click [Trusted sites], and then click [Sites].
Trusted Sites dialog box will be displayed.
4. Clear the Check box of [Require server verification (https:) for all sites in this zone].
5. In the column of [Add this Web site to the zone], enter http://127.0.0.1 and then click
[Add].
The IP address of "127.0.0.1" will be added as a trusted site.
6. Click [Close].
The display will return to the Security tab of Internet Options dialog box.
7. Click [OK].
The display will return to Internet Explorer.
l Setting Proxy Server

If accessing the IP address of "127.0.0.1" with the default proxy settings failed, you need to
change the proxy settings so that the IP address of "127.0.0.1" will not be used as the proxy
server address. The procedure is as follows:
1. Start Internet Explorer
2. On menu bar, choose [Tools] > [Internet Options].
Internet Options dialog box will be displayed.
3. Open Connections tab, click [LAN Settings].
Local Area Network (LAN) Settings dialog box will be displayed.
4. Check [Use] and then click [Advanced].
Proxy Settings dialog box will be displayed.
5. In the column of [Do not use proxy server for addresses beginning with:], enter
"127.0.0.1" and then click [OK].
The display will return to Local Area Network (LAN) Settings dialog box.
6. Click [OK].
The display will return to the Connections tab of Internet Options dialog box.
7. Click [OK].
The display will return to Internet Explorer.

<B1.4 Customizing the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS> B1-55
B1.4 Customizing the Message Monitor of

CAMS for HIS
The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS can be customized. This section explains the custom-
izing operation.
n Operation Overview
1. Using the CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder, assign the authority to cus-
tomize the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS to the operator.
2. Call the Style Settings dialog box in the Configurator of CAMS for HIS, and specify the
information to be displayed in the Details pane of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS,
etc.
3. Customize the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Option window, called from the
4. As necessary, create filters in the Filters pane of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.

B1.4.1 Assigning the Authority to Customize

The authority to customize is assigned to the operator using the CAMS for HIS Message
Monitor Definition builder.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder, refer to:

B1.4.2 Specifying the Information to be Displayed in the

Details Pane
Use the Style Settings dialog box to specify the information to be displayed in the Details
pane.
1. Open the Style Settings dialog box, and specify the alarm attributes to be displayed on
the Alarm Attribute tab and enable or disable text entry on the Guidance tab of the Details
pane.
2. Download the specified content to the engineering database.
l Calling the Style Settings Dialog Box

Call the Style Settings dialog box from the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
1. From the Start menu, select [All Programs] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Configurator of
CAMS for HIS].
The Configurator of CAMS for HIS will be started.

File Tools
Style Settings
Alarm Generator
Figure B1.4.2-1 Configurator of CAMS for HIS

The Style Settings dialog box will be displayed.

Style Settings
Alarm Attribute
Specify Alarm Attributes
All Alarm Attributes
Guidance
Editable (Text File Only)
OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.2-2 Style Settings Dialog Box
TIP The following methods can also be used to call the Style Settings dialog box.
1. From the Start menu, select [All Programs] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Configurator of CAMS for HIS].
2. Select [Tools] - [Style Settings] in the menu bar.
l Items Set in the Style Settings Dialog Box

There are two sections in the Style Settings dialog box. Each section is explained below.
• [Alarm Attributes] section
Selects alarm attributes to be displayed on the Alarm Attributes tab.
When the [Specify Alarm Attributes] option is selected, the alarm attributes selected in
advance are displayed on the Alarm Attributes tab. Alarm attributes can be selected in
the Select Alarm Attributes dialog box.
When the [All Alarm Attributes] option is selected, a fixed set of alarm attributes prede-
fined by the system are displayed on the Alarm Attributes tab.
• [Guidance] section
When the [Editable (Text File Only)] check box is selected, direct creation and editing of
text files are enabled on the Guidance tab.
SEE
ALSO For more information about selecting attributes to be displayed, refer to:
“l Selecting Alarm Attributes to be Displayed in the Details Pane” on page B1-58
For more information about how to create and edit text files on the Guidance tab, refer to:
l Selecting Alarm Attributes to be Displayed in the Details Pane

In the Select Alarm Attributes dialog box, select the alarm attributes to be displayed on the
Alarm Attribute tab. The operation is as follows.
1. From the Start menu, select [All Programs] > [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] > [Configurator of
CAMS for HIS].
The Configurator of CAMS for HIS starts.

The Style Settings dialog box appears.
3. Click the [Select Alarm Attributs] button.
The Select Alarm Attributes dialog box appears.
Available Alarm Attributes: Current Attributes:

YHIS.BatchBatchID Timestamp
Consequence Message
Time-to-respond MessageNo
Alarm Group TypeOfAlarm
YHIS.MsgMarkColor Source.Plant
Auto Clear TagName
Monitoring Denied User DeviceID
Monitoring Denied User Group AlarmPriority
Acknowlegement Denied User User
Acknowlegement Denied User Group Purpose
Manual Reset Permitted User Guidance
Manual Reset Permitted User Group Shelving
Manual Reset Denied User
Manual Reset Denied User Group
OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.2-3 Select Alarm Attributes Dialog Box
4. Move the attributes to be displayed to [Current Attributes:], which is blank by default. If

you want to change the order of display, you can change in this list.
5. Click [OK].
The selected attributes are saved.
The following table lists the choice of alarm attributes and whether they are displayed when
the [All Alarm Attributes] button is selected in the Style Settings dialog box.
Table B1.4.2-1 Choice of Alarm Attributes to be Displayed

Alarm Attribute Displayed when [All Alarm Attributes] is selected
Timestamp Yes
Timestamp.Server Yes
Message Yes
Message.Buzzer Yes
MessageNo Yes
TypeOfAlarm Yes
Source Yes
Source.Plant Yes
YHIS.PjtID Yes
YHIS.BatchBatchID Yes
TagName Yes
DeviceID Yes
AlarmPriority Yes
User Yes
Purpose Yes
Consequence Yes
Time-to-respond Yes
Guidance Yes
Alarm Group Yes

Alarm Attribute Displayed when [All Alarm Attributes] is selected
YHIS.MsgMarkColor No
Auto Clear No
Monitoring Denied User No
Monitoring Denied User Group No
Acknowledgement Denied User No
Acknowledgement Denied User Group No
Manual Reset Permitted User No
Manual Reset Permitted User Group No
Manual Reset Denied User No
Manual Reset Denied User Group No
Shelving Yes
User-defined attributes Yes
SEE
ALSO For more information about the meaning of each attribute, refer to:
• “n List of CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder Setting Items” on page B2-2
• “l List of Message Attributes Displayed in the Select Columns Dialog Box” on page B2-14
l Operation to Commit and Download Engineering Data

Download the information specified in the Style Settings dialog box to all the HISs included in
the Equalization Scope.
1. Click [OK] in the Style Settings dialog box.
2. In the menu bar of the Configurator of CAMS for HIS, select [File] - [Download].
The Reason for the Change dialog box will be displayed.
3. Enter the reason for the change, and click [Download].
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to download using the Configurator of CAMS for HIS, refer to:

B1.4.3 Operations by the Operator to Customize the

The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS can be customized in the Option window. Only the
attributes for which the authority to make changes is granted to the operator can be custom-
ized.
TIP The items for which the operator has no authority to change grayed out and only can be read.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder, refer to:
1. Open the Option window, and select or enter the item to be customized.
2. Commit the changes in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n Calling the Option Window

The Option window can be called from the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
In the menu bar of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, select [Tools] - [Options…]. The
Option window will be displayed.
Option
Layout of A&E Browser Pane Standard Wide Reset to System Default
Foreground Color
Background Color
Text Color of Pane Title
Background Color of Pane Title
Text Color of Pane Title (Selected)

(Selected)
Apply OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.3-1 Option Window
The Option window consists of nine tabs.

• General tab
• Toolbar tab
• Status Bar tab

• Shelves Pane tab
• Filters Pane tab
• A&E Browser Pane tab
• A&E Messages Pane tab
• Dynamic Filters Pane tab
• Print tab
To customize the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, open each of these tabs and select or
enter applicable items.
l Button Operations Common to All Tabs

There are four types of button.
• Reset to System Default
Restores the default setting. To commit the setting, click [Apply] or [OK].
• Apply
Commits the setting value. When you click this button, the setting information of all tabs
will be saved at once.
• OK
Commits the setting value and closes the Option window.
• Cancel
Discards the setting value and closes the Option window.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to specify the default setting, refer to:
• “n Operation Overview” on page B1-77
• “n Starting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Configuration Mode” on page B1-80
l Commit Changes
To reflect the information set in the Option window in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS,
perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [File] - [Commit Changes] in the menu bar.
If the changes are not committed, the setting before the customization will be restored when
the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is displayed again.
n Items Set in the General Tab

Text and background colors are set in the General tab.

Option
Layout of A&E Browser Pane Standard Wide Reset to System Default
Foreground Color
Background Color
Text Color of Pane Title
Text Color of Pane Title (Selected)

(Selected)
Apply OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.3-2 General Tab
The items set in the General tab are explained in the table below.
Table B1.4.3-1 Items Set in the General Tab

Setting Item Description
Set whether to show the A&E Browser pane beside or above the Shelves pane in
If the layout change of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is not allowed, the
Layout of A&E Brows- layout cannot be changed by the operator. [Change Window Layout] button in the
er Pane toolbar is grayed out and cannot be selected.
Standard The A&E Browser pane is shown beside the Shelves pane.
Wide The A&E Browser pane is shown above the Shelves pane.
Set the color of texts in All Filters tab in the Filter Pane.
Foreground Color
The setting made here is followed unless otherwise specified for this pane.
Set the color of background in All Filters tab in the Filter Pane.
Background Color
The setting made here is followed unless otherwise specified for this pane.
Text Color of Pane Ti- Set the text color to be applied to the title name of each pane in the Message Moni-
tle tor of CAMS for HIS.
Background Color of Set the background color to be applied to the title name of each pane in the Mes-
Pane Title sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
Text Color of Pane Ti- Set the color of title name texts in each pane when one of the items in the pane is
tle (Selected) selected.
Background Color of Set the color of title name background in each pane when one of the items in the
Pane Title (Selected) pane is selected.
n Items Set in the Toolbar Tab

Types and sizes of buttons to be placed on the toolbar are set in the Toolbar tab.

Option
Button Size Standard Large Reset to System Default
Button Settings Available Button for Toolbar Present Button for Toolbar
Manual Reset All Print Properties
Change Window Layout Separetor
Show/Hide A&E Browser Pan Acknowledge
Show/Hide A&E Messages Pa Acknowledge All
Run... Manual Reset
Call HIS Window Separator

HIS
Commit Charges Switch Alarm View
Reset to System Default Clear Details Pane
Apply OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.3-3 Toolbar Tab
The items set in the Toolbar tab are explained in the table below.
Table B1.4.3-2 Items Set in the Toolbar Tab

Button Size Set the design of the toolbar to be shown as either the design corresponding to the
document creation application or a group of arranged buttons.
Standard The toolbar design corresponding to the document creation application is
adopted.
Large The toolbar is shown as a group of arranged buttons.
Button Settings Select the items to show on the toolbar and set the order in which the items show.
From the [Available Button for Toolbar] pane, select the items to show on the toolbar.
Click the right-arrow button. The selected items appear in the [Present Button for Tool-
bar] pane. If items you do not intend to show on the toolbar are in the [Present Button
for Toolbar] pane, select them from the [Present Button for Toolbar] pane and click the
left-arrow button.
To change the order in which the items show on the toolbar, select an item from the
[Present Button for Toolbar] pane and click the up-arrow or down-arrow button.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the button types, refer to:
“l Toolbar” on page A2-7
n Items Set in the Status Bar Tab

Update cycle of the information and other items to be displayed in the status bar are set in the
Status Bar tab.

Option
Height 22 Reset to System Default
Renewal Period (Sec) 60
Apply OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.3-4 Status Bar Tab
The items set in the Status Bar tab are explained in the table below.
Table B1.4.3-3 Items Set in the Status Bar Tab

Height Set the height of the status bar.
Font Set the font of text to be displayed in the status bar.
Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set Font dialog box and set the font and font
size.
Renewal Period Set the update interval for data shown in Status bar.
(Sec)
n Items Set in the Shelves Pane Tab

Information to be displayed on the shelves and icon actions are set in the Shelves pane tab.

Option

Number of Active Alarms Show Hide
Number of Unacknowledged Alarms Show Hide
Total Number of Alarms Show Hide
Number of Ignored Alarms Show Hide
Emphases on Unread Alarms ON OFF
Height 36
Text Color
Background Color
Apply OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.3-5 Shelves Pane Tab
SEE
ALSO For more information about the items set in the Shelves pane tab, refer to:
“n List of Items Set in the Shelves Pane Tab” on page B2-12
n Items Set in the Filters Pane Tab

Information to be displayed on the filters and icon actions are set in the Filters pane tab.
Option

Number of Active Alarms Show Hide Load Shedding Rules
Number of Unacknowledged Alarms Show Hide Filter Name
Total Number of Alarms Show Hide Reference Time (Sec) 60

Emphases on Unread Alarms ON OFF Number of Alarms 100
Image of Dynamic Filter

Favorites Tab
All Filters Tab Height of Filter 36
Text Color
Background Color
Apply OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.3-6 Filters Pane Tab

SEE
ALSO For more information about the items set in the Filters pane tab, refer to:
“n List of Items Set in the Filters Pane Tab” on page B2-12
n Items Set in the A&E Browser Pane Tab

Information to be displayed in the A&E Browser pane and icon actions are set in the A&E
Browser pane tab.
Option
Background Pattern Standard Zebra Pattern Reset to System Default

Icon Blinking ON OFF
Space between the Lines 10
Filter Rules True Modify Reset
Displayed Columns Modify
Text Color 1 Text Color 2
Background Color 1 Background Color 2
Text Color 1 (Selected) Text Color 2 (Selected)
Background Color 1 (Selected) Background Color 2 (Selected)
Apply OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.3-7 A&E Browser Pane Tab
SEE
ALSO For more information about the items set in the A&E Browser pane tab, refer to:
“n List of Items Set in the A&E Browser Pane Tab” on page B2-14
l [Modify] Button in Displayed Columns

Attributes to be displayed in the A&E Browser pane can be selected. The operation is as fol-
lows.
1. Click [Modify] in the displayed columns.
The Select Columns dialog box will be displayed.

Select Columns
Hide Show
Attribute Name Attribute
Timestamp.Server Date Timestamp
Message.Buzzer Message Message
MessageNo Shelving Shelving
TypeOfAlarm
Source
Source.Plant
YHIS.PjtID
TagName
DeviceID
AlarmPriority
User
Purpose
Consequence
Time-to-respond
Guidance
Alarm Group
OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.3-8 Select Columns Dialog Box
2. Move the attributes to be displayed to [Show], and those not to be displayed to [Hide].
Upon selecting the applicable attribute, click the right or left arrow.
3. In the A&E Browser pane, attributes will be displayed in the order they are listed in
[Show]. To change the order of display, select the applicable attribute and click the up or
down arrow.
4. To change the display name of an attribute, select and then click the applicable attribute.
Characters can then be entered. Enter an arbitrary display name.
5. Click [OK].
The selected content will be saved.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the default values of the attributes displayed in the Select Columns dialog box,
refer to:
“l List of Message Attributes Displayed in the Select Columns Dialog Box” on page B2-14
For more information about adding or deleting attributes displayed in the Select Columns dialog box, refer to:
n Items Set in the A&E Messages Pane Tab

Information to be displayed in the A&E Messages pane and icon actions are set in the A&E
Messages pane tab.

Option
Background Pattern Standard Zebra Pattern Reset to System Default

Icon Blinking ON OFF
Emphases on Unread Alarms ON OFF
Space between the Lines 10
Displayed Columns(Filter) Modify
Displayed Columns(Shelf) Modify
Text Color 1 Text Color 2
Background Color 1 Background Color 2
Text Color 1 (Selected) Text Color 2 (Selected)
Background Color 1 (Selected) Background Color 2 (Selected)
Apply OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.3-9 A&E Messages Pane Tab
SEE
ALSO For more information about the items set in the A&E Messages pane tab, refer to:
“n List of Items Set in the A&E Messages Pane Tab” on page B2-17
l [Modify] Button of Displayed Columns (Filter) and Displayed Columns

(Shelf)
Attributes to be displayed in the A&E Messages pane can be selected. Attributes can be se-
lected separately for displaying the result of shelving, and for displaying the result of filtering.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to select attributes, refer to:
“l [Modify] Button in Displayed Columns” on page B1-67
n Items Set in the Dynamic Filters Pane Tab

Icons to be displayed in the Dynamic Filters pane and other items are set in the Dynamic Fil-
ters pane tab.

Option
Reset to System Default

Set Filter Rules Button Image
OR Operator Button Image
NOT Operator Button Image
Color of Error
Animation Speed
Apply OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.3-10 Dynamic Filters Pane Tab
Items set in the Dynamic Filters pane tab are explained in the table below.
Table B1.4.3-4 Items Set in the Dynamic Filters Pane Tab

Set Filter Rules Button Im-
age Specify the icon to be used for each filter operation.
OR Operator Button Clicking an Operator button opens the File dialog box where you can specify a
NOT Operator Button Im- desired icon.
age
Color of Error Set the color shown if a calculation definition error occurs.
Animation Speed Set the speed at which the contents of Dynamic Filter pane are displayed.
n Items Set in the Print Tab

Font, margin and other items for printing the Option window are set in the Print tab.

Option
Font Modify MS UI Gothic Reset to System Default
Line Margin (mm) 5
Row Margin (mm) 5
Page Settings Modify
Apply OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.3-11 Print Tab
The items set in the Print tab are explained in the table below.
Table B1.4.3-5 Items Set in the Print Tab

Selects font type and font size for printing the displayed screen image.
Font Choose [Modify] to open the font setting dialog box of Windows. The font type and font
size can be defined on this dialog box.
Line Margin Sets the line margin of displayed screen image for printing.
Row Margin Sets the row margin of displayed screen image for printing.
Sets the print type for printing the displayed screen image.
Page Settings Choose [Modify] to open the print setting dialog box of Windows. The print settings need
to defined accordingly on this dialog box.

B1.4.4 Operations by the Operator to Create Filters

Filters are created in the Filters pane of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Only the oper-
ators who belong to the user with the authority granted by the CAMS for HIS Message Moni-
tor Definition builder can create filters. Filters created here are not shared with other Users.
n Creating a Filter
Ensure to keep the number of filters per user is 50 or less. This number includes the default
filters and system filters provided in the system. Although a user can create more than 50 fil-
ters, performance in alarm display and other alarm-related actions may decrease if created.
The operation to create a filter is as follows.
1. Open the All Filters tab in the Filters pane.
2. Display the context menu in the hierarchy directly above the hierarchy in which the filter is
to be created, and select [Add Filter].
The Create Filter dialog box is displayed.
Create Filter
Filter Name
Description
Attribute
OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.4-1 Create Filter Dialog Box
If no hierarchy is selected, the filter will be placed at the top of the tree (root).
3. Enter the [Filter Name]. Do not enter the same character string as that of an existing filter
in the same hierarchy.
4. Click the icon and select the icon to be attached to the filter.
5. Enter a comment to be attached to the filter in [Description].
6. Select the attribute to be set as the filter condition from the drop down list for [Attribute].
Based on the attribute you have set, an entry field will be added at the bottom of the Cre-
ate Filter dialog box.
TIP Do not set the [PV (Current Value)] or [ALRM (Current Value)] attribute as the filter condition.
7. Enter the necessary item. For a conditional expression of the character string type, wild-
cards such as “*” and “?” can be used.
8. Click [OK].
The filter is created.
9. To reflect the information set in the Option window in the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS, perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [File] > [Commit Changes] in the menu bar.

SEE
ALSO For more information about filter types, refer to:
“l Filter Types” on page A4-5
For more information about the default values of the attributes displayed in the Select Columns dialog box,
refer to:
“l List of Message Attributes Displayed in the Select Columns Dialog Box” on page B2-14
l Changing Filter Attributes

Attributes of the created filter can be changed. Only the attributes for which the operator is
granted with the authority to do so can be changed. The operation is as follows.
2. Select the target filter and display the context menu, and then select [Properties].
The properties of the filter will be displayed.
'MyStringFilter' properties
Filter Name MyStringFilter
Description My String Filter
Path /Process/MyStringFilter
Filter Type User Filter (created in operating mode)
Conditional expression True
and Timestamp = 8:00-20:00
Move filter OK Cancel
Figure B1.4.4-2 Filter Properties
The following attributes can be changed.

• Filter name
• Icon
• Description
• Path, but no direct input is allowed
• Conditional expression; however, the system filters which can be changed only by
the engineers, and the user filters which can be changed by the engineers and the
operators who belong to the user that shares the filters.
TIP When you call the properties of the filter at the top of the tree (root), only one condition expression will be
displayed, which grayed out and only can be read.
3. Change the attributes that can be changed, other than the path, as necessary.
4. To change the path, click the arrow for [Move filter].
5. Click [OK].
The filter attributes will be changed.
If there is an error, the Error dialog box will be displayed and the error in the filter proper-
ties will be highlighted. Correct the error and click [OK].

SEE
ALSO For more information about the system and user filters, refer to:
“l Filter Types” on page A4-5
For more information about entries of conditional expressions, refer to:
“l Entering Conditional Expressions for Filtering” on page B1-74
l Entering Conditional Expressions for Filtering

There are six types of attribute that can be entered in conditional expressions.
• Condition: True, False, not case sensitive.
• Attribute: Case sensitive
• Pattern or Rule: Case sensitive
• Comparator: =, <=, <, >=, >
• Logic Gate: “not,” “and,” and “or” in the order of priority.
Not case sensitive, “and” can be omitted.
• Parentheses
Wildcards such as “*” and “?” can be used as a filter condition. If you want to handle “*” and
“?” as characters, description such as “\* and “\?” should be used instead.
There are three types of syntax for conditional expressions.
• Conditional expression of character string type: Attribute=“Pattern or Rule”
To enter a comparator, logic gate, parentheses, or space in the filter condition, enclose
the condition with double quotation marks. To enclose the condition already in double
quotation marks with another set of double quotation marks, use the double quotation
mark twice, on each end, as in (““).
Example 1: TagName=TAG0001
Example 2: MessageNo=10**
Example 3: MessageNo = “10**”
• Conditional expression of time type: Attribute=Hour:Minue to Hour:Minute
To enter a space before and after a “:” (colon) or “-” (hyphen), enclose the formula with
double quotation marks.
Example 1: Timestamp = 4:00-6:30
Example 2: Timestamp = “4:00 - 6:30”
• Conditional expression of numeric type: Enter the attribute, comparator and filter condi-
tion in that order. The filter condition can be enclosed with double quoation marks.
Example 1: Message.Buzzer> 3
Example 2: Message.Buzzer > “3”
l Filters of which Attributes cannot be Changed

Attributes cannot be changed for the following filters that use the Batch ID as a filter condition.
Current Product [Batch ID] filters
l Adding to the Favorites Tab

Filters can be added to the Favorites tab. The operation is as follows.
2. Select the target filter and display the context menu, and then select [Add Favorites].

l Copying Filters
Filters that have been created can be copied. Only the operators who belong to the user gran-
ted with the authority to do so can perform the operation. The operation is as follows.
2. Select the target filter, and then perform either one of the following two methods.
• Select [Edit] - [Copy] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu and select [Copy].
If the target filter includes any lower-hierarchy filters, those will be copied as well.
If any of the following operations is performed after the filters have been copied, the copying
of the filters will be cancelled.
• Cut or copy another filter before pasting the filters that have been copied.
• Delete the filter that has been copied.
• Close the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
The following filters cannot be copied.
• Filters at the top of the tree structure (root)
• Dynamic filters
l Cutting Filters
Filters that have been created can be cut. Only the operators who belong to the user granted
with the authority to do so can perform the operation. The operation is as follows.
2. Select the target filter, and then perform either one of the following three methods.
• Display the context menu and select [Cut].
• Press the [Ctrl] key and the [X] key on the keyboard at the same time.
If the target filter includes any lower-hierarchy filters, those will be cut as well. The filters that
have been cut will be displayed in the original hierarchy in lighter shade until the cut operation
is cancelled.
If any of the following operations is performed after the filters have been cut, the cutting of the
filters will be cancelled.
• Paste the filters that have been cut.
• Cut or copy another filter before pasting the filters that have been cut.
• Press the [ESC] key on the keyboard before pasting the filters that have been cut.
• Delete the filter that has been cut.
• Close the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
The following filters cannot be cut.
• Filters at the top of the tree structure (root)
• Dynamic filters
• Filters that are provided by default
• Filters created in different action modes

• Load shedding filters or the filters that have load shedding filters in lower hierarchies
• Filters that have been auto-shelved
l Pasting Filters
Filters that have been copied or cut can be pasted. Only the operators who belong to the user
granted with the authority to do so can perform the operation. The operation is as follows.
2. Select the hierarchy directly above the one to which the filters are to be pasted, and then
perform either one of the following three methods. If no hierarchy is selected, the filter will
be placed at the top of the tree (root).
• Select [Edit] - [Paste] in the menu bar.
• Display the context menu and select [Paste].
• Press the [Ctrl] key and the [V] key on the keyboard at the same time.
If the target filter includes any lower- hierarchy filters, those will be pasted as well.
If a filter of the same name already exists in the destination hierarchy, the filters can still be
pasted, but the filter names will be changed automatically. Filter names are distinguished by
adding sequential numbers, such as “filter name-1” and “filter name-2.”
TIP If the original filter attribute is changed after filters have been copied and pasted, the attributes of the copied
filters will also change.
l Deleting Filters
Filters can be deleted by the operator who have created them even during operation and
monitoring. Select the target filter and display the context menu, and then select [Delete Fil-
ter]. If the target filter includes any lower-hierarchy filters, those will be deleted as well.
l Dynamic Filtering when Filter Attributes are Changed

Even if the attributes of the filters which have been selected at the start of dynamic filtering
are changed, the changes will not be reflected in the dynamic filtering conditions.
l Filters that Use the Batch ID as Filter Condition

When you call the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Product Control view, filters that
use the batch ID as a filter condition and the lower-hierarchy filters will be automatically cre-
ated. The filter name will be fixed to Current Product [Batch ID].
• Current Product [Batch ID]
• Current Product [Batch ID]\System
• Current Product [Batch ID]\Process
• Current Product [Batch ID]\Operator Guide
Filters that use the batch ID as a filter condition have the following characteristics.
• They cannot be added to the Favorites tab.
• Lower-hierarchy filters cannot be cut or deleted.
• Multiple Current Product [Batch ID] filters cannot be displayed at the same time. The ex-
isting Current Product [Batch ID] filter will be replaced by a new one when a different
batch ID is specified as the key and the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is called
again. To keep the existing Current Product [Batch ID] filter, copy and paste that filer and
save it to a different folder.

B1.4.5 Setting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

Window Configuration
The default window configuration can be specified for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
Perform this operation only when necessary, on the HIS set as the Download Master.
SEE
1. Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Configuration mode. Select SYSTEM
as the logon user.
2. Open the Option window, and select or enter the items to be customized.
3. Commit the changes made on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Configuration
mode, refer to:
“n Starting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Configuration Mode” on page B1-80
For more information about the operation to customize in the Option window, refer to:
B1.4.3, “Operations by the Operator to Customize the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS” on page
B1-61

<B1.5 Configurator of CAMS for HIS> B1-78
B1.5 Configurator of CAMS for HIS

The Configurator of CAMS for HIS is an engineering tool for CAMS for HIS. This section ex-
plains the Configurator of CAMS for HIS. The information primarily includes the following:
• How to start and exit
• Roles
TIP When HIS-TSE is used, only one among the HIS-TSE client PCs can start the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.

B1.5.1 Starting and Exiting Configurator of CAMS for HIS

This section explains how to start and exit the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
n How to Start the Configurator of CAMS for HIS

In the Start menu, select [All Programs] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Configurator of CAMS
for HIS].

File Tools
Style Settings
Alarm Generator
Figure B1.5.1-1 Configurator of CAMS for HIS
Select the operation to perform with the Configurator of CAMS for HIS from the menu bar of
each menu item. The table below shows a list of menu items.
Table B1.5.1-1 List of Menu Items

Menu Description
File Download Downloads contents set in the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
Download External File Downloads external file(s).
Exit Exits the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
Tools Audit trails of database changes Displays the Audit Trails of Database Changes dialog box.
Style Settings Displays the Style Settings dialog box.
Backup Displays the Backup/Restore dialog box.
Message Monitor Configuration Starts the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Configura-
tion mode.
Alarm Generator Starts the Alarm Generator.
CENTUM VP Database Convert Converts the previous CENTUM VP engineering database to
fit the format of CAMS for HIS.
n How to Exit the Configurator of CAMS for HIS

• Select [File] - [Exit] in the menu bar.
• Click the [Close] button in the upper right corner.

B1.5.2 Roles of the Configurator of CAMS for HIS

This section explains the roles of the Configurator of CAMS for HIS. The information primarily
includes the following:
• Specify the content to be displayed in the Details pane on the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS.
• Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Configuration mode.
• Start the Alarm Generator.
• Download engineering data and external files.
• Manage the download histories from the Configurator of CAMS for HIS and the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Load engineering information of other projects.
The applicable targets are the HISs included in the Equalization Scope.
n Operation to Specify the Content Displayed in the Details Pane

In the Style Settings dialog box, specify the content to be displayed in the Details pane in the
SEE
B1.4.2, “Specifying the Information to be Displayed in the Details Pane” on page B1-57
n Starting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Configuration

Mode
When the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS is started in the Configuration mode, the user
logged on the User-In dialog box of HIS is granted with operation privilege to performed the
operations originally restricted for the user. The default window configuration can also be
specified for the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. The operation is as follows.
1. Click [Message Monitor Configuration].
The Message Monitor with Configuration Mode dialog box will be displayed.
Message Monitor with Configuration Mode
USER: OFFUSER Start Cancel
Figure B1.5.2-1 Message Monitor with Configuration Mode Dialog Box
TIP The following method can also be used to call the Message Monitor with Configuration Mode dialog box.
Select [Tools] - [Message Monitor Configuration] in the menu bar.
2. Enter the logon user name in [USER:], and click [Start]. The user can also be selected
from the drop down list.
The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS for the logon user will start in the Configuration
mode.
If the Message Monitor is started with SYSTEM entered in [USER:], the engineering infor-
mation common to all HISs that are included in the Equalization Scope can be config-
ured.

If the Message Monitor is started with a user name entered in [USER:], the engineering
information for that specific user can be configured.
3. Perform the applicable operation in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, or customize
SEE
ALSO For more information about operations to customize the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, refer to:
• B1.4.3, “Operations by the Operator to Customize the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS” on page
B1-61
• “n Operation Overview” on page B1-77
n Operation to Start the Alarm Generator

You can simulate the actions and message processing operations of the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS using the Alarm Generator.
SEE
ALSO For more information about these operations, refer to:
B1.6, “Function Check of CAMS for HIS” on page B1-85
n Operation to Download Engineering Data and External Files

You can download the engineering data configured on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
or by the Configurator of CAMS for HIS to a CAMS for HIS engineering database. If there are
multiple data files, they will be downloaded all at once. The operation is as follows.
1. Select [File] - [Download] in the menu bar.
The Reason for the Change dialog box will be displayed.
Reason for the Change
Reason
Download Cancel
C:\CENTUMVP\CAMS\configurator\work\dat
Figure B1.5.2-2 Reason for the Change Dialog Box
2. Enter the reason for the change, and click [Download].
l Types of Files Downloaded by the Configurator of CAMS for HIS

Files downloaded by the Configurator of CAMS for HIS are as follows.
• Default window configuration of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
• Customization information of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
• External files

l Actions when Updated Files Already Exist at the Download Destination

If a file of the same name downloaded by another Configurator of CAMS for HIS already ex-
ists at the download destination, a dialog box indicating “The file to be downloaded has al-
ready been updated by another PC. Do you wish to download it?” will be displayed, and then
downloading will be stopped. If some of the multiple files to be downloaded are applicable to
this situation, downloading of not just the applicable files, but all files, will be stopped. To con-
tinue downloading, click [Download].
l Operation to Download External Files
IMPORTANT
This operation requires technical knowledge about databases.
Files that cannot be configured by the Configurator of CAMS for HIS can be directly downloa-
ded by specifying the paths as external files.
SEE
“l Downloading the Text File” on page A5-2
n Managing the Download History

The download histories handled by the Configurator of CAMS for HIS are as follows.
• Records and configuration information of which changes have been committed on the
• Records and configuration information downloaded by the Configurator of CAMS for HIS
These histories can be referenced, backed up and restored.
l Operation to Restore Past Data

The past engineering data downloaded from the Configurator of CAMS for HIS can be re-
stored in the Audit Trails of Database Changes dialog box. The operation is as follows.
1. Select [Tools] - [Audit trails of database changes] in the menu bar.
The Audit Trails of Database Changes dialog box will be displayed.

Audit Trails of Database Changes
Version Download Time User Name Download File Name Reason

1 2008/03/14 10:00 CAMS AlarmGroup.csv Test 1
5 2008/03/16 10:00 CAMS AlarmID.csv Test 3
13 2008/03/2010:00 CAMS AlarmID.csv Test 7
OK Retrieve Print Print Preview
Figure B1.5.2-3 Audit Trails of Database Changes Dialog Box
2. Select the version to be restored, and click [Retrieve].

TIP The version numbers displayed in Version increase by 2 at a time starting from 1, as in 1, 3, 5, 7…
l Operation to Back up
The engineering data configured by the Configurator of CAMS for HIS can be backed up.
When this operation is performed, however, all the engineering data configured by the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS will be backed up together. The operation is as follows.
1. Save data, if any, that is being edited by the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS or the
Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
2. Select [Tools] - [Backup] in the menu bar.
The Backup/Restore dialog box will be displayed. While the dialog box is being displayed,
the Configurator of CAMS for HIS cannot be used.
Backup/Restore
Backup Destination
...
Backup Restore Cancel
Figure B1.5.2-4 Backup/Restore Dialog Box
3. Enter the save destination for the engineering data in [Backup Destination], and then click
[Backup]. The save destination can also be selected from the drop down list. Do not,
however, select the Configurator.
When a folder in which a backup file already exists is selected as the [Backup Destination], a
new file will be saved without deleting the existing file. As a result, unnecessary files may be
kept without getting deleted.
l Operation to Restore
The engineering data backed up by the Configurator of CAMS for HIS can be restored.
1. Select [Tools] - [Backup] in the menu bar.
The Backup/Restore dialog box will be displayed. While the dialog box is being displayed,
the Configurator of CAMS for HIS cannot be used.

2. Enter the save destination for the engineering data in [Backup Destination], and then click
[Restore]. The restore destination can also be selected from the drop down list.
Once the restoring process is completed, a message dialog box will be displayed.
CAMS Configurator
Restore complete. Configurator is restarted now.
OK
Figure B1.5.2-5 Restoration Completed Message Box
3. Click [OK].
The Configurator of CAMS for HIS will be rebooted, and the restored definition files will
be displayed.
Do not perform any of the following operations. CAMS for HIS will not operate properly.
• Restore backup information of a version older than CENTUM VP R4.02.00 by the Config-
urator of CAMS for HIS of R4.02.00 or later.
• Restore backup information of a version CENTUM VP R4.02.00 or later by the Configura-
tor of CAMS for HIS older than R4.02.00.
n Operation to Load Engineering Information of Other Projects

To use the CAMS for HIS functions when connecting multiple projects, security and engineer-
ing information needs to be coordinated among projects. Accordingly, first convert the
CENTUM VP database of the host project or other projects into a CAMS for HIS database,
and then load it to CAMS for HIS. The operation is as follows.
1. Select [Tools] - [CENTUM VP Database Convert].
The Convert dialog box will be displayed.
2. Click [Convert].
The CENTUM VP database will be converted into a CAMS for HIS database.

<B1.6 Function Check of CAMS for HIS> B1-85
B1.6 Function Check of CAMS for HIS

The Function Check displays A&E messages and simulates processing in the Message Moni-
tor of CAMS for HIS. The Function Check uses the dedicated tools Alarm Generator and the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).
This section explains how to operate the tools required for the Function Check and the proce-
dures of executing the Function Check.
IMPORTANT
The function check should be performed after the engineering works for the field control sta-
tion such as details of I/O modules or FCS configurations on the FCS builders.
n Purpose of the Function Check

The purpose of the Function Check is to verify that the operations of CAMS for HIS are proper
for the alarm system designs, and that designs of A&E messages are appropriate. It is not
intended for checking simple entry mistakes.
n Overview of the Function Check

In the Function Check, a test environment is launched separately from the environment where
CAMS for HIS actually runs, to simulate generation of A&E messages and process the alarms
with the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode). For the Function Check
environment, it is possible to copy and use the environment where CAMS for HIS actually
runs. The Function Check can be executed in parallel while actually running the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS on an existing system.
l Target A&E Messages of the Function Check

When the Function Check is executed, it operates on the following A&E messages:
• Process alarm messages of CENTUM VP
• Annunciator messages of CENTUM VP
• A&E messages via the OPC A&E server
l Items that can be Verified by the Function Check

In the Function Check, the following items are the main focus.
• Is the Shelving timeout setting appropriate?
• Is the logic of filter conditions consistent?
• Is the Load Shedding setting value appropriate?
• Suppression: Is the Suppression group range, etc. appropriate?
• User security: Are the operation authority and A&E Messages Receiving settings of the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, etc. appropriate?
• Configuration of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS: Is sorting of A&E messages
working properly? Are choices of fonts, colors, widths of columns and Details pane dis-
play options appropriate for the operation and monitoring?
n Security in the Function Check

The scope of operation and monitoring for the HIS is determined by the HIS security settings
when the Function Check is executed.

n Operation Environment of the Function Check

The operation environment of the Function Check is shown below.
• Hardware Environment
Under the recommended hardware environment of CAMS for HIS, up to 1 GB disk space
is required for the Function Check environment.
• Software Environment
Same as recommended for CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation environment of CAMS for HIS, refer to:
“■ Operating Environment” in the LHS1100 Standard Operation and Monitoring Function (GS
33K05D10-50E)

B1.6.1 Function Check Execution Task Flow

The tasks of the Function Check can basically be divided into a flow of tasks performed main-
ly by personnel in charge of engineering and a flow of tasks performed by operators. The dif-
ference between these tasks is whether Configurator of CAMS for HIS is used or not. Note
that using Configurator of CAMS for HIS, it is necessary to specify the Download Master.
This section shows each flow of tasks involved in execution of the Function Check.
SEE
“n System Configuration when Using CAMS for HIS” on page A1-2
For more information about specifying the Downloading Master, refer to:
n Function Check Execution Task Flow for Personnel in Charge of

Engineering
The overview of the tasks involved in Function Check execution when Configurator of CAMS
for HIS is used is illustrated in the following flowchart.
Start
B1.5.1,
Start Configurator of CAMS for HIS
“Starting and Exiting Configurator of
CAMS for HIS”
B1.6.3,
Start Alarm Generator
“Starting and Exiting Alarm Generator”
Create/save A&E messages (simulation alarms) B1.6.5, “Creation of Scenarios”
B1.6.7,
Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
“Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor of
(Function Check mode)
CAMS for HIS (Function Check Mode)”
Generate A&E messages (simulation alarms) B1.6.8,

“Execution of Function Check”
Verify operations/modify or change in the

Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS B1.6.8,
(Function Check mode) “Execution of Function Check”
Select [Commit change] to save the Function

B1.6.8,
Check results
Download definition files B1.6.8,

End
Figure B1.6.1-1 Function Check Execution Task Flow for Personnel in Charge of Engineering
n Function Check Execution Task Flow for Operators

The overview of the tasks involved in Function Check execution when Configurator of CAMS
for HIS is not used is illustrated in the following flowchart.

Start
B1.6.3,
Start Alarm Generator
“Starting and Exiting Alarm Generator.”
Create/save A&E messages (simulation alarms) B1.6.5, “Creation of Scenarios”
B1.6.7,
Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
“Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS (Function Check Mode)”
B1.6.8,
Generate A&E messages (simulation alarms)
Verify operations/modify or change in the B1.6.8,

Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS “Execution of Function Check”
Select [Commit change] to save the Function B1.6.8,

Check results “Execution of Function Check”
End
Figure B1.6.1-2 Function Check Execution Task Flow for Operations in the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS

B1.6.2 What is Alarm Generator?

Alarm Generator is a dedicated tool provided for the Function Check. This section explains
Alarm Generator.
n Alarm Generator Window

The Alarm Generator window is shown below.
Alarm Generator
File Edit Alarm Control
Scenari... Comment Scenari... #OPC Alarm

OPC2 OPC Alarm OPC
OPCAE,3,Yokogawa.ExaopcAESTARDOMFCX.1 HIS0164,4,105,500,
CENTUM CENTUM CENTUM OPCAE,3,Yokogawa.ExaopcAESTARDOMFCX.1 HIS0106,4,105,500,
Delay, 1000
OPCAE,3,Yokogawa.ExaopcAESTARDOMFCX.1 HIS0164,4,105,500,
#Finish ...
Preparing DesignCheck environment. Please wait for a few moment ...

Preparing DesignCheck environment is ready.
A scenario file is selected. Line 1
Figure B1.6.2-1 Alarm Generator Window
n Functions of Alarm Generator

The functions of Alarm Generator are explained below.
• Creating and saving A&E messages (simulation alarms)
This function creates and saves A&E messages (simulation alarms). Data files saved by
this function are called scenarios.
• Generating A&E messages (simulation alarms)
This function loads created scenarios and generates A&E messages (simulation alarms)
for testing. These A&E messages (simulation alarms) can only be displayed and pro-
cessed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) started in the
test environment for the Function Check.
• Reflecting Function Check results
This function reflects modifications made during the Function Check in the environment
where CAMS for HIS actually runs.

B1.6.3 Starting and Exiting Alarm Generator

This section explains how to start and exit Alarm Generator
n How to Start Alarm Generator

Only one Alarm Generator can be started for each HIS. There are two methods for starting
Alarm Generator: Either Configurator of CAMS for HIS or from the Start menu.
l Starting from Configurator of CAMS for HIS

Users designing the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS and A&E messages can start Alarm
Generator from Configurator of CAMS for HIS. In this case, the privilege level of the logon
user can be selected when starting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check
mode).
In the following, it is shown how to start Alarm Generator from Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
1. Select [Program] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Configurator of CAMS for HIS] from [Start]
menu to start Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
2. Execute either one of the following two methods.
• Select [Tool] - [Alarm Generator] in the menu bar.
• Click the [Alarm Generator] button.
Alarm Generator starts up.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to select users’ privilege levels for the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS (Function Check mode), refer to:
“l When Alarm Generator is Started from Configurator of CAMS for HIS” on page B1-108
l How to Start Alarm Generator from the Start Menu

Select [Program] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Alarm Generator of CAMS for HIS] from [Start]
menu to start Alarm Generator.
Alarm Generator starts up.
l Starting Multiple Alarm Generators

It is not allowed to start multiple Alarm Generators. If it is attempted to start another Alarm
Generator when Alarm Generator has already been running, a dialog box below appears:
Alarm Generator
Already started. Cannot start concurrently.
OK
Figure B1.6.3-1 Error Dialog Box for Starting Multiple Alarm Generators
In this case, you either use the started Alarm Generator, or exit the started Alarm Generator
and then start it again for generating the simulation alarms.
If Alarm Generator has been started using the terminal service, the Function Check can only
be executed in the session where Alarm Generator was started up first. If it is attempted to
start another Alarm Generator, same dialog box appears.

n How to Exit Alarm Generator

In the following, it is explained how to exit Alarm Generator.
• Select the [Close] button of Alarm Generator.
• From the menu bar of Alarm Generator, select [File] - [Exit].
l Operations to Close Alarm Generator without Reflecting Changes

If it is attempted to close Alarm Generator without reflecting modifications/changes made dur-
ing the Function Check in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) in
the environment where CAMS for HIS actually runs, a dialog box below appears:
Alarm Generator
Any changes of the setting of CAMS message monitor will be lost if

exit without commit the changes. Do you want to commit the changes?
Yes No Cancel
Figure B1.6.3-2 Error Dialog Box Indicating Changes are not Reflected
Click [Yes] to close Alarm Generator after reflecting the Function Check results. In this case,
Alarm Generator is closed after reflecting the Function Check results in the actual operation
environment of CAMS for HIS.
Click [No] to close Alarm Generator without reflecting the Function Check results. In this case,
Alarm Generator is closed without reflecting the Function Check results in the actual opera-
tion environment of CAMS for HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operations to reflect changes, refer to:
“n Reflecting Changes” on page B1-112

B1.6.4 Layout of Alarm Generator

Alarm Generator consists of the following bars and panes.
• Menu Bar
• Toolbar
• Scenario Files Pane
• Scenario Details Pane
• Errors/Progress Pane
• Status Bar
These bars and panes explained individually.
n Appearance of Alarm Generator

The figure below shows the appearance of Alarm Generator.
Alarm Generator
Menu Bar
Toolbar
Scenari... Comment Scenari...
Scenario Files Pane Scenario Details Pane
Errors/Progress Pane
Status Bar
Figure B1.6.4-1 Appearance of Alarm Generator
n Menu Bar
Operations available in Alarm Generator can be selected using the menu items in the menu
bar. A list of menu items is shown below.

Table B1.6.4-1 Menu Items in Alarm Generator
Menu Description
File New Creates a new scenario. The file extension is fixed to “.snr.”
Save... Saves a scenario.
Save as... Saves a scenario with a new name.
Delete... Deletes a scenario.
Commit change Reflects and saves settings changed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS(Function Check mode) in the actual operation environment.
Exit Exits Alarm Generator.
Edit Copy Selects a character string to be copied.
Cut Selects a character string to be cut.
Paste Pastes the selected character string.
Alarm Check format Verifies that the format of the scenario specifications is correct.
Control
Run... Generates A&E messages (simulation alarms).
Run a step Generates A&E messages (simulation alarms) for each line of a scenario.
Pause Pauses generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms).
Stop Stops generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms).
n Toolbar
The toolbar displays various buttons that are mostly equivalent to the menu items of the menu
bar.
Figure B1.6.4-2 Toolbar of Alarm Generator
The toolbar buttons are explained below.
Figure B1.6.4-3 New
New: Creates a new scenario. The file extension is fixed to [.snr].
Figure B1.6.4-4 Save...
Save...: Saves a scenario.
Figure B1.6.4-5 Delete...
Delete...: Deletes a scenario.
Figure B1.6.4-6 Commit change

Commit change: Reflects and saves settings changed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS (Function Check mode) in the actual operation environment.
Figure B1.6.4-7 Copy
Copy: Selects a character string to be copied.
Figure B1.6.4-8 Cut
Cut: Selects a character string to be cut.
Figure B1.6.4-9 Paste
Paste: Pastes the selected character string.
Figure B1.6.4-10 Run.../ Pause
Run.../ Pause: Switches between generating/pausing A&E messages (simulation alarms) at

every click.
Figure B1.6.4-11 Stop
Stop: Stops generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms).
Figure B1.6.4-12 Run a step
Run a step: Generates A&E messages (simulation alarms) for each line of a scenario.
Figure B1.6.4-13 Check format
Check format: Verifies that the format of the scenario specifications is correct.
n Scenario Files Pane

This pane displays a list of scenarios. Scenarios are saved in the following folder.
(CENTUM VP Installed Folder)\CAMS\ScenarioFiles
n Scenario Details Pane

If a scenario is selected in the Scenario Files Pane, this pane displays the details of the file in
conjunction with the selection. A&E messages (simulation alarms) are generated according to
the details in the file. The line defining the A&E message (simulation alarm) being generated

is highlighted in the pane. The displayed scenario is automatically scrolled as the processing
progresses, and this pane always shows the line defining the A&E message (simulation
alarm) being generated.
In the execution step where A&E messages (simulation alarms) are generated line by line, the
execution is started from the line immediately following the currently highlighted line. If no line
is highlighted, the execution is started from the top line.
During creation of a scenario, various conditions related to generation of A&E messages
should be entered directly in this pane. While editing a scenario, it is possible to edit details
displayed in this pane directly.
SEE
ALSO For more information about scenario information, refer to:
“n Detailed Scenario Definition” on page B1-101
n Errors/Progress Pane
This pane displays the information of errors found in descriptions in a scenario.
This pane also displays the detailed information of A&E messages (simulation alarms) being
generated, if any.
l Displaying Error Information

Error information is displayed using the following format.
line number, column number, [error information], [scenario information in errone
ous line]
• Line number, column number

Indicates the line number and column number of the error in the Scenario file.
• Error information
Indicates the error description.
• Scenario information in erroneous line
Indicates the erroneous script in the Scenario file.
A display example of Error information is shown below.
Example:
Line 13, column 1, [Simulated alarm type is not correct. Only “BlockProcessAlarm”,
“Annaciator”, “OPCAE” can be specified for the simulated alarm type.], [SystemAlarm,
PID, HI, SRALM, 10]
Example:
Line 7, column 5, [The number of alarms to be generated is outside the range. Specify
a value in the range from 0 to 500.], [BlockProcessAlarm, PID, HI, SRALM, -10]
l Displaying Progress Information

The display format of progress information is different for process alarm messages/annuncia-
tor messages of CENTUM VP and A&E messages acquired via the OPC A&E server.
Progress information of CENTUM VP’s process alarm messages/annunciator messages is
displayed in the following format.
Line number, alarm type, tag name, alarm status, alarm/recovery/re-alarm, contro
l station name, plant hierarchy name, alarm priority, alarm color
• Alarm type
BlockProcessAlarm or Annunciator
• Alarm/recovery/re-alarm

Either SALM, SRCV or SRALM
• Control station name
Control station name to which a tag belongs
• Plant hierarchy name
Project IDΔplant hierarchy name (Δ is a single-byte space)
• Alarm priority
Alarm priority defined in Alarm Processing Table Builder
• Alarm color
Display color defined in Alarm Processing Table Builder
Example:
Line 13, BlockProcessAlarm, PID.HI, SALM, FCS0101, P1 FCS0101
%DR0001S010101, 2, R
Progress information of A&E messages acquired via the OPC A&E server is displayed using
the following format.
Line number, alarm type, Route, Source, ConditionName, message
• Alarm type
Fixed to [OPCAE]
• Route
Transmission pathway of A&E messages
• Source
Message generation source
• ConditionName
Alarm status
• Message
Message character string
Example:
Line 21, OPCAE, Yokogawa.ExaopcAESTARDOMFCX.1 HIS0101, CAS-
CADE.NPAS_PID.pidcas2, HI, CASCADE.NPAS_PID.pidcas2 HI Alarm PV=80.00[%]
SEE
ALSO For more information about the alarm type, alarm/recovery/re-alarm, Route, Source, ConditionName and
Messages, refer to:
“l Alarm Lines” on page B1-102
For more information about the alarm priority and alarm color, refer to:
7.4, “Alarm Status Character String and Alarm Processing” in the Human Interface Stations Reference
Vol. 2 (IM 33K03F22-50E)
n Status Bar
This area displays which step in a scenario is being executed when an A&E message (simu-
lation alarm) is being generated. It is displayed when the Scenario Details Pane is selected.

B1.6.5 Creation of Scenarios

A scenario defines A&E messages (simulation alarms) to be generated. This section explains
the procedure of scenario creation along with precautions that should be observed during the
creation.
n Scenario Format
When creating a scenario, simply write the A&E messages (simulation alarms) to be gener-
ated, the intervals at which they are generated, how many times they are generated, as well
as other conditions related to generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms) in text format,
and separate each condition with commands. Files are saved in CSV format.
Conditions written in a scenario are displayed in the Scenario Details Pane of Alarm Genera-
tor.
An example of a scenario is shown below. This example shows a list of definitions for genera-
tion of CENTUM VP’s process alarm messages.
Management Information Line Ver001, CENTUM, comment
Comment Line #CENTUM Process Alarm Scenario
Alarm Lines BlockProcessAlarm, PID, HI, SALM, 10, 500

Delay Time Line Delay, 2000
BlockProcessAlarm, PID, HI, SRALM,,
BlockProcessAlarm, PID, HI, SRCV,,
BlockProcessAlarm, PID21, LL, SALM,,
Loop Start Lines Loop, 2, 300

BlockProcessAlarm, PID31, HI, SRALM,,
BlockProcessAlarm, PID31, HI, SRCV,,
BlockProcessAlarm, PID51, LL, SRALM, 2, 400
BlockProcessAlarm, FC_SW_VAP3, LO, SALM,,
Loop End Lines LoopEnd
Figure B1.6.5-1 Scenario Example
n Procedure of Scenario Creation

A scenario can be created using Alarm Generator or any other editor. This section explains
the procedure for creating a scenario using Alarm Generator.
TIP Creation, edition, saving and deletion of scenarios are disabled during generation of A&E messages (simula-
tion alarms).
l Creating a New Scenario

1. From the menu bar of Alarm Generator, select [File] - [New]. Alternatively, click the [New]
button in the toolbar. The Choose Scenario Type dialog box appears.
Choose Scenario Type
Scenario Type CENTUM Process AI
OK Cancel
Figure B1.6.5-2 Choose Scenario Type Dialog Box

2. Select [Scenario Type] in this dialog box to display the pull-down menu and select the
type of target A&E messages to be used in the Function Check. There are following two
options:
• CENTUM Process Alarm: Process alarm/Annunciator messages of CENTUM VP
• OPC Alarm: A&E messages via the OPC A&E server
3. Click [OK].
Alarm Generator appears. At this point, nothing is written in the Scenario Details Pane
yet.
4. Write the scenario text directly in the Scenario Details Pane.
5. From the menu bar of Alarm Generator, select [File] - [Save...]. Alternatively, click the
[Save...] button in the toolbar.
The dialog box for saving a scenario appears.
SaveAs
Scenario TEST
Comment Test Scenario for PJT01
OK Cancel
Figure B1.6.5-3 Dialog Box for Saving Scenarios
6. Enter text in the [Scenario] and [Comment] fields. The [Scenario] must be a valid MS-
Windows file name. The [Comment] can be any character string of up to 64 single-byte
characters.
7. Click [OK].
The scenario is saved and the file information is displayed at the top of the Scenario Files
Pane.
Click [Cancel] to cancel saving.
SEE
ALSO For more information about definitions related to scenarios, refer to:
l Editing Scenarios
1. Select a file to be edited in Alarm Generator’s Scenario Files Pane.
The information in the selected scenario is displayed in the Scenario Details Pane.
2. Modify the scenario directly in the Scenario Details Pane.
3. To overwrite a file, select [File] - [Save...] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator. Alterna-
tively, click the [Save...] button in the toolbar.
To save a file with a different name, select [File] - [Save as...] from the menu bar of Alarm
Generator.
A dialog box for saving scenarios appears and the information of the original file is dis-
played in the [Scenario] and [Comment] fields.
4. When overwriting a file, only [Comment] can be edited. Enter [Comment] as required. The
[Comment] can be any character string of up to 64 single-byte characters.
When saving a file under a different name, both [Scenario] and [Comment] can be edited.
Enter [Scenario], and enter [Comment] if necessary. The [Scenario] must be a valid MS-
Windows file name. The [Comment] can be any character string of up to 64 single-byte
characters.
5. Click [OK].

The scenario is saved and the file information is displayed at the top of the Scenario Files
Pane.
Click [Cancel] to cancel saving.
SEE
ALSO For more information about definitions related to scenarios, refer to:
l Confirmation of Saving Scenario being Created

If it is attempted to create a new scenario before the scenario currently being created is
saved, the following confirmation dialog box appears.
Alarm Generator
Do you want to save changes to the scenario before closing?
Yes No Cancel
Figure B1.6.5-4 Confirmation Dialog Box for Saving Scenario
Click [Yes] to save the scenario currently being created. The subsequent operations are the
same as step 3 and onward of the operations for editing scenarios.
Click [No] to discard the scenario currently being created. The subsequent operations are the
same as the operations for creating a New Scenario.
Click [Cancel] if the scenario should be neither saved nor discarded.
l Deleting Scenarios
1. Select a file to be deleted in Alarm Generator’s Scenario Files Pane.
2. From the menu bar of Alarm Generator, select [File] - [Delete...]. Alternatively, click the
[Delete...] button in the toolbar.
The confirmation dialog box appears.
3. Click [Yes].
The selected scenario is deleted and the corresponding file information is deleted from
the Scenario Files Pane.
Click the [No] button to cancel deletion of a scenario.
n Precautions when Creating Scenarios

The following precautions shall be observed when creating scenarios.
l Existence of A&E Messages from Different Generation Sources

It is not allowed to describe process alarm messages/annunciator messages of CENTUM VP
and A&E messages acquired via the OPC A&E server in a single scenario.
l Maximum Number of Lines in a Scenario: 300 Lines

No more than 300 lines, including spaces and comments, can be written/read to/from a single
scenario using Alarm Generator. If a scenario containing more than 300 lines is created using
another editor and loaded with Alarm Generator, only 300 lines will be displayed in the Sce-
nario Details Pane. A message dialog box below appears:

Alarm Genarator
A scenario file is limited to 300 lines (empty lines and comment text lines are included.)
OK
Figure B1.6.5-5 Message Dialog Box Displayed when the Number of Scenario Lines Exceeds 300
l Maximum Number of Scenarios: 100

Scenarios are saved in the following folder.
(CENTUM VP Installed Folder)\CAMS\ScenarioFiles
The number of scenarios saved in this folder can be up to 100. If 101 or more files are saved,
the Scenario Files Pane displays up to 100 scenarios starting from the newest.
If it is attempted to create and save more than 100 scenarios using Alarm Generator, a mes-
sage dialog box below appears:
Alarm Generator
The number of scenario files exceeds the limit. Do you want to delete the existing files?
Yes No
Figure B1.6.5-6 Message Dialog Box Displayed when the Number of Scenarios Exceeds 100
In this case, decrease the number of scenarios by deleting existing scenarios or moving sce-
narios to other folders. The procedure for deleting existing scenarios is shown below.
1. Click [Yes] in the message dialog box displayed when the number of scenarios exceeds
100.
The Delete Scenario dialog box appears.
Delete Scenario
Select Files to Delete.
Scenario Name Comment Scenario Type
CENTUM CENTUM CENTUM
COPY (10) of CENT... CENTUM CENTUM
COPY (10) of Copy o... CENTUM CENTUM
COPY (10) of Copy o... opcAlarm OPC
COPY (10) of Copy o... comment CENTUM
COPY (10) of opcAla... opcAlarm OPC
COPY (10) of Right comment CENTUM
COPY (11) of Copy o... opcAlarm OPC
COPY (11) of CENT... opcAlarm OPC
Delete Cancel
Figure B1.6.5-7 Delete Scenario Dialog Box
2. In the Delete Scenario dialog box, check the boxes of scenarios to be deleted.

3. Click the [Delete] button.
The selected scenarios are deleted and the corresponding file information is deleted from
the Scenario Files Pane. Afterward, new scenarios are saved automatically.
Click the [Cancel] button to close the Delete Scenario dialog box without deleting scenar-
ios.
If [No] is clicked in the message dialog box displayed when the number of scenarios exceeds
100, the scenario deletion processing is stopped.
l A&E Message Generation Time Accuracy: 100 ms

The shortest time interval at which A&E messages (simulation alarms) can be generated is
100 ms. If a time interval shorter than 100 ms is specified, operations cannot be guaranteed
to proceed exactly as defined in the scenario.
Depending on the CPU load, up to 100 ms delays may occur. For example, time interval is set
to generate A&E messages (simulation alarms) at 220 ms, the generation intervals of A&E
messages (simulation alarms) may vary in the range from 220 ms to 320 ms, depending on
the CPU load in reality.
n Detailed Scenario Definition

This section explains details of conditions defined in scenarios.
l Management Information Line

This line contains information of a scenario. The definition syntax and meaning of each item
are shown below.
Definition syntax: Scenario version, alarm category, scenario comment
Table B1.6.5-1 Conditions Written in Management Information Line

Condition Explanation Definition example
Scenario version Fixed to [Ver001] Ver001
Alarm category Distinguishes between CENTUM VP’s A&E mes- CENTUM
sages or A&E messages acquired via the OPC
A&E server
• Fixed to [CENTUM] in the case of CENTUM
VP’s A&E messages
• Fixed to [OPC] in the case of A&E messages
acquired via the OPC A&E server
Scenario comment Write a brief explanation of the scenario. Any Operation check of fil-
character string up to 64 single-byte characters ter 01
can be entered.
Among the conditions written in the management information line, [Scenario version] and
[Alarm category] are automatically filled in when creating scenarios using Alarm Generator.
There is no need for the users to fill in these fields. Moreover, the text entered in [Comment]
of the dialog box for saving a scenario will be displayed in [Scenario comment].
TIP Conditions in these fields are not displayed in Alarm Generator’s Scenario Details Pane, but a scenario can-
not be loaded if there is any erroneous information in these fields. Be careful when creating scenarios using
other editors.
l Comment Line
This line is a scenario comment. By typing [#] at the line start, the information in the line is
treated as comment and has no influence on creation and generation of simulation alarms.

l Alarm Lines
• Definition syntax of process alarm messages of CENTUM VP
This line contains information of process alarm messages of CENTUM VP. The definition
syntax and meaning of each item are explained below.
Definition syntax: Alarm type, tag name, alarm status, alarm/recovery/re-alarm
, number of repetitions, generation intervals
Table B1.6.5-2 Conditions to be Written in Alarm Lines - CENTUM VP’s Process Alarm Messages
Alarm type Fixed to [BlockProcessAlarm] in the case of CENTUM VP’s process BlockProcessAlarm
alarm messages.
If the alarm type is omitted, it is treated as “BlockProcessAlarm.”
Tag name Specify a tag name of a function block. PID
When multiple projects are involved, it is possible to specify tag names PID@P2
of other projects using the syntax of [tab name@project ID].
Alarm status Define an alarm status. Specify alarm status characters such as HI and HI
LO.
Alarm/recov- Specify whether alarm, recovery or re-alarm applies. SALM
ery/re-alarm • [SALM] in the case of alarm generation
• [SRCV] in the case of alarm recovery
• [SRALM] in the case of re-alarm
Number of Define the number of repetitions if alarms are generated repeatedly. 10
repetitions Any number in the range from 0 to 500 can be defined. If the number of
repetitions is omitted, it is treated as 1 (no repetition).
If 0 is defined, the corresponding A&E message is not generated at all.
Generation Define the intervals at which alarms are generated repeatedly. The unit 500
intervals is [ms]. The intervals can be defined in the range from 0 to 1800000
(30 minutes).(*1) If the generation interval is omitted, it is treated as
1000 (1 second).
*1: If a time interval shorter than 100 ms is specified, operations cannot be guaranteed to proceed exactly as defined in the sce-
nario. In this case, the actual generation intervals will vary depending on the CPU load.
• Definition syntax of CENTUM VP’s annunciator messages

Write information of CENTUM VP’s annunciator messages in this line. The definition syn-
tax and meaning of each item are explained below.
Definition syntax: Alarm type, annunciator name, alarm location, alarm/recovery
/re-alarm, number of repetitions, generation intervals
Table B1.6.5-3 Conditions Written in Alarm Line - CENTUM VP’s Annunciator Messages
Alarm type Fixed to [Annunciator] in the case of CENTUM VP’s annunciator Annunciator
messages.(*1)
If the alarm type is omitted, it is treated as “BlockProcessAlarm.”
Annunciator Specify a tag name or element number of an annunciator. ANN-LOW01
name %AN0123S010101
Alarm location Specify a sequence table or a SEBOL tag name that generates an- ST16-A01
nunciator messages.
If the tag name above is omitted, it is treated as if messages are
generated from the plant hierarchy name to which the annunciator
belongs.
Alarm/ Specify whether alarm, recovery or re-alarm applies. SALM
recovery/re- • [SALM] in the case of alarm generation
alarm • [SRCV] in the case of alarm recovery
• [SRALM] in the case of re-alarm

Number of repe- Define the number of repetitions if alarms are generated repeated- 10
titions ly. Any number in the range from 0 to 500 can be defined. If the
number of repetitions is omitted, it is treated as 1 (no repetition).
If 0 is defined, the corresponding A&E message is not generated at
all.
Generation inter- Define the intervals if alarms are generated repeatedly. The unit is 500
vals [ms]. The intervals can be defined in the range from 0 to 1800000
(30 minutes).(*2)If the generation interval is omitted, it is treated as
1000 (1 second).
*1: Normal annunciators and annunciators with data are not distinguished. For this reason, e.g., message No.0120 is generated
even in cases where message No.0122 should be generated under normal circumstances.
• Definition syntax of A&E messages via the OPC A&E server

Write information of A&E messages via the OPC A&E server in this line. The definition
syntax and meaning of each item are explained below.
Definition syntax: Alarm type, NewState, Route, Source, EventType, EventCategor
y, Severity, ConditionName, NumEventAttrs, EventAttributes0
, EventAttributes1, EventAttributes2, EventAttributes3, Even
tAttributes4, Message, Number of repetitions, Generation int
ervals
Table B1.6.5-4 Conditions Written in Alarm Line of A&E Messages Acquired via the OPC A&E Server
Alarm type Fixed to [OPCAE] in the case of A&E messages via the OPC A&E OPCAE
server.
If the alarm type is omitted, it is treated as “OPCAE.”
NewState Specify alarm generation/alarm recovery.(*1) 3
• Alarm generation: 3
• Alarm recovery: 1
Route Specify the pathway of A&E messages transmission. The specifica- Yokogawa.Exaopc
tion format is shown below. AESTARDOMFCX.
ProgramIDΔComputerName 1 HIS0101
Δ: space
Source Specify a messages generation source. CAS-
CADE.NPAS_PID_
pidcas2
EventType Specify an event type. 1
• Simple event: 1
• Condition event: 4
EventCategory The value depends on the OPC vendor. 105
In the case of STARDOM, the process alarm is [105].
Sevirity Specify the severity using a numerical value in the range from 1 to 500
1000.The greater the value, the severer the alarm.
ConditionName Define an alarm status. Specify alarm status characters such as HI HI
and HI LO.
NumEventAttrs The value depends on the number of OPC vendor attributes. 5
Valid values must be in the range from [YOPC.EventAttributes1] to
[Number of attributes].
A setting of [5] process alarms is appropriate in case of STARDOM.
EventAttributes0 The value depends on the OPC vendor. It is a message number in 192
the case of STARDOM.
EventAttributes1 The value depends on the OPC vendor. It is an IP address in the 10.0.139.73
case of STARDOM.

EventAttributes2 The value depends on the OPC vendor. It is alarm generation time 2008/03/23
in the case of STARDOM. 10:31:49
EventAttributes3 The value depends on the OPC vendor. It indicates milliseconds of 514
the alarm generation time in the case of STARDOM.
EventAttributes4 The value depends on the OPC vendor. It is a node identifier in the FCN01
case of STARDOM.
Message The character string depends on the OPC vendor. CAS-
CADE.NPAS_PID_
pidcas2 HI Alarm
PV=80.00[%])
Number of repeti- Define the number of repetitions if alarms are generated repeated- 10
tions ly. Any number in the range from 0 to 500 can be defined. If the
number of repetitions is omitted, it is treated as 1 (no repetition).
If 0 is defined, the corresponding A&E message is not generated at
all.
Generation inter- Define the intervals at which alarms are generated repeatedly. The 500
vals unit is [ms]. The intervals can be defined in the range from 0 to
1800000 (30 minutes).(*2)If the generation interval is omitted, it is
treated as 1000 (1 second).
*1: Can be set when EventType is a condition event.
TIP For generating A&E messages acquired via the OPC A&E server require the professional knowledge on OPC
A&E server interface.
l Delay Time Line

Specify a time period during which simulation alarms are not generated during A&E mes-
sage (simulation alarms) generation processing.
The definition syntax and meaning of each item are explained below.
Syntax: Delay, time period

Example: Delay, 300
The unit is [ms]. It can be specified in the range from 0 to 1800000 (30 minutes). (*1) If the
delay time is omitted, it is treated as 1000 (1 second).
l Loop Start Lines

The start of processing loops A&E message (simulation alarm) generate is defined in these
lines.
The definition syntax and meaning of each item are explained below.
Syntax: Loop, number of loop executions, loop execution time intervals

Example: Loop, 2, 300
For the number of loop executions, define how many times a loop is repeated. The valid
range is from 0 to 500. If the number of loop executions is omitted, it is treated as 1 (no repe-
titions).
If 0 is defined, the corresponding A&E message is not generated at all.

For the loop execution time interval, define the interval of loop repetitions. The unit is [ms].
The interval can be specified in the range from 0 to 1800000 (30 minutes)(*1)If the loop exe-
cution time interval is omitted, it is treated as 1000 (1 second).
l Loop End Lines

The end of processing loops A&E message (simulation alarm) generate is defined in these
lines.
Syntax: LoopEnd

B1.6.6 Functions of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

(Function Check Mode)
The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, which is used in the Function Check, is able to simu-
late the operation and monitoring environment where CAMS for HIS actually runs and perform
the same processing operations. However, there are certain functions and operations unique
to the Function Check, which are explained in this section.
n External Appearance of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

(Function Check Mode)
The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) uniformly uses red for the
background color of title of each pane, so that it is easily distinguished from the actually run-
ning Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
n Specifications of the Message Monitor of CAMS of HIS (Function

Check Mode)
The database of CAMS for HIS used in the Function Check is completely independent from
the databases running on the actual machines. Even when the Function Check is performed
while running the actual machines, the A&E messages (simulation alarms) will never affect
the operations of CAMS for HIS in Normal mode (where the actual operation is being execu-
ted) or HIS. The specifications of Function Check mode are as follows:
• No audible sound for the simulated A&E messages (simulation alarms).
• Do not show the simulated A&E messages (simulation alarms) on System Message ban-
ner of HIS.
• Do not blink the icons of simulated A&E messages (simulation alarms) on System Mes-
sage banner of HIS.
• The LED on the operation keyboard are not affected by the simulated A&E messages
(simulation alarms).
• Pressing ACK key on the operation keyboard will not acknowledge the simulated A&E
messages (simulation alarms).
• Faceplate view and tuning view will not change to alarm status for the simulated A&E
messages (simulation alarms).
• Related items in graphic view will not change to alarm status for the simulated A&E mes-
sages (simulation alarms).
• The icons of the related windows in the Browser bar will not indicate alarm status for the
simulated A&E messages (simulation alarms).
• Acknowledging the simulated A&E messages (simulation alarms) will not affect the alarm
status on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• Simulated Shelving and Suppression performed during function check on Message Moni-
tor of CAMS for HIS will not affect the actual shelving and suppression of the A&E mes-
sages on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
• If you edit and save a text file on the Guidance tab of the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS in Function Check mode, the edited text will not be reflected in the Message Monitor
of CAMS for HIS in Normal mode.
• The simulations performed on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS during function check
will not be recorded as the historical operation records.
• The simulated the A&E messages (simulation alarms) will not be printed out.

l Different from Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Normal mode)

The menu items on the menu bar of Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS at Function Check
mode and at Normal mode are slightly different.
At Function Check mode, an additional menu item [Suppression...] is available on the [Tool]
menu of Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS. This menu item can be used to call the Sup-
press/Unsuppress dialog box for functional check.
SEE
ALSO For more information about Suppression in the Function Check mode, refer to:
“l Suppression in the Function Check Mode” on page B1-111

B1.6.7 Starting and Exiting the Message Monitor of CAMS

for HIS (Function Check Mode)
This section explains how to start and exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function
Check mode) in the Function Check.
n How to Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check
Mode)
Only one Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) can be started for each
HIS from Alarm Generator. However, the procedure of starting the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS (Function Check mode) also varies depending on how Alarm Generator is started.
The procedure of starting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) is
explained below.
l When Alarm Generator is Started from Configurator of CAMS for HIS

1. Select [Alarm Control] - [Run...] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click
the [Run.../ Pause] button in the toolbar.
The Choose user dialog box appears.
Choose user
User TESTUSER
OFFUSER
ONUSER
ENGUSER
PROG
TESTUSER
OK Cancel
Figure B1.6.7-1 Choose User Dialog Box
2. In the Choose user dialog box, select the privilege level of the users of the Message Mon-
itor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) and click [OK].
Start the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) with the selected
user.
TIP It is possible to select another User when restarting the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check
mode).
l When Alarm Generator is Started from the Start Menu

Select [Alarm Control] - [Run...] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the
[Run.../ Pause] button in the toolbar.
The Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) is started with User corre-
sponding to the HIS security settings of the HIS that performs the Function Check.
l Starting Multiple Message Monitors of CAMS for HIS (Function Check

Mode)
It is not allowed to start multiple Message Monitors of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).
n How to Exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check
Mode)
In the following, it is explained how to exit the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function
Check mode).

• Select the [Close] button of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check
mode).
• From the menu bar of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode), se-
lect [File] - [Exit].
• Select the [Close] button of Alarm Generator.

B1.6.8 Execution of Function Check

The Function Check is used to generate A&E messages (simulation alarms) with Alarm Gen-
erator and simulate how A&E messages are acquired, displayed and processed in the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).
Tasks performed in the Function Check are explained below.
• Scenario format check
• Generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms)
• Verification of A&E message display and processing
• Reflection of changes
This section explains the tasks involved in the Function Check and the execution procedure.
n Scenario Format Check

This task is performed in Alarm Generator.
It is performed to verify that there are no contradictions or errors in the conditions defined in
the Scenario Details Pane with respect to the scenario format. The scenario format is verified
in the following cases.
• When [Alarm Control] - [Check format] are selected from the menu bar of Alarm Genera-
tor
• When the [Check format] button in the toolbar is clicked
• When A&E messages (simulation alarms) are generated from Alarm Generator
If any errors are detected, the error information is displayed in the “Errors/Progress Pane.”
The generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms) is stopped if starting to generate the
A&E messages (simulation alarms).
n Generation of A&E Messages (Simulation Alarms)

This task is performed in Alarm Generator.
l Execution
This task generates A&E messages (simulation alarms) according to the conditions defined in
the Scenario Details Pane.
Select [Alarm Control] - [Run...] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the
[Run.../ Pause] button in the toolbar.
TIP This function is invalid if the [Run...] processing has already been started.
l Step Execution
This task generates A&E messages (simulation alarms) line by line according to the condi-
tions defined in the Scenario Details Pane. If step execution is resumed after messages have
been generated until the last line of a scenario, the step execution is continued by returning to
the start line of the scenario. If execution is switched to [Run...] during step execution, genera-
tion is started from the line immediately following the currently highlighted line in the Scenario
Details Pane.
From the menu bar of Alarm Generator, select [Alarm Control] - [Run a step]. Alternatively,
click the [Run a step] button in the toolbar.

TIP This function is invalid if the [Run...] processing has already been started.
l Stop
This function stops generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms).
Select [Alarm Control] - [Stop] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the
[Stop] button in the toolbar.
TIP This function is valid during [Run...], [Pause] or [Run a step] processing.
l Pause
This function pauses generation of A&E messages (simulation alarms). Select [Alarm Control]
- [Pause] from the menu bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the [Run.../ Pause] button
in the toolbar.
If [Run...] or [Run a step] is resumed, generation is started from the line immediately following
the line currently highlighted in the Scenario Details Pane.
TIP This function is valid during [Run...] processing and is invalid during [Run a step] execution.
l Operations when No Scenario Data Exists

If it is attempted to execute [Run...] when there is no scenario data, the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) without displaying any A&E messages (simulation
alarms) starts.
n Verification of Display and Processing of A&E Messages

This task is performed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode).
It simulates display and processing of A&E messages in the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS (Function Check mode). The operations that can be performed in the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) are basically the same as those performed in the Mes-
sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Normal mode). However, Suppression operations are different
between the Normal mode and the Function Check mode. The Suppression operations in the
Function Check mode are explained below.
l Suppression in the Function Check Mode

The procedure of Suppression operations is shown below. The start and release operations of
Suppression are the same.
1. Choose [Tool] - [Suppression...] from the menu bar on the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS (Function Check mode).
The Suppress/Unsuppress dialog box appears.
Suppress/Unsuppress
Suppress Unsuppress OK
Group Name | Cancel
Figure B1.6.8-1 Suppress/Unsuppress Dialog Box in the Function Check Mode
2. Enter the alarm group name for which suppression is started or released (suppress or un-
suppress) in [Group Name].
3. Check either the [Suppress] or [Unsuppress] radio button and click the [OK] button.
4. Check the Suppression operations in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function
Check mode).

n Reflecting Changes
This task is performed either in Configurator of CAMS for HIS or Alarm Generator.
This task reflects the changes/modifications made during simulating display and processing of
A&E messages in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode) to the envi-
ronment where CAMS for HIS actually runs. Note that the method of reflecting changes to the
Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Normal mode) depends on how Alarm Generator is star-
ted.
TIP During function check, if the current HIS user logs out and another HIS user logs in, the changes performed
during function check cannot be committed due the inconsistent user.
In the following, it is explained how to reflect changes/modifications made during the Function
Check.
l Method of Reflecting Changes from Configurator

When Alarm Generator is started from Configurator of CAMS for HIS, reflect changes in the
following manner.
1. Select [File] - [Commit change] from the menu bar on the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS (Function Check mode) to save the settings for the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS (Function Check mode). Alternatively, click the [Commit change] button in the toolbar.
2. When the Function Check is completed, select [File] - [Commit change] from the menu
bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the [Commit change] button in the toolbar.
It is not necessary to close Alarm Generator and the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check mode) afterward.
3. Select [Program] - [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] - [Configurator of CAMS for HIS] from the
[Start] menu to start Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
4. Perform a download operation from Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
5. Log on to the HIS as the same user who performed the Function Check.
6. Open the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Normal mode).
The settings changed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode)
become valid in the actual operation environment as well.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to download from Configurator of CAMS for HIS, refer to:
l Reflecting Changes Directly to the Actual Operating Environment

When Alarm Generator is started from the Start menu, the changes are reflected in the follow-
ing way.
1. Select [File] - [Commit change] from the menu bar on the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS (Function Check mode) to save the settings for the Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS (Function Check mode). Alternatively, click the [Commit change] button in the toolbar.
2. When the Function Check is completed, select [File] - [Commit change] from the menu
bar of Alarm Generator. Alternatively, click the [Commit change] button in the toolbar.
It is not necessary to close Alarm Generator and the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
(Function Check mode) afterward.
3. Open the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Normal mode).
The settings changed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function Check mode)
become valid in the actual operation environment as well.

B1.6.9 Messages Displayed During the Function Check

This section explains messages displayed in relation to the Function Check.
n Messages Related to Alarm Generator

The following messages may be displayed in relation to Alarm Generator.
Table B1.6.9-1 Messages Displayed at Start

Message Cause Action
Already started. Cannot start con- It is attempted to start another Start only one Alarm Generator for
currently. Alarm Generator when Alarm Gen- each HIS.
erator is already running.
If the terminal services are used,
the Alarm Generator may already
be used by other sessions.
The list cannot be displayed be- There are errors in the scenario’s Check the scenario’s management
cause some scenario files contain management information line. information line.
illegal data.
The number of scenario files ex- The number of scenarios saved in Save up to 100 scenarios in this
ceeds the limit. Only the latest 100 (CENTUM VP Installed Folder) folder.
files are listed. \CAMS\ScenarioFiles exceeds Decrease the number of scenarios
100. by deleting existing scenarios or
moving scenarios to other folders.
Table B1.6.9-2 Messages Displayed at Closing

Any changes of the setting of After changing settings in the Mes- Refer to “● Operations to Close
CAMS message monitor will be sage Monitor of CAMS for HIS Alarm Generator without Reflect-
lost if exit without commit the (Function Check mode), it is at- ing Changes” in “■ How to Exit
changes. Do you want to commit tempted to close Alarm Generator Alarm Generator” in B1.6.3, “Start-
the changes? without reflecting the changes. ing and Exiting Alarm Generator.”
Alarm generator can not exit when Exiting Alarm Generator while the De-energize the simulated A&E
sending alarm! simulated A&E messages (simula- messages (simulation alarms) first
tion alarms) is energized. and then exit.
You cannot delete files in function Files in the Function Check envi- Delete them manually.
check environment. ronment cannot be deleted.
Any changes of the setting of It is attempted to close Alarm Gen- Refer to “■ Procedure of Scenario
CAMS message monitor will be erator without saving newly cre- Creation” in B1.6.5, “Creation of
lost if exit without commit the ated/edited scenarios. Scenarios.”
changes. Do you want to commit
the changes?
Table B1.6.9-3 Messages Displayed at Opening a Scenario

Cannot find the specified scenario A scenario displayed in the Sce- Check that the corresponding file
file. Check if the scenario file has nario Files Pane is not found. is saved in (CENTUM VP Installed
been deleted. The corresponding file may have Folder)\CAMS\ScenarioFiles.
been deleted manually after start-
ing Alarm Generator.
Failed to open the scenario There are errors in the scenario’s Check the scenario’s management
file.Check the file format and file management information line. information line.
version.
A scenario file is limited to 300 The scenario script contains 300 A scenario file should not contain
lines (empty lines and comment lines. more than 300 lines.
text lines are included.)

Table B1.6.9-4 Messages Displayed at Saving Scenarios
The number of scenario files ex- The number of scenarios saved in Save up to 100 scenarios in this
ceeds the limit. Do you want to de- (CENTUM VP Installed Folder) folder.
lete the existing files? \CAMS\ScenarioFiles exceeds Decrease the number of scenarios
100. by deleting existing scenarios or
moving scenarios to other folders.
Enter the scenario name. No scenario name is entered. Enter the scenario name.
The scenario file name cannot Illegal characters are included in Enter the scenario name again.
contain any of the following illegal the scenario name.
characters: ? / \ * < > : “ |.
Enter [Comment]. The [Comment] was not entered in Enter a comment.
the dialog box for saving scenar-
ios.
The comment text should be no The number of characters entered The [Comment] must be entered
more than 64 characters. in the [Comment] field in the dialog as a character string of up to 64
box for saving scenarios exceeds single-byte characters.
64.
Failed to save the file. The file cannot be saved. The log- Check the user privilege level.
in HIS user does not have the op- Check also whether the scenario
eration authority. has already been opened or is
read only.
The file already exists. Replace Although it is attempted to save Continue processing as is to over-
the existing file? the file under another name, there write the file. Otherwise, change
is a possibility that an existing file the file name and save the file.
name was entered in [Scenario] in
the dialog box for saving scenar-
ios.
Table B1.6.9-5 Messages Displayed at Scenario Format Check

A scenario file is limited to 300 The number of lines in a scenario Check the definitions in the sce-
lines (empty lines and comment exceeds 300. Only the first 300 nario.
text lines are included.) lines are displayed in the Scenario
Details Pane.
Unknown identifier. A type of alarm that does not
match the alarm type selected
when creating a new scenario may
have been specified in the scenar-
io.
The identifier of the loop to be The loop start (Loop)/end (Loop-
ended does not match the identifi- End) statements written in a sce-
er of the started loop. nario do not comprise a valid pair.
The Number of Repeating is be- The number of generations written
yond the limit. in the alarm lines of a scenario is
invalid.
The interval of periodic execution The delay time written in the alarm
and the offset delay time should lines of a scenario is invalid.
be an integer between 0 and
1800000.
Illegal tag name. The tag name written in the alarm
lines of a scenario is invalid.
Illegal alarm name. The alarm name written in the
alarm lines of a scenario is invalid.
(Error: {2} is not applicable.) You This message is displayed when
should use {3} after defining {3} an error is found in the scenario
with an integer that greater than format check.
{0} but less than {1}.

Table B1.6.9-6 Messages Displayed when Reflecting Changes
The file you want to download has Another user has reflected Continue processing as is only in
been modified by another user. changes to the target file before case to overwrite the file.
Continue? you do.
Current HIS user is not the same HIS changed user after starting HIS should not change user during
user when Design Check is star- Function check, this is not the user Function check.
ted. Commit operation failed. started the Function Check.
Failed to commit the changes. Changes made in the Message Check the system configuration of
Monitor of CAMS for HIS (Function CAMS for HIS and the system op-
Check mode) cannot be downloa- eration status.
ded to the actual operation envi-
ronment.
Table B1.6.9-7 Messages Displayed when Generating A&E messages (Simulation Alarms)
CAMS Server started in function This message notifies the start of
check mode. the CAMS for HIS server for the -
Function Check.
CAMS Message Monitor started in This message notifies the start of
function check mode. the Message Monitor of CAMS for -
HIS for the Function Check.
Failed to start the CAMS server in The database for the Function Check that a valid database exists
function check mode. Check has not been created. in the actual operation environ-
ment, from which data required to
Failed to start the CAMS Message set up the Function Check envi-
Monitor in function check mode. ronment will be copied. After-
wards, generate A&E messages
(simulation alarms) again.
Failed to send simulation alarms. A&E messages (simulation Check the operation status of the
Do you want to continue? alarms) cannot be generated. CAMS for HIS server for the Func-
tion Check in the Errors/Progress
pane of Alarm Generator.
Start sending simulation alarms. These messages notify generation
of A&E messages (simulation
Start sending simulation alarm by alarms).
steps.
Sending simulation alarms com- -
pleted.
Stop sending simulation alarms.
Pause sending simulation alarms.

Blank Page
<B2. CAMS for HIS Engineering Setting Items> B2-1
B2. CAMS for HIS Engineering Setting

Items
The following is a list of items that can be set by the four CAMS for HIS builders, the nine tabs
in the Option window of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, and other windows.

<B2.1 CAMS for HIS Builders Setting Items> B2-2
B2.1 CAMS for HIS Builders Setting Items

Lists of items set by the four CAMS for HIS builders are shown below.
n List of CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder Setting Items

The CAMS for HIS Alarm builder setting items are shown in the table below.
Table B2.1-1 CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder Setting Items (1/4)
Item Default value Set value
Source None The following items are shown depending on the type of
alarm:
CENTUM process alarms (other than annunciator alarms)
: Tag name.alarm status
CENTUM process alarms (annunciator alarms [when a
tag name has been set by the user])
: Tag name.ALM
CENTUM process alarms (annunciator alarms [when tag
name is not set by the user])
: %ANnnnnSddss01.ALM
nnnn: Element number
dd: Domain number
ss: Station number
Example: %AN0001S010501.ALM
CENTUM Operator guide message
: Station name + space + %OGnnnn
nnnn: Element number
Example: FCS0101 %OG0001
CENTUM system alarms
: Message number
OPC alarms
: Input source name(*1)
Path on hierarchy on Hierarchical position on the navigation pane, to which an
List path which alarm source be- alarm source belongs, is displayed in path format. The de-
longs limiter is “:” (single-byte colon).
Model (*2) None The instrument model of the selected tag is shown.
Unit (*2) None The engineering unit of the selected tag is shown.
Tag Comment (*2) None The tag comment of the selected tag is shown.
*1: If a hierarchy below [OPC] is displayed, the input specifications for Source attribute are as follows:
• Only single-byte characters can be input and double-byte characters cannot be used. The maximum number of characters
is 500.
• If alarm sources are duplicated at the same hierarchy, an error occurs. An error does not occur if alarm sources are dupli-
cated across different hierarchies.
*2: Not shown in the Setting item display area if a hierarchy below [OPC] is displayed.
In the case of process alarms, one of the following is shown accord-
ing to the defined alarm priority:
High-priority alarm: High
The value of
Alarm Priority - Medium-priority alarm: Medium
Source Engineer-
original (*1) Low-priority alarm: Low
ing is shown.
Logging alarm: Logging
Reference alarm: Reference
In the case of alarms other than process alarms, (NONE) is shown.

For process alarms
whose alarm
source is not a
SCS, the value of
alarm priority
(Source Engineer-
ing) is shown. Select a desired alarm priority for each alarm from among Critical,
Alarm Priority - For alarms whose High, Medium, Low, Logging, and Reference.
modified (*1) alarm source is a For alarms from SCS, [Alarm Priority - modified] is set to "Critical"
SCS, the default when "High" is selected for [Alarm Priority - original].
value of CAMS for
HIS is shown.
Blank for alarms
other than process
alarms or alarms of
other projects.
In the case of process alarms, the color corresponding to each bit in
The value of
Tag Mark Color the alarm processing table specified for the tag is shown.
Source Engineer-
- original (*1) (NONE) is displayed for alarms other than process alarms or alarms
ing is shown.
for other projects.
Select a desired tag mark color from among the 16 colors that are
specifiable on the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
In the case of process alarms, the tag mark color set in this attribute
Tag Mark Color
(NONE) is reflected in the operation and monitoring function.
- modified (*1)
In the case of alarms other than process alarms, this attribute is dis-
played in the cell, but the tag mark color is not reflected on the opera-
tion and monitoring function. It is not possible to set this attribute.
Select whether or not to detect occurrence and recovery for each
alarm source from Enable and Disable.
Detection Enable
• Enable: Detect occurrence and recovery of alarms
• Disable: Suppress occurrence and recovery of alarms
User (NONE) Select a target user or one of user groups for each alarm source.
Select a desired purpose of alarm for each alarm source, from the fol-
lowing:
Purpose (NONE) • Safety
• Environment
• Financial
Select from the following a desired degree of consequence expected
when any alarm for the purpose selected in Purpose is ignored:
• VeryLarge: There are risks of danger or loss.
Consequence (NONE)
• Large: There are some risks of danger or loss.
• Medium: Implausible risks
• Small: Negligible risks
*1: Not shown in the Setting item display area if a hierarchy below [OPC] is displayed.
Select a desired time allowed before responding, from the following:
Time-to-re- • Urgent
(NONE)
spond • Quick
• Routine

Enter reference and other related information in text format. The
items described here are displayed in the Details pane of Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS. Up to 250 single-byte characters can be
entered, including line feeds. However, a line feed is counted as two
characters. To enter a line feed in the Alarm List Settings window,
press the [Shift] key and [Enter] key together.
When an URL is entered instead of plain text, it is displayed as hy-
Guidance (NONE) perlink text in the Details pane, making it possible to connect to the
link destination. When the file name (.txt) is entered, the content of
the applicable file can be displayed and edited. Even if the applicable
file is not prepared, text data can directly be entered and edited in the
Details pane. (*1)
Up to 10.000 patterns of guidance strings can be defined. If you de-
fine more strings, an error dialog box appears when you try to save
them in the builder. In this case, delete low priority guidance strings.
If an inactive alarm is received when the alarm has already been ac-
knowledged, whether the alarm should be automatically cleared is
selected from (NONE), Enable, and Disable.
Auto Clear(*2) (NONE) • (NONE): Either Enable or Disable is set depending on the alarm
type.
• Enable: Alarm is automatically cleared.
• Disable: Alarm is not automatically cleared.
Monitoring De- Select users excluded from monitoring rights for an alarm from de-
(NONE)
nied User (*2) fined users (multiple selections allowed).
Monitoring De-
Select user groups excluded from monitoring rights for an alarm from
nied User (NONE)
defined user groups (multiple selections allowed).
Group (*2)
Acknowledge-
Select users excluded from Acknowledgement rights for an alarm
ment Denied (NONE)
from defined users (multiple selection allowed).
User (*2)
Acknowledge-
ment Denied Select user groups excluded from Acknowledgement rights for an
(NONE)
User Group alarm from defined user groups (multiple selections allowed).
(*2)
Manual Reset
Select users that are permitted to manually reset an alarm from de-
Permitted User (NONE)
fined users (multiple selections allowed).
(*2)
Manual Reset
Select user groups that are permitted to manually reset an alarm
Permitted User (NONE)
from defined user groups (multiple selections allowed).
Group (*2)
Manual Reset
Select users that are excluded from manual reset rights for an alarm
Denied User (NONE)
from defined users (multiple selections allowed).
(*2)
Manual Reset
Select user groups that are excluded from manual reset rights for an
Denied User (NONE)
alarm from defined user groups (multiple selections allowed).
Group (*2)
Select alarm groups to which an alarm belongs from the alarm
Alarm Group (NONE)
groups created using the Alarm Group Builder.
*1: To enter and edit text data, specific settings are required for such operations.
*2: The attribute of the A&E message other than the process alarm message or the operation guide message can be displayed in
the cell but the attribute cannot be changed.

Select whether or not to perform shelving for each alarm source
• (NONE): Either Enable or Disable is set depending on the alarm
type.
• Enable: Can be shelved.
Shelving (NONE) • Disable: Cannot be shelved.
If “Disable” is set, all shelving operations including Auto Shelf cannot
be performed.
If this attribute for already shelved alarms is changed from “Enable”
to “Disable,” the alarms are automatically taken out from the shelves.
Alarm Setpoint
(NONE) Displays the low limit of the alarm setpoint (master) in quantity.
- low limit
Alarm Setpoint
(NONE) Displays the high limit of the alarm setpoint (master) in quantity.
- high limit
Alarm sources sup-
porting alarm set- Sets alarm setpoint master value. Writable only to the alarm sources
point management: under the Alarm Setpoint Management.
Alarm Setpoint Blank (*1) Display in quantity: Up to 7 digits including sing and decimal point.
- master Alarm sources ex- Display in percentage: Up to 7 digits including sing and decimal point
cluded from alarm and then affixed with %. The entry range for alarm high or low limit is
setpoint manage- ±100 %, varies with alarm sources.
ment: (N/A)
In case of the OtherProject:
Specify ID under the project specified in the Multiple Project Connec-
tion Function Builder.
(Example) P1
If an HIS receives an alarm occurred from another project, process-
ing of various attributes and operation restrictions set for the alarm
are performed by referencing the project ID and the project identities
included in the received message.
Under multiple-project environment, the operations of HIS are limited
to the followings if a project ID is not correctly set.
ProjectID (NONE)
The following functions are disabled if a project ID is not correctly set
for the sources of nodes under [CENTUM/OtherProject].
• Auto Clear
• Monitoring rejection rights
• Acknowledgement rejection right
• Manual reset permission rejection rights
• Alarm group
In case of except the OtherProject
Project ID attributes cannot be entered for sources of nodes other
than OtherProject. Importing is also disabled.
For a single user-defined attribute, up to 10,000 values can be de-
fined. If you define more values, an error dialog box appears when
User-defined
(NONE) you try to save them in the builder. In this case, correct the defini-
Attribute
tions, for example, so as to match setting values of low priority attrib-
utes with the values of other attributes.
*1: Indicates that alarm setpoint values are not defined.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the settings for inputting and editing text data, refer to:
For more information about alarm sources supporting alarm setpoint management, refer to:
“n Target Alarm Sources of Alarm Setpoint Management” on page B2-37
n List of CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder Setting Items

The CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder setting items are shown in the table below. Up to 200
alarm groups can be defined for a system.

Table B2.1-5 CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder Setting Items
Item Default Set value
value
Specify an alarm group name. You can enter up to 20 single-byte
characters. However, two single-byte tilde (~) characters cannot be
used at the beginning of the name. Do not enter the following names
Alarm Group Name Blank to avoid duplicate names. If entered, CAMS for HIS may not operate
properly.
• Station names (FCS0101, etc.)
• User group names (DEFGRP, etc.)
Select whether to [Enable] or [Disable] the function to permit simulta-
neous change of alarm statuses in a group.
Disa-
• Enable: When acknowledgment or manual reset is performed on an
Apply to All ble
alarm, all alarms in the alarm group will be acknowledged or man-
(*1)
ually reset.
• Disable: The above operation does not occur.
(NON Select a user (or multiple users) from the created users that will not be
Monitoring Denied User
E) authorized for monitoring an alarm.
Monitoring Denied User (NON Select a user group (or multiple user groups) from the created user
Group E) groups that will not be authorized for monitoring an alarm.
Acknowledgement Denied (NON Select a user (or multiple users) from the created users that will not be
User E) authorized for acknowledging an alarm.
Acknowledgement Denied (NON Select a user group (or multiple user groups) from the created user
User Group E) groups that will not be authorized for acknowledging an alarm.
Manual Reset Permitted (NON Select a user (or multiple users) from the created users that will be au-
User E) thorized for manually resetting an alarm.
Manual Reset Permitted (NON Select a user group (or multiple user groups) from the created user
User Group E) groups that will be authorized for manually resetting an alarm.
(NON Select a user (or multiple users) from the created users that will not be
Manual Reset Denied User
E) authorized for manually resetting an alarm.
Manual Reset Denied User (NON Select a user group (or multiple user groups) from the created user
Group E) groups that will not be authorized for manually resetting an alarm.
Alarm Group Sub-State (NON Select a user (or multiple users) from the created users that will be au-
Change Permitted User E) thorized for suppressing an alarm.
Alarm Group Sub-State
(NON Select a user group (or multiple user groups) from the created user
Change Permitted User
E) groups that will be authorized for suppressing an alarm.
Group
Alarm Group Sub-State (NON Select a user (or multiple users) from the created users that will not be
Change Denied User E) authorized for suppressing an alarm.
Alarm Group Sub-State
(NON Select a user group (or multiple user groups) from the created user
Change Denied User
E) groups that will not be authorized for suppressing an alarm.
Group
*1: In the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder of a version earlier than R5.03.20, this is set to [Enable] by default. When the
CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder of a version earlier than R5.03.20 has been used without changing this setting (left to the
default setting), this setting remains [Enable] after you upgrade the system to a later version and import the engineering data.
n List of CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder Setting Items

The CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder setting items are shown in the table below. Up to 16 shelves
can be defined for a system.
Table B2.1-6 CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder Setting Items

Shelf Name Blank Specify a shelf name. You can enter up to 50 single-byte characters.
Provide a description of the shelf. You can enter up to 50 single-byte
Description (NONE)
characters.

Specify a file name to be used as an icon of the shelf.
Icon Shelf.ico You can select an icon using a system-specific path only. <CENTUM VP
Installed folder>\eng\Icon\Builder\CAMS
Select the type of shelving from the following:
• Continuous
Shelving Type Continuous • One-Shot
• Auto
[Auto] can be specified for only one shelf.
Select the type of shelving duration from the following:
Type of Shelving
Duration • Duration: Elapsed time
Duration
• Specify Time: Specified time
Shelving Dura- Specify the duration to permit the shelving state. Input a desired numeric
tion (Hours) / value directly.
0
Specify Time The settable values vary depending on the [type of Shelving Duration]
(Hour) specified above.
Shelving Dura-
Specify the duration to permit the shelving state. Input a desired numeric
tion (Minutes) /
30 value directly. The settable values vary depending on the [type of Shelv-
Specify Time
ing Duration] specified above.
(Minute)
Select the extent of shelving from the following:
• System: Shelving operations affect the entire system.
• User: Shelving operations affect the same user.
Extent of Shelv-
System Take note that the setting of extent of shelving can be modified only in
ing
the first line. It cannot be modified in the second line onward.
The item set in the first line will be set in the second and subsequent
lines.
If the extent of shelving is [System], select a user-defined user (or users)
who will be permitted to perform shelving.
If the extent of shelving is [User], this item cannot be set.
Shelving Permit-
(NONE) Take note that although the setting made when the extent of shelving
ted User
was [System] will be retained after the extent of shelving is changed to
[User], this setting will become effective only when the extent of shelving
is [System].
n List of CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder Setting

Items
The CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder setting items are shown in the table
below.
The setting items of this builder are applied when the HIS is logged on or the Message Moni-
tor of CAMS for HIS is restarted after downloaded to HISs.
Table B2.1-7 CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder Setting Items (Common Items)
Item Default value Explanation
User names registered in the Security Builder and user names defined in
User name None
the CAMS for HIS engineering database of this builder are displayed.
User groups defined for user names registered in the Security Builder are
User group Blank
displayed.
Table B2.1-8 CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder Setting Items (Window)
Select one of the following to specify whether or not to permit the operator
Change Lay- to change the layout of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS:
Deny
out • Allow: Permit change.
• Deny: Do not permit change.

to change the text color and background color of the Message Monitor of
Change Color Deny CAMS for HIS:
• Allow: Permit change.
Select one of the following to specify whether or not to show the menu bar
in the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Normal mode
• Show Always: Always show the bar.
Menu Bar Show Always
• Hide Always: Hide the bar.
(The menu items themselves cannot be customized. The menu bar is al-
ways shown in the Configuration mode.)
Select one of the following to specify whether or not to show the toolbar in
the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the Normal mode:
• Show Always: Always show the bar.
Tool Bar Show Always
(Even when the tool bar is shown, users cannot select those menu items
they have no authority to execute.)
Select one of the following to specify whether or not to show the Shelves
pane:
Shelving Pane Show Always • Show Always: Always show the pane.
• Switch Show/Hide: Whether to show or hide the pane can be switched.
• Hide Always: Hide the pane.
Select one of the following to specify whether or not to show the Filter
pane:
Filter Pane Show Always • Show Always: Always show the pane.
Select one of the following to specify whether or not to show the A&E
Browser pane:
A&E Browser
Show Always • Show Always: Always show the pane.
Pane
Select one of the following to specify whether or not to show the Details
pane:
Switch Show/
Details Pane • Show Always: Always show the pane.
Hide
Select one of the following to specify whether or not to use the Dynamic Fil-
Dynamic Filter ter pane:
Auto Show
Pane • Auto Show: The pane is shown automatically.
Select one of the following to specify whether or not to show the status bar:
Status Bar Show Always • Show Always: Always show the bar.
Table B2.1-9 CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder Setting Items (Shelves pane)
Change Blink- to change the ON/OFF setting for icon blinking:
Deny
ing • Allow: Permit change.
Change Dis-
to change the displayed content of alarm number information:
played Num- Deny
ber of Alarms
Change Un-
to change the bold display applied when unread:
read Alarm Deny
Style

to change the font:
Change Font Deny
to change the button color and button text color:
Change Color Deny
Table B2.1-10 CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder Setting Items (Filters pane)
to create additional filters:
Create Filter Deny
Change Blink- to change the ON/OFF setting for icon blinking:
Deny
ing • Allow: Permit change.
Change Dis-
to change the displayed content of alarm number information:
played Num- Deny
ber of Alarms
Change Un-
to change the bold display applied when unread:
read Message Deny
Style
Change Font
to change the font on the All Filters tab sheet:
on All Filters Deny
Tab
Change Font
to change the font on the Favorites tab sheet:
on Favorites Deny
Tab
Change Height
to change the height of buttons on the Favorites tab sheet:
of Button on Deny
Favorites Tab
Change Color
to change the text color and background color on the Favorites tab sheet:
on Favorites Deny
Tab
Change Filter to change filter names:
Deny
Name • Allow: Permit change.
Change Filter to change filter icons:
Deny
Icon • Allow: Permit change.
Change De- to change explanations of filters:
Deny
scription • Allow: Permit change.

Select one of the following to specify whether or not to use the Load Shed-
Use Load ding function:
Deny
Shedding • Allow: Permit change.
Table B2.1-11 CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder Setting Items (A&E Browser pane)
Change Back- to change the background pattern in the A&E Browser pane:
Deny
ground Pattern • Allow: Permit change.
to change the text color and background color in the A&E Browser pane:
Change Color Deny
to change the blinking ON/OFF setting for icons at the beginning of A&E
Change Blink-
Deny messages:
ing
to change the font in the A&E Browser pane:
Change Font Deny
Change Line to change the height of one line in the A&E Browser pane:
Deny
Spacing • Allow: Permit change.
Change Col- to change the columns and their order in the A&E Browser pane:
Deny
umn • Allow: Permit change.
Change Col- to change the column width in the A&E Browser pane:
Deny
umn Width • Allow: Permit change.
Select one of the following to specify whether a new alarm should be dis-
Display Posi-
played at the top or bottom in the A&E Browser pane:
tion of New Top
• Top
Alarm
• Bottom
Table B2.1-12 CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder Setting Items (A&E Messages pane)
Item Default val- Explanation
ue
Select one of the following to specify whether or not to permit the operator to
Change Back- change the background pattern in the A&E Messages pane:
Deny
ground Pattern • Allow: Permit change.
change the text color and background color in the A&E Messages pane:
Change Color Deny
change the blinking ON/OFF setting for icons at the beginning of A&E mes-
Change Blink-
Deny sages:
ing

Item Default val- Explanation
ue
change the font in the A&E Messages pane:
Change Font Deny
Change Line change the height of one line in the A&E Messages pane:
Deny
Spacing • Allow: Permit change.
Change Un-
change the bold display applied when unread:
read Message Deny
Style
Change Col- change the columns and their order in the A&E Messages pane:
Deny
umn • Allow: Permit change.
Change Col- change the column width in the A&E Messages pane:
Deny
umn Width • Allow: Permit change.
Select one of the following to specify whether a new alarm should be dis-
Display Posi-
played at the top or bottom in the A&E Browser pane:
tion of New Top
• Top
Alarm
• Bottom

<B2.2 Items Set in the Option Window Tabs> B2-12
B2.2 Items Set in the Option Window Tabs

List of items set in four of the nine tabs in the Option window of the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS are shown below.
n List of Items Set in the Shelves Pane Tab

The items set in the Shelves Pane tab in the Option window are shown in the table below.
Table B2.2-1 Items Set in the Shelving Pane Tab

Icon Blinking Set whether to blink the icons of the unacknowledged messages.
ON The icon blinks.
OFF The icon does not blink.
Number of Active Set to show or hide the number of active A&E messages.
Alarms
Show Shows the number of active A&E messages.
Hide Hides the number of active A&E messages.
Number of Unac- Set to show or hide the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
knowledged
Alarms Show Shows the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
Hide Hides the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
Total Number of Set to show or hide the total number of A&E messages.
Alarms
Show Shows the total number of A&E messages.
Hide Hides the total number of A&E messages.
Number of Ignor- Set whether to show or hide the number of timeout A&E messages in the shelf.
ed Alarms
Show Shows the timeout A&E messages.
Hide Hides the timeout A&E messages.
Emphases on Un- Set whether or not to show the shelf name, shelf description, number of A&E messages
read Alarms and pre-determined timeout period in bold if an unread A&E message is present.
ON The text is shown in bold if any unread A&E message is present in the selec-
ted shelf.
OFF The text is not shown in bold even if any unread A&E message is present in
the selected shelf.
Font Set the font and font size of the shelf name, shelf description, number of alarms and
pre-determined timeout period.
Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set Font dialog box and set the font and font size.
Height Set the height of a Shelf.
Text Color Text Color on the Shelves
Background Color Background Color on the Shelves
Text Color (Selec- Text Color on the Shelves (Selected)
ted)
Background Color Background Color on the Shelves (Selected)
(Selected)
n List of Items Set in the Filters Pane Tab

The items set in the Filters Pane tab in the Option window are shown in the table below.

Table B2.2-2 Items Set in the Filters Pane Tab
Icon Blinking Set whether to blink the icons of the unacknowledged messages.
ON The icon blinks.
OFF The icon does not blink.
Number of Ac- Set to show or hide the number of active A&E messages.
tive Alarms
Show Shows the number of active A&E messages.
Hide Hides the number of active A&E messages.
Number of Un- Set to show or hide the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
acknowledged
Alarms Show Shows the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
Hide Hides the number of unacknowledged A&E messages.
Total Number Set to show or hide the total number of A&E messages.
of Alarms
Show Shows the total number of A&E messages.
Hide Hides the total number of A&E messages.
Emphases on Set whether or not to show the filter name, filter description and number of A&E messages
Unread in bold if an unread A&E message is present.
Alarms
ON The text is shown in bold if any unread A&E message is present in the se-
lected filter.
OFF The text is not shown in bold even if any unread A&E message is present in
the selected filter.
Image of Dy- Set the icon(s) shown in the Filter pane when new Filter criteria are built in the Dynamic
namic Filter Filter pane and registered in the Filter pane.
All Filters Tab Font Set the font and the font size of the filter name, filter description and number
of A&E messages.
Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set Font dialog box and set the font and
the font size.
Text Color Text Color of button on the Filters (Selected)
(Selected)
Background Background Color of button on the Filters (Selected)
Color (Selec-
ted)
Favorites Tab Height of Fil- Set the height of Filter.
ter
Font Set the font and the font size of the filter name, filter description and number
of A&E messages.
Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set Font dialog box and set the font and
the font size.
Text Color Text Color of button on the Filters
Background Background Color of button on the Filters
Color
Text Color Text Color of button on the Filters (Selected)
(Selected)
Background Background Color of button on the Filters (Selected)
Color (Selec-
ted)
Load Shed- Filter Name Set the Filter name used for Load Shedding. The filters that use Batch ID as
ding Rules criterion are not subject to Load Shedding.
Reference Set the interval for counting the number of occurring A&E messages to de-
Time (Sec) termine the start of Load Shedding.
Number of Set the threshold number of the occurring A&E messages to determine the
Alarms start of Load Shedding.

n List of Items Set in the A&E Browser Pane Tab

The items set in the A&E Browser Pane tab in the Option window are shown in the table be-
low.
Table B2.2-3 List of Items Set in the A&E Browser Pane Tab
Background Pattern Set the background pattern in the A&E Browser Pane.
Stand- The A&E Browser pane is shown with a monotone background.
ard
Zebra The A&E Browser pane is shown with a zebra-stripe background.
Pattern
Icon Blinking Set whether or not to cause the icons at the beginning of A&E messages in the A&E
Browser Pane to blink.
ON The icons at the beginning of the A&E messages blink.
OFF The icons at the beginning of the A&E messages do not blink.
Font Set the font to be used in the A&E Browser pane.
Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set Font dialog box and set the font and font
size you like.
Space between the Set the height of one line in the A&E Browser pane.
Lines
Filter Rules Specify the filter conditions to be applied to the messages shown in the A&E Brows-
er pane.
Displayed Columns Set the alarm attributes you want to show in the A&E Browser pane and the order of
attributes. Set from the Select Columns dialog box.
Text Color 1 Set the text color of unselected rows in the A&E Browser pane with the background
pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pattern], the
text color of the two zebra colors of unselected rows.
Background Color 1 Set the background color of unselected rows in the A&E Browser pane with the
background pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra
Pattern], the background color of the two zebra colors of unselected rows.
Text Color 1 (Selec- Set the text color of the selected rows in the A&E Browser pane with the back-
ted) ground pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pat-
tern], the text color of the two zebra colors of selected rows.
Background Color 1 Set the background color of the selected rows in the A&E Browser pane with the
(Selected) background pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra
Pattern], the background color of the two zebra colors of selected rows.
Text Color 2 Set the text color in the other background color than the ‘Background color 1’ of un-
selected rows in the A&E Browser pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra
Pattern].
Background Color 2 Set the other background color of the zebra ‘Background color 1’ of unselected rows
in the A&E Browser pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].
Text Color 2 (Selec- Set the text color in the other background color than the ‘Background color 1’ of the
ted) selected rows in the A&E Browser pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra
Pattern].
Background Color 2 Set the other background color of the zebra ‘Background color 1’ of the selected
(Selected) rows in the A&E Browser pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].
l List of Message Attributes Displayed in the Select Columns Dialog Box

The attributes of messages displayed in the Select Columns dialog box are shown in the table
below.

Table B2.2-4 Message Attributes Displayed in the Select Columns Dialog Box(1/2)
Attribute Description Data Description Remarks
Type
Timestamp Message time- Time <Example> 2008/03/23 10:00:05 (*1) Automatically
stamp (Unit: added to the
Millisecond) A&E mes-
sage.
Time- CAMS for HIS Time <Example> 2008/03/23 10:00:09(*1)
stamp.Serv- Message Re-
er ceived time-
stamp (Unit:
Millisecond)
Message Message Text String <Example> FCS0101 LEFT Fail (SW STOP
Code= 0000 0000 0000 0000)
Mes- Buzzer Number Value 0 (Representation: No buzzer)
sage.Buzzer (1Byte) 1 (Representation: Reconfirmation)
2 (Representation: Operation error)
3 (Representation: Operator guide)
4 (Representation: Process alarm (High-priority
alarm))
5 (Representation: Process alarm (Medium-priority
alarm))
6 (Representation: Process alarm (low-priority
alarm))
7 (Representation: System alarm)
8 (Representation: Recover)
MessageNo CENTUM VP String <Example> 11
Message Num-
ber
TypeOfA- Alarm Type String System (Representation: CENTUM VP system
larm alarm message)
Process (Representation: CENTUM VP process
alarm message)
Guidance (Representation: CENTUM VP opera-
tion guide messages)
Asset (Device alarm sent from PRM)
Source Event Source String See the table of “Alarm Attributes – [Source] on
Select Columns Dialog Box.
Source.Plan Plant hierarchy String <Example> FCS0101Δ%DR0003S010101
t of the source Δ: Space Character
where the event The OPC server computer name will be displayed
was initiated for the messages from the OPC A&E server.
(The hierar-
chies in the
CENTUM VP
project only)
YHIS.PjtID Project ID String <Example> P1
YHIS.Batch- Batch ID String <Example> 01-0007
BatchID
TagName CENTUM VP String Tag Name:
Tag Tag Name column will be empty for the A&E mes-
Name(Process sage that does not have tag name.
alarm message
only)When con-
nected with
STARDOM, this
is also the con-
verted SIOS de-
vice tag name
for accessing
OPC server.
*1: The value in milliseconds can be found in Details pane.

Table B2.2-5 Message Attributes Displayed in the Select Columns Dialog Box (2/2)
Attribute Description Data Description Remarks
Type
PV(Current Current PV value String Displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for Automatically
Value) of the function HIS in Normal mode. The engineering unit symbol added to the
block is included. This attribute remains blank in Config- A&E mes-
uration mode, Function Check mode, and in the sage.
Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS .
<Example> 3.9ΔM3/H
Δ: Space character
ALRM(Cur- Current alarm String Displayed in the Message Monitor of CAMS for
rent Value) status of the HIS in Normal mode. It also shows the alarm sta-
alarm tus of annunciator messages with data and an-
nunciator messages generated by SCS of Pro-
Safe-RS. This attribute remains blank in Configu-
ration mode, Function Check mode, and in the
Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS .
<Example> LL
DeviceID Device ID String According to PRM specifications. This will be
added to de-
vice alarms
sent from the
PRM.
AlarmPriori- Alarm Priority String Critical Defined on
ty High each builder
Medium for CAMS for
Low HIS.
Logging(*1) If undefined,
it may revert
to the original
value of the
A&E mes-
sage before
normaliza-
tion.
User HIS User Securi- String User name or user group name Defined on
ty CAMS for
HIS Alarm
Purpose Purpose of the String Safety builder. If un-
A&E message Environment defined, will
Financial be blank.
Conse- Predicted conse- String Very Large
quence quence in case Large
the A&E mes- Medium
sage is ignored Small
Time-to-re- Reaction for the String Urgent
spond alarm Quick
Routine
Guidance Cause and solu- String String Text File name(*2)
tion regarding Check Device/Check Tag(*3)
the A&E mes-
sage
Shelving Shelving attrib- String Enable
ute Disable
Alarm Alarm group that String Alarm group name defined on Alarm Group build- Defined on
Group the A&E mes- er for CAMS for HIS the Alarm
sage belongs to Group builder
for CAMS for
HIS. If unde-
fined, it will
not belong to
any alarm
group.

*1: If the attribute of an alarm message is Logging, this message will not be displayed on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS.
*2: In the case that Text File is specified for [Guidance] on the Style Settings dialog box for defining styles
*3: The operation guide messages from PRM
Table B2.2-6 Message Attributes [Source] Displayed in the Select Columns Dialog Box
Connected Alarm Type Display Display Sample
System
CENTUM Process alarm Tag name affixed with alarm status after a dot FIC100.HI
VP message
System alarm CENTUM VP message number 303
message
Operation guide Station name affixed with the operation guid- FCS0101Δ%OG0003
messages ance element number after a space character Δ: Space character
Device alarm None -
message
PRM Process alarm None -
message
System alarm None -
message
Operation guide None -
messages
Device alarm In case of device event message: Device tag EJAS-02
message name
In case of diagnostic message: Device tag EJAS-02
name
In case of PAS event message: FIC100A
Event source such as FCS number or device Process Tag PV=12.34
tag, otherwise, PRM (PRM server computer KNM3/HLO Still
name).
STARDOM Process alarm SIOS device tag affixed with alarm status after FIC001.OOP
message a dot
POU instance name affixed with alarm status Main.NPAS_PID_1.OOP
after a dot
Application SIOS device tag affixed with alarm name after FIC001.OOP
alarm message, a dot
event message
POU instance name affixed with alarm status Main.NPAS_PID_1.OOP
after a dot
System alarm FCN/FCJ IP address
message, event
message
OPC A&E server OPC A&E server computer name or FCN/FCJ
error IP address
n List of Items Set in the A&E Messages Pane Tab

The items set in the A&E Messages Pane tab in the Option window are shown in the table
below.
Table B2.2-7 Items Set in the A&E Messages Pane Tab

Background Pattern Set the background pattern in the A&E Messages Pane.
Standard The A&E Messages pane is shown with a monotone background.
Zebra Pat- The A&E Messages Pane is shown with a zebra-stripe background.
tern

Icon Blinking Set whether or not to cause the icons at the beginning of A&E messages in the A&E
Messages Pane to blink.
ON The icons at the beginning of the A&E messages blink.
OFF The icons at the beginning of the A&E messages do not blink.
Emphases on Unread Set whether or not to apply bold display when any unread A&E message is present.
Alarms
ON The text is shown in bold if any unread A&E message is present.
OFF The text is not shown in bold even if any unread A&E message is
present.
Font Set the font to be used in the A&E Messages pane.
Click [Modify] to open the Windows Set Font dialog box and set the font and the font
size you like.
Space between the Set the height of one line in the A&E Messages pane.
Lines
Displayed Columns Set the alarm attributes to show and their order in the A&E Messages pane when
(Filter) you select a Filter. Set from the Select Columns dialog box.
Displayed Columns Set the alarm attributes to show and their order in the A&E Messages pane when
(Shelf) you select a Shelf. Set from the Select Columns dialog box.
Text Color 1 Set the text color of unselected rows in the A&E Messages pane with the back-
ground pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pat-
tern], the text color of the two zebra colors of unselected rows.
Background Color 1 Set the background color of unselected rows in the A&E Messages pane with the
background pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra
Pattern], the background color of the two zebra colors of unselected rows.
Text Color 1 (Selec- Set the text color of the selected rows in the A&E Messages pane with the back-
ted) ground pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra Pat-
tern], the text color of the two zebra colors of selected rows.
Background Color 1 Set the background color of the selected rows in the A&E Messages pane with the
(Selected) background pattern set to [Standard]. Or if the background pattern is set to [Zebra
Pattern], the background color of the two zebra colors of selected rows.
Text Color 2 Set the text color in the other background color than the ‘Background color 1’ of un-
selected rows in the A&E Messages pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra
Pattern].
Background Color 2 Set the other background color of the zebra ‘Background color 1’ of unselected rows
in the A&E Messages pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].
Text Color 2 (Selec- Set the text color in the other background color than the ‘Background color 1’ of the
ted) selected rows in the A&E Messages pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra
Pattern].
Background Color 2 Set the other background color of the zebra ‘Background color 1’ of the selected
(Selected) rows in the A&E Messages pane with the background pattern set to [Zebra Pattern].

<B2.3 Consolidated Alarm Engineering for CENTUM Process Alarms> B2-19
B2.3 Consolidated Alarm Engineering for

CENTUM Process Alarms
The following explains the details of consolidated alarm engineering for CENTUM process
alarms as well as the relationship with how these alarms are displayed in CAMS for HIS.
The table below shows the relationship between consolidated alarm engineering and action
on HIS.
Table B2.3-1 Concept of Alarm Engineering

Consolidated alarm engi-
Action on HIS
neering
Source Engineer- Alarm message
ing management
(Alarm Priority (Message Moni-
Builder – Alarm Setting of Setting of tor of CAMS for Output device Output device
priority defini- Detection AlarmPriority HIS, System Mes- (printer) (buzzer)
tion) sage Banner,
CAMS for HIS
historical viewer)
The buzzer rum-
Follow the output Follow the output bles if the alarm
specification of specification of priority in Source
the Alarm Priority the Alarm Priority Engineering is
Builder corre- Builder corre- High, Medium or
Unsetting
sponding to the sponding to the Low. The buzzer
alarm priority in alarm priority in does not rumble if
High-priority Source Engineer- Source Engineer- the alarm priority
alarm ing. ing. is Logging or Ref-
Medium-priority Enable erence.
alarm
Critical Same as High. Same as High. Same as High.
Low-priority alarm
Logging warning High Follow the output
Reference warn- specification of The buzzer rum-
ing Medium Displayed.
the Alarm Priority bles.
Low Builder corre-
sponding to the
Logging Not displayed. Alarm Priority set- The buzzer does
Reference (*1) ting. not rumble.
Not displayed. The buzzer does

Disable (User-defined) Not output.
(*2) not rumble.
*1: If AlarmPriority = Logging, the alarm is logged in the CAMS for HIS historical file. If AlarmPriority = Reference, the alarm is
not logged in the CAMS for HIS historical file.
*2: If Detection = Disable, the alarm message is not displayed in the CAMS for HIS Historical Viewer, but logged in the CAMS for
HIS historical file. In the case of a Reference warning, however, the alarm message is not logged in the CAMS for HIS histori-
cal file, either.
n Concept of AlarmPriority and Detection

For the AlarmPriority setting, the alarm priority defined for the function block is overwritten by
the alarm priority for each alarm status which is defined by CAMS for HIS builder. How the
alarm action will be on the HIS after the overwrite varies depending on the output destination.
The following three specifications are followed.
• Follow the specification of CAMS for HIS (Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, System
Message Banner, faceplate, CAMS for HIS historical file)
• Follow the Alarm Priority Table of CENTUM VP (printer)
• Follow the HIS Setup Window of CENTUM VP (buzzer)
For the Detection setting, on the other hand, setting Detection = Disable suppresses output
on the HIS regardless of the alarm priority of the tag or AlarmPriority setting for each alarm.

n AlarmPriority Setting
The following explains the relationship of AlarmPriority setting and operation display.
l Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, System Message Banner

• AlarmPriority is not set
The actions take place according to the setting in the Alarm Priority Builder.
• AlarmPriority is set
The following actions take place according to the AlarmPriority setting.
• Critical/High/Medium/Low: An alarm message is displayed.
• Logging/Reference: An alarm message is not displayed.
• AlarmPriority is changed while alarms are present
The change is also reflected in the alarm messages already displayed on the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS or System Message Banner.
l Alarm Status Display on Faceplate

If a single alarm occurs, alarm status display follows the actions specified below.
The status of the generated alarm is displayed.
• Critical/High/Medium/Low: The status of the generated alarm is displayed.
• Logging Reference: The specific action varies depending on the [Priority=Logging/
Reference] setting in the CAMS for HIS tab sheet of the Project Property dialog.
If “Display CAMS for HIS alarm status” is selected, the status of the generated alarm
is not displayed.
If “Display FCS alarm status” is selected, the status of the generated alarm is dis-
played.
The change is also reflected in the alarm statuses already displayed.
If multiple alarms occurred, the alarm display priorities change depending on the AlarmPriority
setting.
The representative alarm is displayed according to the default display priorities for the
tag.
The representative alarm is displayed according to the display priorities that reflect the
AlarmPriority setting.
An action example is shown below.
Example:
Define FIC100 (continuous control block, PID) based on Alarm Processing Level 2
(Medium-priority alarm).
When both an FIC100.HI alarm and an FIC100.DV+ alarm are present:

Alarms generating from FIC100 all become Medium alarms. The alarm display pri-
orities are as follows.
OOP > IOP > IOP- > HH > LL > HI > LO > DV+ > DV- > VEL+ > VEL- > MHI >
MLO > CNF
The alarm status on the faceplate is HI.
• When FIC100.HI and FIC100.LO are set to Low AlarmPriority
The alarm priorities of FIC100.HI and FIC100.LO change to Low and the alarm
display priorities change as follows.
OOP > IOP > IOP- > HH > LL > DV+ > DV- > VEL+ > VEL- > MHI > MLO > CNF >
HI > LO
The alarm status on the faceplate is DV+.
In addition, whether or not to reflect the actions of CAMS for HIS in the alarm status display,
tag mark color and tag mark blinking display on the faceplate can be specified. This specifica-
tion is set by the [Priority=Logging/Reference] setting in the CAMS for HIS tab sheet of the
Project Property dialog.
SEE
ALSO For more information about setting by the [Priority=Logging/Reference] in the CAMS for HIS tab sheet of the
Project Property dialog box, refer to:
B1.1, “Alarm Actions and Other Configurations” on page B1-2
l Buzzer Sound
The buzzer sound at alarm occurrence is changed. The AlarmPriority setting as well as tone
number and type (continuous sound/notification sound) defined in the HIS Setup window
(Buzzer tab sheet) are applied to the buzzer sound, as follows.
The actions take place according to the setting in the HIS Setup window (Buzzer tab
sheet).
• Critical: Follow the Critical-priority alarm setting in the HIS Setup window.
• High: Follow the High-priority alarm setting in the HIS Setup window.
• Medium: Follow the Medium-priority alarm setting in the HIS Setup window.
• Low: Follow the Low-priority alarm setting in the HIS Setup window.
• Logging/Reference: The buzzer does not rumble.
• AlarmPriority is changed while the buzzer is rumbling
The currently rumbling buzzer sound is not affected. The change will be reflected in
alarms that occur after the change.
l Printer Output
The printer output action at alarm occurrence is changed. The following actions are applied
according to the AlarmPriority setting and whether printer output is enabled or disabled as de-
fined in the Alarm Priority Builder.
• Critical: Follow the High-priority alarm-PRT setting of the Alarm Priority Builder.

• High: Follow the High-priority alarm-PRT setting of the Alarm Priority Builder.
• Medium: Follow the Medium-priority alarm-PRT setting of the Alarm Priority Builder.
• Low: Follow the Low-priority alarm-PRT setting of the Alarm Priority Builder.
• Logging: Follow the Logging warning-PRT setting of the Alarm Priority Builder.
• Reference: Follow the Reference warning-PRT setting of the Alarm Priority Builder.
The change will be reflected in alarm messages that occur after the change.
l CAMS for HIS Historical File

Output to the CAMS for HIS historical file follows the actions specified below.
• Critical/High/Medium/Low: An alarm message is output.
• Logging: An event message is output.
• Reference: Not logged.
The change will be reflected in alarm messages that occur after the change.
l FCS Alarm Display Blinking Operation

Alarm display blinking operation (Lock type, Non-lock type, Self-acknowledge type) of the
FCS is not affected by the AlarmPriority setting.
Example:
Since the default alarm display blinking operation for Medium-priority alarm is Lock
type, blinking will continue until a confirmation operation is performed by the operator,
even after the alarm returns to normal (NR).
Even when AlarmPriority for FIC100.HI is set to Low, the display blinking operation
that takes place when an FIC100.HI alarm occurs remains Lock type (it will not change
to the alarm display blinking operation for Low-priority alarm (default: Non-lock type)
defined in the Alarm Priority Builder).
l FCS Repeated Warning Alarm

The repeated warning alarm action of the FCS is not affected by the AlarmPriority setting.
Example:
(High-priority alarm).
Even if AlarmPriority for FIC100.HI is set to Medium, a repeated warning alarm will
generate when an FIC100.HI alarm occurs as long as the repeated warning alarm for
High-priority alarm is enabled in the Alarm Priority Builder.
l Alarm Action when NR Returns

The action of the FCS that takes place when NR returns is not affected by the AlarmPriority
setting.
Example:

Define FIC100 (PID Controller Block) based on Alarm Processing Level 1 (High-priori-
ty alarm).
Even if AlarmPriority for FIC100.HI is set to Medium, NR starts blinking when NR re-
turns as long as the action when NR returns is set to “Lock Type” for High-priority
alarm in the Alarm Priority Builder.
l FCS ALRM Data Items

The ALRM data items in function blocks referenced by FCS applications are not affected by
the AlarmPriority setting. Although the alarm status on the faceplate reflects the changes of
alarm display priorities, the ALRM data items referenced by SEBOL, etc., are maintained by
the alarm processing function of each function block.
Example:
Define FIC100 (continuous control block, PID) based on alarm processing level 2 (Me-
dium alarm).
FIC100.ALRM is judged HI regardless of the AlarmPriority setting for each alarm in the
applicable function block.
l Tag Mark Shapes

Tag mark shapes can be changed for display according to the combination of alarm priority
and tag priority.
To enable this feature, select the [Change the shape of tag marks and alarm marks for each
alarm priority] check box on the Detailed Setting tab of the project properties. By default, this
check box is clear.
SEE
ALSO For more information about tag mark shapes, refer to:
"■ Tag Mark - Status Display Area" in 2.1, “Components of Instrument Faceplate” in the Human Interface
Stations Reference Vol. 2 (IM 33K03F22-50E)
For more information about the Detailed Setting tab of the project properties, refer to:
"■ Detailed Setting of Project" in 2.2, "Creating a New Project" in the Engineering Reference Vol.1 (IM
33K03G21-50E)
n Detection Setting
The Detection setting specifies whether to enable or disable the alarm message notification
action to the operator. If Detection = Disable, notification to the operator is suppressed. The
Detection = Disable setting is given priority over the alarm priority defined by Source Engi-
neering or AlarmPriority set by consolidated engineering.
The following explains the relationship of Detection setting and actions on HIS.
l Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, System Message Banner

• When Detection = Enable
An alarm message is displayed according to the alarm priority defined by Source Engi-
neering and AlarmPriority set by consolidated engineering.
• When Detection = Disable
An alarm message is not displayed.
• When Detection is changed while alarms are present
The change is also reflected in the alarm messages already displayed on the Message
Monitor of CAMS for HIS or System Message Banner.

l Alarm Status Display on Faceplate

If a single alarm occurs, alarm status display follows the actions specified below.
• When Detection = Enable or not set
An alarm status is displayed according to the alarm priority defined by Source Engineer-
ing and AlarmPriority set by consolidated engineering.
The specific action varies depending on the [Detection=Disable] setting in the CAMS for
HIS tab sheet of the Project Property dialog.
• If “Display CAMS for HIS alarm status” is selected, the status of the generated alarm
is not displayed. NR is displayed.
• If “Display FCS alarm status” is selected, the status of the generated alarm is dis-
played.
If multiple alarms occurred, the alarm priorities change depending on the Detection setting.
A representative alarm is displayed according to the alarm priority defined by Source En-
gineering and AlarmPriority set by consolidated engineering.
The specific action varies depending on the [Detection=Disable] setting in the CAMS for
HIS tab sheet of the Project Property dialog.
• If “Display CAMS for HIS alarm status” is selected, alarms whose detection is set to
Disable are ignored and a representative alarm is displayed.
• If “Display FCS alarm status” is selected, a representative alarm is displayed by re-
flecting the alarms that occurred.
The change is reflected in the alarm status display on the faceplate.
Example:
When both an FIC100.HI alarm and an FIC100.DV+ alarm are present :
• When Detection = Disable for FIC100.HI
HI alarms are not detected and the alarm status on the faceplate becomes DV
+.
• When Detection = Disable for both FIC100.HI and FIC100.DV+
The alarm status on the faceplate becomes NR.
In addition, whether or not to reflect the actions of CAMS for HIS in the alarm status display,
tag mark color and tag mark blinking display on the faceplate can be specified. This specifica-
tion is set by the [Detection=Disable] setting in the CAMS for HIS tab sheet of the Project
Property dialog.
SEE
ALSO For more information about setting by the [Detection=Disable] in the CAMS for HIS tab sheet of the Project
Property dialog box, refer to:
B1.1, “Alarm Actions and Other Configurations” on page B1-2
l Buzzer Sound
Buzzer sound corresponding to the alarm priority rumbles according to the alarm priority
defined by Source Engineering and AlarmPriority set by consolidated engineering.

The buzzer does not rumble while an alarm is present.
• When Detection is changed while the buzzer is rumbling
The currently rumbling buzzer sound is not affected. The change will be reflected in
alarms that occur after the change.
l Printer Output
Printer output action corresponding to the alarm priority is performed according to the
alarm priority defined by Source Engineering and AlarmPriority set by consolidated engi-
neering.
Printer output is not performed while an alarm is present.
The change will be reflected in alarms that occur after the change.
l CAMS for HIS Historical File

Output to the CAMS for HIS historical file follows the actions specified below.
Output action corresponding to the alarm priority is performed according to the alarm pri-
ority defined by Source Engineering and AlarmPriority set by consolidated engineering.
Output is performed if the alarm priority defined by Source Engineering is other than Ref-
erence. However, alarms whose Detection is set to Disable are not displayed in the
CAMS for HIS Historical Viewer. Output is not performed if the alarm priority defined by
Source Engineering is Reference.
The change will be reflected in alarms that occur after the change.
l FCS Alarm Detection Function

The alarm detection function of the FCS is not affected by the Detection setting. Although the
CAMS for HIS suppresses alarm display when Detection = Disable, the alarm detection func-
tion and alarm notification function of each function block continue to operate regardless of
the Detection setting. Similarly, alarm detection specification (AF) and alarming off specifica-
tion (AOF) relating to process alarms continue to operate regardless of Detection.
l FCS ALRM Data Items

The ALRM data items in function blocks referenced by FCS applications are not affected by
the Detection setting. Although the alarm status on the faceplate reflects the changes of alarm
display priorities, the ALRM data items referenced by SEBOL, etc., are maintained by the
alarm processing function of each function block.
Example:
FIC100.ALRM is judged HI regardless of the Detection setting for each alarm in the
applicable function block.

n Customization of Tag Mark Color

Tag mark colors are normally specified by selecting a color corresponding to each bit position
of the alarm status for each alarm processing level number using the Alarm Processing Table
Builder. Since this method applies the same definitions to all tags of the same alarm process-
ing level number, customization of each tag requires settings to be assigned using user-defin-
able alarm processing level numbers 5 to 16.
In tag mark color engineering using CAMS for HIS, the tag mark color defined for each alarm
status of the tag is overwritten by the color specified by CAMS for HIS. The settable colors are
the same as the colors selectable in the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
n Setting of Shelving Attribute

Specify whether alarms can be shelved or not for each alarm source. For R4.03 and later, it is
possible to define explicitly if a specific alarm can be shelved or not in the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS. The default is “(NONE)” (not specified).
If the attribute is not set, the following operations are performed.
• SIS messages cannot be shelved if registries on the HIS side are customized regardless
of the engineering data. Definitions made using the CAMS for HIS Builders are ignored.
• The Shelving attribute of SIS messages can be set to default with an option of the CAMS
for HIS Shelf builder. If the definition of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder is “(NONE),” the
specification made in the Shelf Builder is applied. The default setting on the Shelf Builder
side is “Disable.”
• Messages other than SIS are enabled when the definition of CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
is "(NONE)" and shelving of those messages can be performed.
n Examples of Alarm Actions Corresponding to the Defined Alarm

Priorities
Settings using CAMS for HIS and corresponding operation watch behaviors are illustrated us-
ing examples. The conditions when each item is set and not set are compared for the follow-
ing patterns.
• Change the alarm priority: Change Low-priority alarm to Medium-priority alarm (Alarm-
Priority = Medium).
• Change the alarm priority: Change Medium-priority alarm to High-priority alarm (Alarm-
Priority = High).
• Change the alarm priority: Change Medium-priority alarm to Logging warning (AlarmPrior-
ity = Logging).
• Change the alarm priority: Change Logging warning to Low-priority alarm (AlarmPriority =
Low).
• Change the alarm priority: Change Reference warning to Medium-priority alarm (Alarm-
Priority = Medium).
• Change the alarm priority: Change Low-priority alarm to Reference warning (AlarmPriority
= Reference).
• Change the alarm detection: Change Detection to Disable.
In the following explanation, the definitions of each alarm priority set by the Alarm Priority
Builder (CRT, PRT, historical file, alarm action, action when NR returns) are assumed to be
the default settings in the System View. Tag mark colors are not set.

l Change the Alarm Priority: Change Low-priority Alarm to Medium-priority

Alarm
A display example of setting AlarmPriority = Medium for a tag for which Low-priority alarm
was initially defined by Source Engineering is shown below.
Table B2.3-2 Change the Alarm Priority: Change Low-priority Alarm to Medium-priority Alarm
Classifica- Alarm notifica- AlarmPriority is not set AlarmPriority is changed (to Me-
tion tion at alarm oc- dium)
currence
Message Alarm message An alarm is displayed in the A&E Messages pane.
Monitor of display
CAMS for
HIS Tag mark color Displayed in the color specified by the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
Faceplate Alarm status An applicable representative alarm The alarm set to Medium has the
is displayed according to the alarm highest priority.
priorities on the FCS.
Tag mark color Displayed in the color specified by the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
Buzzer Buzzer sound at The buzzer rumbles according to The buzzer rumbles according to
sound alarm occurrence the volume, tone and sound source the volume, tone and sound source
set for Medium/Low-priority alarms set for Medium/Low-priority alarms
in the Buzzer tab sheet of the HIS in the Buzzer tab sheet of the HIS
Setup window. Setup window. (Since the setting
items for Medium-priority alarm and
Low-priority alarm are the same,
the buzzer sound is also the same.)
Printer Output destination Output to the printer set in the Printer tab sheet of the HIS Constants
of alarm message Builder and HIS Setup window.
Whether output is Output. Output.
enabled or disa- (Follow the Low-priority alarm-PRT (Follow the Medium-priority alarm-
bled setting of the Alarm Priority Build- PRT setting of the Alarm Priority
er.) Builder.)
CAMS for Logging of alarm The generated alarm information is logged.
HIS historical message
file
Repeated Repeated warning No repeated warning.
warning notification at
alarm occurrence
Alarm blink- Alarm action at According to the alarm action set in According to the alarm action set in
ing operation alarm occurrence Project Property. Project Property.
(operation upon Consolidated type: Consolidated type:
return) Alarm blinking operation encom- Alarm blinking operation encom-
passes four statuses from alarm passes four statuses from alarm
occurrence to return, until confirma- occurrence to return, until confirma-
tion operation. tion operation.
CENTUM original type: CENTUM original type:
Non-lock type Non-lock type
(Follow the alarm action for Low- (Follow the alarm action for Low-
priority alarm set by the Alarm Pri- priority alarm set by the Alarm Pri-
ority Builder.) ority Builder.)
(Not affected by the AlarmPriority
setting.)
l Change the Alarm Priority: Change Medium-priority Alarm to High-priority

Alarm
A display example of setting AlarmPriority = High for a tag for which Medium-priority alarm

Table B2.3-3 Change the Alarm Priority: Change Medium-priority Alarm to High-priority Alarm
Classifica- Alarm notifica- AlarmPriority is not set AlarmPriority is changed (to
tion tion at alarm oc- High)
currence
Message Alarm message An alarm is displayed in the A&E Messages pane.
Monitor of display
CAMS for
HIS Tag mark color Displayed in the color specified by the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
Faceplate Alarm status An applicable representative alarm The alarm set to High has the high-
is displayed according to the alarm est priority.
Tag mark color Displayed in the color specified by the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
Buzzer Buzzer sound at The buzzer rumbles according to The buzzer rumbles according to
sound alarm occurrence the volume, tone and sound source the volume, tone and sound source
set for Medium-priority alarm in the set for High-priority alarm in the
Buzzer tab sheet of the HIS Setup Buzzer tab sheet of the HIS Setup
window. window.
enabled or disa- (Follow the Medium-priority alarm- (Follow the High-priority alarm-PRT
bled PRT setting of the Alarm Priority setting of the Alarm Priority Build-
Builder.) er.)
CAMS for Logging of alarm The generated alarm information is logged.
HIS historical message
file
Repeated Repeated warning No repeated warning. No repeated warning.
warning notification at (Not affected by the AlarmPriority
alarm occurrence setting.)
return) Alarm blinking operation encom- Alarm blinking operation encom-
passes four statuses from alarm passes four statuses from alarm
occurrence to return, until confirma- occurrence to return, until confirma-
tion operation. tion operation.
CENTUM original type: CENTUM original type:
Lock type Lock type
(Follow the alarm action for Medi- (Follow the alarm action for Medi-
um-priority alarm set by the Alarm um-priority alarm set by the Alarm
Priority Builder.) Priority Builder.)
setting.)
l Change the Alarm Priority: Change Medium-priority Alarm to Logging

Warning
A display example of setting AlarmPriority = Logging for a tag for which Medium alarm was
initially defined by Source Engineering is shown below.
Table B2.3-4 Change the Alarm Priority: Change Medium-priority Alarm to Logging Warning
Classifica- Alarm notifica- AlarmPriority is not set AlarmPriority is changed (to Log-
tion tion at alarm oc- ging)
currence
Message Alarm message An alarm is displayed in the A&E Not displayed.
Monitor of display Messages pane.
CAMS for
HIS Tag mark color Displayed in the color for Medium- Not displayed.
priority alarm specified by the
Alarm Processing Table Builder.

Classifica- Alarm notifica- AlarmPriority is not set AlarmPriority is changed (to Log-
tion tion at alarm oc- ging)
currence
Faceplate Alarm status An applicable representative alarm According to the CAMS for HIS -
is displayed according to the alarm Logging/Reference setting in Proj-
priorities on the FCS. ect Property.
When “Display CAMS for HIS alarm
status” is selected:
The alarm status does not
change.If no other alarm is present,
NR is displayed.
When “Display FCS alarm status” is
selected:
An applicable representative alarm
is displayed according to the alarm
Tag mark color Displayed in the color specified by According to the CAMS for HIS -
the Alarm Processing Table Builder. Logging/Reference setting in Proj-
ect Property.
The tag mark color does not
change.
If no other alarm is present, the tag
mark is displayed in the NR color
specified by the Alarm Processing
Table Builder.
selected:
mark is displayed in the color for
Logging warning specified by the
Buzzer Buzzer sound at The buzzer rumbles according to The buzzer does not rumble.
sound alarm occurrence the volume, tone and sound source (The buzzer does not rumble for
set for Medium-priority alarm in the Logging warnings.)
Buzzer tab sheet of the HIS Setup
window.
enabled or disa- (Follow the Medium-priority alarm- (Follow the Logging warning-PRT
bled PRT setting of the Alarm Priority setting of the Alarm Priority Build-
Builder.) er.)
CAMS for Logging of alarm The generated alarm information is The generated alarm is logged as
HIS historical message logged. event information.
file
Alarm blink- Alarm action at According to the alarm action set in According to the CAMS for HIS -
ing operation alarm occurrence Project Property. Logging/Reference setting in Proj-
(operation upon Consolidated type: ect Property.
return) Alarm blinking operation encom- When “Display CAMS for HIS alarm
passes four statuses from alarm status” is selected:
occurrence to return, until confirma- No change to blinking operation.
tion operation. When “Display FCS alarm status” is
CENTUM original type: selected:
Lock type Self-acknowledge type
(Follow the alarm action for Medi- (Follow the alarm action for Log-
um-priority alarm set by the Alarm ging warning set by the Alarm Pri-
Priority Builder.) ority Builder.)

l Change the Alarm Priority: Change Logging Warning to Low-priority Alarm

A display example of setting AlarmPriority = Low for a tag for which Logging warning was ini-
tially defined by Source Engineering is shown below.
Table B2.3-5 Change the Alarm Priority: Change Logging Warning to Low-priority Alarm
Classifica- Alarm notifica- AlarmPriority is not set AlarmPriority is changed (to Low)
tion tion at alarm oc-
currence
Message Alarm message Not displayed. An alarm is displayed in the A&E
CAMS for
HIS Tag mark color Not displayed. Displayed in the color specified by
the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
Faceplate Alarm status According to the CAMS for HIS - The alarm set to Low has the high-
Logging/Reference setting in Proj- est priority.
ect Property.
If no other alarm is present, NR is
displayed.
selected:
Tag mark color According to the CAMS for HIS - Displayed in the color specified by
Logging/Reference setting in Proj- the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
ect Property.
mark is displayed in the NR color.
selected:
Displayed in the color for Logging
warning specified by the Alarm Pro-
cessing Table Builder.
Buzzer Buzzer sound at The buzzer does not rumble. The buzzer rumbles according to
sound alarm occurrence (The buzzer does not rumble for the volume, tone and sound source
Logging warnings.) set for Low-priority alarm in the
window.
enabled or disa- (Follow the Logging warning-PRT (Follow the Low-priority alarm-PRT
bled setting of the Alarm Priority Build- setting of the Alarm Priority Build-
er.) er.)
CAMS for Logging of alarm The generated alarm is logged as The generated alarm information is
HIS historical message event information. logged.
file
alarm occurrence

Classifica- Alarm notifica- AlarmPriority is not set AlarmPriority is changed (to Low)
tion tion at alarm oc-
currence
Alarm blink- Alarm action at According to the CAMS for HIS - According to the alarm action set in
ing operation alarm occurrence Logging setting in Project Property. Project Property.
(operation upon When “Display CAMS for HIS alarm Consolidated type:
return) status” is selected: Alarm blinking operation encom-
No change to blinking operation. passes four statuses from alarm
When “Display FCS alarm status” is occurrence to return, until confirma-
selected: tion operation.
Self-acknowledge type CENTUM original type:
(Follow the alarm action for Log- Self-acknowledge type
ging warning set by the Alarm Pri- (Follow the alarm action for Log-
ority Builder.) ging warning set by the Alarm Pri-
ority Builder.)
setting.)
l Change the Alarm Priority: Change Reference Warning to Medium-priority

Alarm
A display example of setting AlarmPriority = Medium for a tag for which Reference warning
Table B2.3-6 Change the Alarm Priority: Change Reference Warning to Medium-priority Alarm
currence
Message Alarm message Not displayed. An alarm is displayed in the A&E
CAMS for
HIS Tag mark color Not displayed. Displayed in the color for Medium-
priority alarm specified by the
Faceplate Alarm status According to the CAMS for HIS - The alarm set to Medium has the
Logging/Reference setting in Proj- highest priority.
ect Property.
displayed.
selected:
Tag mark color According to the CAMS for HIS - Displayed in the color specified by
Logging/Reference setting in Proj- the Alarm Processing Table Builder.
ect Property.
selected:
Buzzer Buzzer sound at The buzzer does not rumble. The buzzer rumbles according to
sound alarm occurrence (The buzzer does not rumble for the volume, tone and sound source
Reference warnings.) set for Medium-priority alarm in the
window.

currence
enabled or disa- (Follow the Reference warning- (Follow the Medium-priority alarm-
bled PRT setting of the Alarm Priority PRT setting of the Alarm Priority
Builder.) Builder.)
CAMS his- Logging of alarm Not logged. The generated alarm information is
torical file message (Follow the Reference warning-his- logged.
torical setting in the Alarm Priority
Builder.)
alarm occurrence
return) Does not illuminate. Alarm blinking operation encom-
Self-acknowledge type: passes four statuses from alarm
(Follow the alarm action for Refer- occurrence to return, until confirma-
ence warning set by the Alarm Pri- tion operation.
ority Builder.) CENTUM original type:
(Blinking operation does not Self-acknowledge type
change because the status of Ref- (Follow the alarm action for Refer-
erence warning is not displayed on ence warning set by the Alarm Pri-
the watch screen.) ority Builder.)
setting.)
l Change the Alarm Priority: Change Low-priority Alarm to Reference

Warning
A display example of setting AlarmPriority = Reference for a tag for which Low-priority alarm
Table B2.3-7 Change the Alarm Priority: Change Low-priority Alarm to Reference Warning
Classifica- Alarm notifica- AlarmPriority is not set AlarmPriority is changed (to Ref-
tion tion at alarm oc- erence)
currence
CAMS for
HIS Tag mark color Displayed in the color for Low-prior- Not displayed.
ity alarm specified by the Alarm
Processing Table Builder.

Classifica- Alarm notifica- AlarmPriority is not set AlarmPriority is changed (to Ref-
tion tion at alarm oc- erence)
currence
is displayed according to the alarm Logging/Reference setting in Proj-
priorities on the FCS. ect Property.
displayed.
selected:
Tag mark color Displayed in the color specified by According to the CAMS for HIS -
the Alarm Processing Table Builder. Logging/Reference setting in Proj-
ect Property.
selected:
sound alarm occurrence the volume, tone and sound source (The buzzer does not rumble for
set for Medium-priority alarm in the Reference warnings.)
window.
enabled or disa- (Follow the Low-priority alarm-PRT (Follow the Reference warning-
bled setting of the Alarm Priority Build- PRT setting of the Alarm Priority
er.) Builder.)
CAMS for Logging of alarm The generated alarm information is Not logged.
HIS historical message logged. (Follow the Reference warning-his-
file torical setting in the Alarm Priority
Builder.)
Alarm blink- Alarm action at According to the alarm action set in Self-acknowledge type
ing operation alarm occurrence Project Property. (Follow the alarm action for Refer-
(operation upon Consolidated type: ence warning set by the Alarm Pri-
return) Alarm blinking operation encom- ority Builder.)
passes four statuses from alarm (Blinking operation does not
occurrence to return, until confirma- change because the status of Ref-
tion operation. erence warning is not displayed on
CENTUM original type: the watch screen.)
Non-lock type
(Follow the alarm action for Low-
priority alarm set by the Alarm Pri-
ority Builder.)
l Change the Alarm Detection: Change Detection to Disable

A display example of setting Detection = Disable for HI alarm for a tag for which High-priority
alarm was initially defined by Source Engineering is shown below.

Table B2.3-8 Change the Alarm Detection: Change Detection to Disable
Classifica- Alarm notifica- Detection is not set Detection is changed (to Disable)
tion tion at HI alarm
occurrence
CAMS for
HIS Tag mark color Displayed in the color for High-pri- Not displayed.
ority alarm specified by the Alarm
is displayed according to the alarm Disable setting in Project Property.
priorities on the FCS. When “Display CAMS for HIS alarm
The alarm status does not change.
displayed.
The alarm status changes.
Tag mark color Displayed in the color for High-pri- According to the CAMS for HIS -
ority alarm specified by the Alarm Disable setting in Project Property.
Processing Table Builder. When “Display CAMS for HIS alarm
The tag mark color does not
change. If no other alarm is pres-
ent, the tag mark is displayed in the
NR color specified by the Alarm
selected:
The tag mark color changes de-
pending on the generated alarm.
sound alarm occurrence the volume, tone and sound source
set for High-priority alarm in the
window.
Printer Output destination Output to the printer set in the Not output.
of alarm message Printer tab sheet of the HIS Con-
stants Builder and HIS Setup win-
dow.
Whether output is Output. Not output.
enabled or disa- (Follow the High-priority alarm-PRT
bled setting of the Alarm Priority Build-
er.)
CAMS for Logging of alarm The generated alarm information is Logged. Not displayed in the CAMS
HIS historical message logged. for HIS Historical View.
file
Repeated Repeated warning Generates repeated warning. No repeated warning.
warning notification at (Follow the repeated warning set- (Although a repeated warning
alarm occurrence ting for High-priority alarm set by alarm is issued by the function
the Alarm Priority Builder.) block according to the repeated
warning setting for High-priority
alarm set by the Alarm Priority
Builder, CAMS for HIS does not de-
tect this alarm.)
Alarm blink- Alarm action at Lock type Lock type
ing operation alarm occurrence (Follow the alarm action for High- (Although a return message is is-
(operation upon priority alarm set by the Alarm Pri- sued by the function block accord-
return) ority Builder.) ing to the repeated warning setting
for High-priority alarm set by the
Alarm Priority Builder, CAMS for
HIS does not detect this message.)

<B2.4 Consolidated Alarm Engineering for System Alarm Messages and Operation Guide Messages>
B2-35
B2.4 Consolidated Alarm Engineering for

System Alarm Messages and Operation
Guide Messages
This section explains the details of consolidated alarm engineering for System alarm and Op-
eration guide messages as well as the relationship with action on HIS.
n System Alarm Messages, Operation Guide Messages

The table below summarizes consolidated engineering for system alarm messages and oper-
ation guide messages.
The Operation guide message received from SEBOL that contains a character string is not
included in the scope of engineering (not displayed in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder). The
Operator guide message received from SEBOL that prefixed with an operator guide message
element number is included in the scope of engineering.
Table B2.4-1 The relationship of consolidated alarm engineering and action on HIS
Consolidated alarm en-
Action on HIS
gineering
Alarm message manage-
Message ment function
type (Message Monitor of CAMS Output device Output device
Item Set value
for HIS, System Message (printer) (buzzer)
Banner, CAMS for HIS his-
torical viewer)
Unsetting Displayed. Output. The buzzer rum-
bles according to
Critical “System alarm
High message sound”
Displayed. or “Operation
AlarmPriority Medium Output regard- guide message
less of the Alarm- sound” in the HIS
Low Priority setting. Setup window(*1)
Logging Not displayed (*2) The buzzer does
System
alarms / Reference Not displayed(*3) not rumble.
Operation
Displayed in the color fixed by
guides Unsetting
Tag mark the system.
Not output.
color (Color is
The specification is invalid.
specified.)
Follow the
Follow the [AlarmPriority] set-
Enable Output. [AlarmPriority]
ting.
Detection setting.
The buzzer does
Disable Not displayed(*4) Not output.
not rumble.
*1: The buzzer may not rumble depending on the type of system alarm message (such as 04xx system status notification).
*2: Logged in the CAMS for HIS historical file.
*3: Not logged in the CAMS for HIS historical file.
HIS historical file. If AlarmPriority = Reference, however, the alarm message is not logged in the CAMS for HIS historical file,
either.
l AlarmPriority setting
Even when AlarmPriority is set to Critical, High, Medium or Low, how CAMS for HIS operates
remains the same. The AlarmPriority setting on system alarms can be used for the following
purposes:
• Use the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS to create a filter specifying AlarmPriority.

<B2.4 Consolidated Alarm Engineering for System Alarm Messages and Operation Guide Messages>
B2-36
• Set Logging or Reference to suppress display of alarms on the Message Monitor of
CAMS for HIS.
l Tag mark color setting

The setting is invalid.
l Detection setting
Just like CENTUM process alarms, you can suppress alarm messages by setting Detection to
Disable.
l Shapes of system alarm marks

The shapes of system alarm marks can be changed for display according to the alarm priority.
The following table shows the alarm priorities and their corresponding system alarm mark
shapes.
Table B2.4-2 Alarm priorities and corresponding system alarm mark shapes
Alarm priority Shape of system alarm mark
Critical
High
Medium
Low
Other than the above
To enable this feature, select the [Change the shape of tag marks and alarm marks for each
alarm priority] check box on the Detailed Setting tab of the project properties. By default, this
check box is clear.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the Detailed Setting tab of the project properties, refer to:
"■ Detailed Setting of Project" in 2.2, "Creating a New Project" in the Engineering Reference Vol.1 (IM
33K03G21-50E)

<B2.5 Alarm Setpoint Management> B2-37
B2.5 Alarm Setpoint Management

This section explains how to perform engineering operations for defining the master alarm
setpoint values on CAMS for HIS.
n Target Alarm Sources of Alarm Setpoint Management

The target alarm sources are alarm setpoint values of measurement values (PV). The table
below shows the correspondence between alarm sources and alarm setpoint values.
Table B2.5-1 Correspondence between Alarm Sources and Alarm Setpoint Values
Corresponding alarm source Alarm Setpoint
HH HH
LL LL
HI PH
LO PL
DV+ DL (*1)
DV- DL
VEL- (*2) VL
*1: When engineering the fieldbus using the FOUNDATION fieldbus faceplate blocks, the alarm setpoint value for the alarm
source [DV+] becomes [DH].
*2: Since the alarm sources [VEL+] and [VEL-] use the same alarm setpoint value, [VL], only the alarm source [VEL-] is used as
the target alarm source in alarm setpoint management with CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
Alarm setpoint values supported by the CAMS for HIS are shown below.
• In the case of FCS, GSGW, APCS
The following setpoints are supported.
Table B2.5-2 Target Alarm Sources of Alarm Setpoint Management: FCS, GSGW, APCS
Supported Alarm Setpoints
Function Block
HH LL PH PL DH DL VL
PVI ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○
PVI-DV ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
PID ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
PI-HLD ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
PID-BSW ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
ONOFF ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
ONOFF-E ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
ONOFF-G ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
ONOFF-GE ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
PID-TP ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
PD-MR ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
PI-BLEND ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
PID-STC ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
MLD-PVI ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○
MC-2 - - ○ ○ - - -
MC-2E - - ○ ○ - - -
MC-3 - - ○ ○ - - -
MC-3E - - ○ ○ - - -

Function Block
HH LL PH PL DH DL VL
RATIO ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○
BSETU-2 - ○ ○ ○ - - -
BSETU-3 - ○ ○ ○ - - -
SS-DUAL ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○ ○
DSET-PVI ○ ○ ○ ○ - - ○
SLCD - - ○ ○ - ○ -
SLPC - - ○ ○ - ○ -
SLMC - - ○ ○ - ○ -
SMST-111 - - ○ ○ - - -
SMST-121 - - ○ ○ - - -
SMRT - - ○ ○ - - -
FF-AI ○ ○ ○ ○ - - -
FF-PID ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ -
FF-RA ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ -
• In the case of UGS

Table B2.5-3 Target Alarm Sources of Alarm Setpoint Management: UGS

Function Block
HH LL PH PL DL VL
USD-I16 ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
USD-U16 ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
USD-I32 ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
USD-U32 ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
USD-F32 ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
USD-F64 ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
USR-OO ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
USR-OOG ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
USR-PIHL ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
USR-PID ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
USR-PVI ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○
USR-RTO ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○
USR-RTOR ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○
_UG* ○ ○ ○ ○ - -
• In the case of SIOS instrument tag

Table B2.5-4 Target Alarm Sources of Alarm Setpoint Management: SIOS Instrument Tag
Function Block Supported Alarm Setpoints
HH LL PH PL DL VL
SR-BSTF - ○ ○ ○ - -
SR-BSTL - ○ ○ ○ - -

Function Block Supported Alarm Setpoints
HH LL PH PL DL VL
SR-ONOF ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SR-ONOFG ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SR-PIHLD ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SR-PID ○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
SR-PVI ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○
SR-RTO ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○
SR-RTOR ○ ○ ○ ○ - ○
n Defining Master Alarm Setpoint Values

The master alarm setpoint values can be defined on the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder. Enter
the appropriate values in [Alarm Setpoint - master]. The entry format is as follows.
• Defining in Quantity Format
Enter the actual quantity value directly.
• Defining in Percentage Format
Enter the percentage of alarm setpoint value with respect to the range. Add % at the end.
If % is missing, the value is handled as an actual quantity value.
It is possible to select entry format for each alarm source. Examples of entry, for both formats,
are shown below.
Table B2.5-5 Entry Example of [Alarm Setpoint - master]

Example of entering values in quantity Example of entering values in percentage
Alarm Alarm set- Alarm set- Alarm set- Alarm set-
source Alarm set- Alarm set-
point (Low point (High point (Low point (High
point (Master) point (Master)
limit) limit) limit) limit)
PID001.H
0.0 100.0 80 0.0 100.0 70%
H
PID001.LL 0.0 100.0 10.5 0.0 100.0 20.5%
Even when the master alarm setpoint values are defined as percentage values, they are auto-
matically converted to actual quantity values when differences are detected.
l Defining on OtherProject Node

On the host side project, it is possible to define master alarm setpoint values using the Other-
Project node.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to use the OtherProject node, refer to:
“n Engineering Operations Utilizing the OtherProject Node in the Upper Project” on page B3-33
n Setting All Alarm Setpoint Values at Once on Control Station

It is possible to set [Alarm Setpoint - master] in the control station from the CAMS for HIS
Alarm builder at once. This function allows reflecting alarm setpoints (master) engineered in
the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, or alarm setpoints (master) engineered based on the differ-
ences between the master and current setpoints, etc., into the control station.
1. Select [Tool] > [Set All Alarm Setpoints] in the menu bar.
The Set All Alarm Setpoints Tool appears and all control stations within the project are
displayed.

Set All Alarm Setpoints Tool - [MYPJT]
FCS0101 Select All

FCS0102
FCS0103
FCS0104
FCS0105 Clear All
Progress
display area
Start Set All Stop Set All Close
Figure B2.5-1 Display Example of Set All Alarm Setpoints Tool
2. Select the check box for the target control station and then click the [Start Set All] button.
If you want to select all the check boxes, click the [Select All] button.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
TIP If access to the control station is restricted, that target control station cannot be selected.
3. If the selection of target control station is correct, click the [OK] button.
Setting of all alarm setpoint values is started. The progress and result are displayed in the
progress display area.

Start Set All Alarm setpoints Wed Dec 28 19:53:22 2011
Start setting alarm setpoints FCS0101 Wed Dec 28 19:53:25 2011

Alarm setpoints; 100
ERROR: Parameter Error (0x20400001) Tag Name=FIC100 Data Item Name= HH
Complete setting alarm setpoints FCS0101 Web Dec 28 19:53:28 2011

Alarm setpoints; 150
Complete setting alarm setpoints FCS0103 Wed Dec 28 19:53:31 2011

ERROR: Can not communicate with FCS0104 (3)
Abnormal end of setting alarm setpoints FCS0104 Wed Dec 28 19:53:31 2011
----- ERROR= 2WARNING = 0 -----
Start equalization HIS0164

Complete equalization HIS0164
Complete Set All Alarm setpoints Wed Dec 28 19:53:31 2011
Start Set All Stop Set All Close
Figure B2.5-2 Display Example of Setting All Alarm Setpoint Values Progress Conditions
When the [Stop Set All] button is clicked while all alarm setpoints are being set at once,
the alarm setpoints will be set for the current target control station, and then the process
of setting all setpoints will be stopped. For example, if the target control stations are
FCS0101 and FCS0103, and the [Stop Set All] button is clicked while all alarm setpoints
are being set at once for FCS0101, all alarm setpoints will be set for FCS0101, and then
the process of setting all setpoints will be stopped. Setting of all alarm setpoints will not
be performed for FCS0103.
n Reflecting Current Alarm Setpoint Values to Master Setpoints

The difference information of alarm setpoint values can be output and saved as an external
file on the HIS to be imported to CAMS for HIS Alarm builder. With this function, the current
alarm setpoint values can be reflected to the master setpoints. This is useful when mainte-
nance of alarm setpoint values is required. The following is a flowchart that outlines the oper-
ation to reflect the current alarm setpoint values to the master setpoints.

Start
Extract the differences of

alarm setpoint values.
Prepare for importing:

On the CAMS for HIS Alarm Setpoint
Save the extracted differences Difference Window
into an external file.
Import the alarm setpoint

values from the external file.
Set the imported values as the Executing importing:

master values with confirmations. On the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
Delete the external file.
End
Figure B2.5-3 Flowchart of Operations of Reflecting Current Alarm Setpoint Values to Master Set-
points

1. Output difference information in the alarm setpoint difference window and save it as an
external file.
2. Start the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
3. Select [File] > [External File] > [Importing the alarm setpoint...] from the menu bar.
The Importing the alarm setpoint dialog box appears.
Importing the alarm setpoint
External file
C:\CENTUMVP\CAMS\save\AlarmSetpoint\CAMSDeviation_PID001_ENGUSER_20110620_103708.csv Open…
Import the alarm setpoint – current to the alarm setoint – master on the Alarm Builder.
Select all Cancel all Select the target alarm source in the “Input” item. Page No. 1 /1
Alarm setpoint - Alarm setpoint - Alarm setpoint - No. of the
Input Source Unit Tag comment
master current deviation deviation
1 PID001.HH M3/H Discharge line B 90% 100.000% 10.000% 1
2 PID001.LL M3/H Discharge line B 10% 0.00000% 10.00000% 2
3 PID001.HI M3/H Discharge line B 80% 100.000% 20.000% 3
4 PID001.LO M3/H Discharge line B 30% 4
5 PID001.DV- M3/H Discharge line B 60% 100.000% 40.000% 5
6 PID001.VEL- M3/H Discharge line B -25% 100.000% 125.000% 6
Information on deviation detection

Name Contents
Date/time of deviation detection 6/20/2011 10:37:08 AM - 6/20/2011 10:37:08 AM
User of deviation detection ENGUSER
Range of deviation detection Specified Tag: PID001
Inport… Cancel
Figure B2.5-4 Display Example of Importing the Alarm Setpoint Dialog Box
4. Click the [Open...] button.

A file selection dialog box appears.

5. Select the target external file.
The external file is read. When the reading is finished, the difference information is dis-
played in the Importing the alarm setpoint dialog box and the name of path where the cor-
responding file is placed as well as the file name are displayed in the [External file] field.
The Importing the alarm setpoint dialog box displays alarm setpoint values in the format
defined in the CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder.
If there are a large number of difference information items, the page will be divided with
about 1,000 rows per page. However, difference information with the same tag name is
displayed on the same page without dividing into multiple pages. To switch between pa-
ges, enter the page number directly in [Page No.]. Alternatively, click the button to the
right side of the [Page No.] field.
6. Select the [Input] check box for the alarm source to be imported and click the [Import...]
button. If you want to select all the [Input] check boxes, click the [Select all] button.
The importing is started. If click [Select all] button, the difference information on pages
that are not displayed are also imported.
When the process is complete, [Alarm Setpoint - master] in CAMS for HIS Alarm builder
will be updated.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the operation to start the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, refer to:
“n Starting the Builder” on page B1-6
For more information about the operation to create an external file, refer to:
“n Outputting Difference Information and Saving in External File” on page A9-16

<B2.6 Effect of Modification to Project Database> B2-44
B2.6 Effect of Modification to Project Database

This section explains how changes to the engineering information made by a builder other
than the four CAMS for HIS builders affects the CAMS for HIS builders, and actions to take in
such cases.
n Relationship between the CAMS for HIS Builders and Other Builders
The relationship between the CAMS for HIS builders and other builders is explained in the ta-
ble below.
Table B2.6-1 Relationship of CAMS for HIS Builder and Other Builders
Classifica- Effect on CAMS
Change items Action to be taken in CAMS for HIS Builder
tion for HIS database
Change an alarm pri-
No None.
ority
Change an alarm pro-
No None.
cessing table
Change the plant hier-
No None.
archy
Assign an operation watch authority to the added
Add a user group Yes
user group, if necessary.
No action is required unless any engineering task
has been performed on the applicable user group
in CAMS for HIS.
Delete a user group Yes If any engineering task has been performed on the
applicable user group in CAMS for HIS, the user
Items com-
group is shown as invalid in the builder. According-
mon to the
ly, review the definitions in the applicable location.
project
Change the name of a
Yes Same as when a user group is deleted.
user group
Assign an operation watch authority to the added
Add a user No
user, if necessary.
No action is required unless any engineering task
has been performed on the applicable user in
CAMS for HIS.
Delete a user Yes If any engineering task has been performed on the
applicable user in CAMS for HIS, the user is
shown as invalid in the builder. Accordingly, review
the definitions in the applicable location.
Change the name of a
Yes Same as when a user is deleted.
user

Control def- Equipment No None.
inition
Add or delete a station Yes After adding or deleting a station to apply Sup-
(FCS, GSGW, APCS, pression, start the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group
SCS, UGS, SIOS) builder, save the builder data, and then download
it to all HISs. You must perform this task regard-
less of whether you have changed data of the
CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder.
Add a function block Yes Perform applicable alarm settings for the added
tag, if necessary.
Delete a function Yes No action is required unless any engineering task
block has been performed on the applicable function
block in CAMS for HIS.
If any engineering task has been performed on the
applicable function block in CAMS for HIS, the tag
is shown as invalid in the builder. Accordingly, re-
view the definitions in the applicable location.
Change the tag name Yes Same as when a function block is added/deleted.

Control def- Change the type of a Yes No action is required unless any engineering task
inition function block has been performed on the applicable function
block in CAMS for HIS.
If any engineering task has been performed in
CAMS for HIS for the corresponding tag of the
function block and the changed function block type
does not have the alarm item to match the corre-
sponding tag, it will be shown as invalid Tag.Alarm
on the builder. However, even if the changed func-
tion block type has the alarm item to match the
corresponding tag, the related settings may also
need to be adjusted accordingly.
Change an alarm pro- Yes If any AlarmPriority is defined for the applicable
cessing level function block in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder,
review the definition to see if it is appropriate.
Change a function re- Yes If any operation watch security is set for the appli-
striction level cable function block or alarm group including the
tag, review the setting to see if it is appropriate.
Add the definition of Yes Set applicable items for the added message, if
an annunciator mes- necessary.
sage
Delete the definition of Yes No action is required unless any engineering task
an annunciator mes- has been performed on the applicable message in
sage CAMS for HIS.
applicable message in CAMS for HIS, the mes-
sage is shown as invalid in the builder. According-
Change the definition Yes If anything is set for the applicable message in the
of an annunciator CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, review the setting to
message see if it is appropriate.
Add the definition of Yes Set applicable items for the added message, if
an operation guide necessary.
message
Delete the definition of Yes No action is required unless any engineering task
an operation guide has been performed on the applicable message in
message CAMS for HIS.
applicable message in CAMS for HIS, the mes-
sage is shown as invalid in the builder. According-
Change the definition Yes If anything is set for the applicable message in the
of an operation guide CAMS for HIS Alarm builder, review the setting to
message see if it is appropriate.
Change the upper or Yes No action is required if alarm setpoint values for
lower limit of the func- the applicable function block have not been de-
tion block fined.
If they are defined, be sure to check if the defini-
tions are appropriate.

Operation Add/delete a HIS No Use the HIS Utility to review the setting of equali-
and Moni- zation scope
toring defi-
nition Change a HIS attrib- No None. (If any filter is created using the Message
ute Monitor of CAMS for HIS, review the filter function
to see if it is appropriate.)
Change the name of No None.
the host equipment
Change the operation No Review the setting of the equalization scope to
group identifier see if it is appropriate.
Change the operation No If any filter is created using the Message Monitor
watch range of CAMS for HIS, review the filter function to see if
it is appropriate.
Change the message No None. (If any filter is created using the Message
reception/range of ex- Monitor of CAMS for HIS, review the filter function
clusion to see if it is appropriate.)
l Control Drawing Builder (Tag Definition) and CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder
• If a tag is added/deleted or attribute is changed using the Control Drawing builder, the
modified details will become effective the next time a CAMS for HIS builder is started.
• As a result of changing the tag information or reloading project information in the Control
Drawing builder, if the scale low or high limit is changed, open the CAMS for HIS Alarm
builder to check if definitions in [Alarm Setpoint - master] are appropriate. Execute the Set
All Alarm setpoints function as necessary.
l Security Builder (User/User Group Definition) and CAMS for HIS Builder
• If a user/user group is added, deleted or modified using the Security builder, the modified
details will become effective the next time a CAMS for HIS builder is started.
• If a user/user group is added or deleted in a coexistence environment where R3 HISs are
also present, save the change using a CAMS for HIS builder of either revision.
l CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder and CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder
• If a group is added or deleted using the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder, the modified
details will become effective the next time a CAMS for HIS Alarm builder is started.
• If an alarm group is deleted and saved and then an alarm group of the same name is
added in a coexistence environment where R3 HISs are also present, save the change
using the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
l System View and CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder

• If a station (FCS, SCS or SIOS) is added in the System View, the modified details will be-
come effective the next time a CAMS for HIS builder is started.
• If a station comment is modified, the change must be saved and downloaded using the
Security builder or CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder.
SEE
ALSO For more information about reloading the project information that has been modified by a CAMS for HIS build-
er, refer to:
“l Updating the Content Displayed on the Builder” on page B1-6

Blank Page
<B3. Other Engineering Operations> B3-1
B3. Other Engineering Operations

This chapter explains the following:
• CAMS for HIS virtual operation test
• Adding and deleting an HIS
• Changing Download Master
• Connecting to PRM
• Connecting to STARDOM
n CAMS for HIS Virtual Operation Test

The CENTUM VP test function provides two types of test modes: virtual test and target test.
Of the two, the virtual test environment lets you test the operation of CAMS for HIS. In addi-
tion, virtual test is performed in two modes, including the mode for testing on a single HIS and
the mode for testing on multiple HISs (expanded test function). The procedure to start opera-
tion test of CAMS for HIS in each of these modes providing a virtual test environment is ex-
plained. Take note that in this section, a user belonging to the CTM_MAINTENANCE or
CTM_MAINTENANCE_LCL group is referred to as “User with CENTUM VP Administrator
Privilege.”
IMPORTANT
• When running the virtual test, the test package with the optional features is required.
• When the system is applied with the target machines, the CAMS for HIS should not be
tested in Virtual Test environment.
On the HIS installed with control bus interface, the virtual test cannot be performed. The
virtual test can be performed on a different HIS.
l Procedure to Start Operation Test of CAMS for HIS on a Single HIS

The procedure for testing CAMS for HIS on a standalone HIS is as follows:
Step 1: Enable the CAMS for HIS function
Step 2: Start testing
More descriptions for each step are following.
• Step 1: Enable the CAMS for HIS function
Enable the CAMS for HIS function of the HIS on which virtual test will be run.
1. Log on to Windows as a user with CENTUM VP administrator privilege and start the
HIS Utility.
2. Select the [Enable CAMS for HIS] check box in the CAMS for HIS tab sheet of the
HIS Utility.
3. Select the [Set this HIS as Download Master] check box in the CAMS for HIS tab
sheet of the HIS Utility.
At this point, only the station name (computer name of current PC), station number
(0.1) and IP address (127.0.0.1) are registered in the Detailed Setting in the CAMS
for HIS tab sheet of the HIS Utility. Keep these settings unchanged.

Detailed Setting
Check the HIS for equalization
Station Name Station Number IP Address

PC0001 0.1 127.0.0.1
OK Cancel
Figure B3-1 Detailed Setting in CAMS for HIS Tab Sheet
4. Click the [OK] button in the HIS Utility.

5. Restart the PC.
• Step 2: Start testing
Once the PC has restarted, start the test function (virtual test).
1. Log on to Windows using the user name of the user who will start the operation and
2. Start the test function (virtual test) in the System View.
This completes the procedure. Now you can use CAMS for HIS in a virtual test environment.
l Procedure to Start Operation Test of CAMS for HIS on Multiple HISs

The procedure to start operation test of CAMS for HIS on multiple HISs in the same project is
explained.
Step 1: Preparation
Step 2: Enable CAMS for HIS
Step 3: Start the FCS Simulator
Step 4: Start a virtual HIS
• Step 1: Preparation
Prepare for the test which involves multiple HISs.
If the attribute of the target project to be tested is “Current Project,” change the project
attribute to “User-defined Project” or “Default Project” using the Project’s Attribution Utility.
• Step 2: Enable CAMS for HIS
Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 Environment:
In Windows Vista and Windows Server 2008 environment, Virtual HIS cannot be started
by an administrative user.
1. Logon Windows using a user account for starting the Operation and Monitoring appli-
cations.
2. Start SystemView, and choose the project for testing and then choose [HIS] – [Virtual
HIS] on System View so as to start Virtual HIS. And then, on the Windows Command
Prompt window, typing the following command to temporarily shift to an administra-
tive user account to start HIS Utility.

runas /user:(an administrative user account of CENTUM VP) (VPinstalled fol
der)\program\BKHHisUty.exe
TIP Up to this stage, there is no need to start FCS Simulator.
3. On the [CAMS for HIS] tab of HIS Utility, check the option of [Enable CAMS for HIS].
4. On the [CAMS for HIS] tab of HIS Utility, check the option box of [Set this HIS as
Download Master] and specify any of the Virtual HISs as the downloading master.
5. On the [CAMS for HIS] tab of HIS Utility, click [Detailed Setting] button so as to dis-
play the Detailed Setting dialog box.
6. On the Detailed Setting dialog box, specify the Equalization Scope of the HISs. When
doing so, the IP addresses of the HISs should be correctly confirmed.
7. Click [OK] button on HIS Utility.
8. Restart the PC.
9. Do the above settings on all the HISs.
• Step 3: Start the FCS Simulator
Start the FCS Simulator.
1. Log on to Windows using the user name of the user who will start the operation and
2. Start the System View and select the target FCS to be tested.
3. Select [Test Function] from the [FCS] menu in the System View.
The test function start confirmation dialog appears. In the example shown below, the
virtual HIS of HIS0164 starts on the applicable PC and FCS Simulator starts on the
HIS0163.
Dialog
Change Operation and Monitoring function to
virtual test mode. OK?
HIS Station: HIS0164
FCS Start Computer Name HIS0163 ...
No connect to Other PC
OK Cancel
Figure B3-2 Test Function Start Confirmation Dialog
4. In the test function start confirmation dialog, confirm that the [No connect to Other
PC] check box is not selected. If this check box is selected, unselect the check box.
Also specify [HIS station] and FCS Start Computer Name.
5. Click the [OK] button in the test function start confirmation dialog.
• Step 4: Start a virtual HIS
Start a virtual HIS on all HISs except for the one started in “Step 3.”
1. Once the PC has restarted, log on to Windows using the user name of the user who
will start the operation watch function.
2. Start the System View and select an applicable HIS.

3. Select [Virtual HIS] from the [HIS] menu in the System View. A virtual HIS will start.
4. Follow the same steps to start a virtual HIS on all HISs.
This completes the procedure. Now you can use CAMS for HIS in a virtual test environment.
n Adding and Deleting an HIS

Certain procedures must be followed when adding or deleting to/from the Equalization Scope
an HIS in which CAMS for HIS is enabled. This section explains these procedures.
Take note that in this section, a user belonging to the CTM_MAINTENANCE or CTM_MAIN-
TENANCE_LCL group is referred to as “User with CENTUM VP Administrator Privilege.”
IMPORTANT
Failure to observe the procedures explained herein may result in loss of engineering data you
have set or disabling of CAMS for HIS.
l Using CAMS for HIS for the First Time

When using CAMS for HIS for the first time on all HISs included in the Equalization Scope,
first set up and start the HIS which will serve as the Download Master. The remaining HISs
can be started in any order. The same applies when CAMS for HIS is used for the first time
after updating the CENTUM VP software revision.
l Procedure to Add an HIS Running CAMS for HIS to a Project to which

CAMS for HIS is Already Applied
The procedure to add an HIS running CAMS for HIS to a project to which CAMS for HIS is
already applied is explained.
Step 1: Download items common to the project
Step 2: Adjust the Equalization Scope for existing HISs
Step 3: Restart the HISs
Step 4: Enable the CAMS for HIS function of the new HIS
• Step 1: Download items common to the project
Add an HIS to the CENTUM VP project and download to all existing HISs those items
common to the project.
1. Confirm that CAMS for HIS function is disabled on the HIS to be added. If CAMS for
HIS is enabled, disable it and then restart the computer.
2. Add a new HIS in the System View.
3. Download the project common section to all HISs including the newly added HIS.
4. Confirm that the operation of the added HIS can be used as a normal HIS.
• Step 2: Adjust the Equalization Scope for existing HISs
Add the new HIS to the Equalization Scope on all existing HISs running CAMS for HIS.
HIS Utility.
2. Click the [Detailed Setting] button in the CAMS for HIS tab sheet of the HIS Utility.
The Detailed Setting dialog appears.
3. In the Detailed Setting dialog, check the IP address of the new HIS, select the check
box, and add the new HIS to the Equalization Scope.

5. Follow the above steps to add the new HIS to all HISs running CAMS for HIS.
• Step 3: Restart the HISs
Restart the HISs one by one, starting from the station on which “Step 2” has completed.
Restart the HISs one by one by making sure not all HISs included in the Equalization
Scope are stopped at the same time.
• Step 4: Enable the CAMS for HIS function of the new HIS
When “Step 2” and “Step 3” have completed for all HISs included in the Equalization
Scope, enable the CAMS for HIS function of the newly added HIS.
HIS Utility.
2. Select the [Enable CAMS for HIS] check box in the CAMS for HIS tab sheet of the
HIS Utility.
3. Include the newly added HIS in the equalization scope. Click [Detailed Setting] but-
ton; check the corresponding check box for including the HIS in the equalization
scope on the [Detailed Setting] dialog box.
5. Restart the HIS. Once the HIS has restarted, alarm data is automatically equalized
from other HIS and CAMS for HIS runs in the same manner as on any existing HIS.
l Procedure to Delete an HIS Running CAMS for HIS from a Project to which
CAMS for HIS is Already Applied
The following explains the procedure to delete an HIS by disabling its CAMS for HIS function.
• Step 1: Disable the CAMS for HIS function of the HIS to be deleted
Disable the CAMS for HIS function of the HIS to be deleted.
HIS Utility.
2. Unselect the [Enable CAMS for HIS] check box in the CAMS for HIS tab sheet of the
HIS Utility.
4. Restart the HIS.
If you only want to stop the CAMS for HIS function temporarily and use the station as a
normal HIS, the subsequent steps are not required.
• Step 2: Download items common to the project after deleting the HIS
Delete the HIS from the CENTUM VP project and download to all existing HISs those
items common to the project.
1. Delete the HIS in the System View.
2. Newly download to all existing HISs those items common to the project.
• Step 3: Adjust the Equalization Scope for existing HISs
Delete the HIS that has been deleted from the CENTUM VP project from the Equalization
Scope on all existing HISs running CAMS for HIS. Although this HIS has already been
deleted from the Equalization Scope on those HISs to which items common to the project
was downloaded, as a precautionary measure confirm that this HIS has been deleted.
HIS Utility.
2. Click the [Detailed Setting] button in the CAMS for HIS tab sheet of the HIS Utility.
The Detailed Setting dialog appears.

3. In the Detailed Setting dialog, confirm that the HIS that has been deleted from the
CENTUM VP project no longer exists.
If the deleted HIS is shown in the Detailed Setting dialog, the items common to the proj-
ect may not have been downloaded correctly. Perform step 2 again.
• Step 4: Restart the HISs
Restart the HISs one by one, starting from the station on which “Step 3” has completed.
Restart the HISs one by one by making sure not all HISs included in the Equalization
Scope are stopped at the same time.
n Changing Download Master

If you want to change the downloading master to a different PC, you need to backup the
CAMS for HIS database on the downloading master PC, and then restore the database on
the PC that you want to assign to the downloading master. Backup and Restore the CAMS for
HIS database can be performed on the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
IMPORTANT
When running database backup and restore, you need to pay attention the versions of Config-
urator of CAMS for HIS. The backup performed on the Configurator of CAMS for HIS older
than R4.02.00 should not be restored on the Configurator of CAMS for HIS of R4.02.00 or
newer. Vice versa, the backup performed on the Configurator of CAMS for HIS of R4.02.00 or
newer should not be restored on the Configurator of CAMS older than R4.02.00.

1. Back up the database of CAMS for HIS using Download Master before change.
2. Clear the settings of Download Master using Download Master before change, and then
restart the HIS.
3. Set up a new Download Master and then restart the HIS.
4. Restore the data backed up in Step 1 above in the new Download Master.
SEE
ALSO For more information about backup and restore the CAMS fro HIS database, refer to:
• “l Operation to Back up” on page B1-83
• “l Operation to Restore” on page B1-83
For more information about downloading master, refer to:
“n System Configuration when Using CAMS for HIS” on page A1-2
For more information about setting the downloading master, refer to:
n Engineering for Connecting to PRM

The engineering procedure to integrate alarms of Plant Resource Manager (PRM) is shown
below.

Start
PRM engineering
(PRM)
Definition of alarm management rules

Definition file
(operation file)
Definition of delivery rules
Maintenance
alarm list
Simulation
Export
Maintenance alarm list • • • CSV file
Alarm engineering
(CAMS for HIS Alarm builder)
Import
Confirmation of OPC A&E CAMS for HIS

messages/addition of attributes engineering
Download of items
common to the project
OPC A&E server connection

setting (HIS Utility)
Specification of OPC server Setting of execution
Specification of OPC A&E program ID environment
End
Figure B3-3
l PRM Engineering
Build maintenance alarms to be sent from the PRM side. The following items are applicable:
• Definition of alarm management rules
Use the Alarm Management Tool to create alarm management rules and save them in the
definition file.
• Definition of notification rules
Use the Notification Configuration Tool to create maintenance alarm notification rules and
save them in the definition file.
To display maintenance alarms on the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS, select “Opera-
tor” as the delivery destination for maintenance alarms you want to display.
Specify the recipient HIS for “Operation Guide Setting.”

• Simulation
Test the building of maintenance alarms on the PRM side.
• Export
Follow these steps to export the rules you are currently viewing:
1. From the menu bar, select [File] > [Export].
The Export file selection dialog box appears.
2. Navigate to the folder where you want to save the file, and in the File Name box, type
the file name.
3. Click [Save].
The rules are exported to a CSV file.
l Alarm Engineering
Use the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder to perform alarm engineering. The following items are
applicable:
• Import of maintenance alarms
This requires importing the alarm source and redefining the alarm source. Start the
CAMS for HIS Alarm builder and import the maintenance alarm list to the “OPC” position
in the Tree view.
Utilize the mapping function of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder to associate “Title” of
maintenance alarm with “Alarm Source” in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder.
• Alarm engineering
If necessary, perform engineering tasks on attributes and other settings for PRM mainte-
nance alarms.
After the engineering, save the changes and download the items common to the project
to equalize the definitions with each HIS in the project.
l Setting of Execution Environment

Perform the settings needed for the HIS to connect to the PRM OPC A&E server. The follow-
ing items are applicable.
• OPC A&E server connection setting
Use the HIS Utility to specify the computer name of OPC A&E server and OPC A&E pro-
gram ID for the HIS which will be receiving PRM maintenance alarms.
l Action to be Taken after Changing Maintenance Alarms

If any PRM maintenance alarm was added or deleted, import the updated maintenance alarm
list to the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder again.
SEE
ALSO For more information about importing and mapping, refer to:
“l Importing” on page B1-19
l Alarm Messages Received via PRM OPC Server

The table below summarizes consolidated alarm engineering for alarm messages received
via a PRM OPC A&E server.

Table B3-1 Consolidated Alarm Engineering for alarm messages received via a PRM OPC A&E server
Consolidated alarm engineering Action on HIS
Alarm message
management
function (Mes-
Message type sage Monitor of Output device Output device
Item Set value
CAMS for HIS, (printer) (buzzer)
CAMS for HIS
historical view-
er)(*1)
OPC (PRM) AlarmPriority Unset Displayed. Not output. Whether or not
to rumble the
Critical Displayed. Not output. buzzer is con-
High trolled regard-
less of the
Medium AlarmPriority
setting(*2)
Low
Logging Not dis-
played(*3)
Reference Not dis-
played(*4)
Message mark Cannot be set. Displayed in the Not output.
color color fixed by
the system.
Detection Enable Follow the Not output. Follow the
[AlarmPriority] above (*2)
setting.
Disable Not dis- The buzzer
played(*5) does not rum-
ble.
*1: PRM OPC messages have their TypeOfAlarm attribute set to Asset.
*2: No rumble, operation guide message sound, or system alarm message sound, is determined according to the Destination,
Condition, AlarmDetector and Guidance attributes.
either.
n Engineering for Connecting to STARDOM

This section explains the engineering procedure to connect to the System Integration OPC
Station (hereinafter referred to as “SIOS”).

Start
STARDOM engineering
(STARDOM)
Creation of control application
Installation of FCN/FCJ
OPC server
Setting of FCN/FCJ
OPC server
Plant hierarchy engineering

(System View) Definition of plant hierarchy
SIOS engineering
(System View) Installation of SIOS
(SIOS)
Creation of new SIOS
Setting of browse file

customization definition file
Generation of FCN/FCJ and

OPC browse files
Automatic generation of
OPC DA server definition file
Alarm engineering
(CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder) Confirmation of SIOS A&E
messages/addition of attributes
Download of items common

to the project
End
Figure B3-4 Engineering Workflow (Connection with SIOS)
SEE
ALSO For more information about details of SIOS engineering, refer to:
B4.3, “SIOS Engineering” in CENTUM CS 3000/STARDOM Integration Engineering Guide (TI
34P0K41-01E)
l STARDOM Engineering
Create a control application and install the FCN/FCJ OPC server, and then set the FCN/FCJ
OPC server (by setting the node identifier and remote access).
l Plant Hierarchy Engineering

Use the Plant Hierarchy Builder in the System View to define the plant hierarchy name
(FCN/FCJ node identifier and computer name of FCN/FCJ OPC A&E server).
l SIOS Engineering
Perform initial setting and engineering for the SIOS. The following items are applicable.
• Initial setting of SIOS:
• Install the SIOS.

• Set security of the PC in which the SIOS is running.
• Use the System View to create a new SIOS under a CENTUM VP project.
• Use the System View to select STARDOM as the connection destination of the SIOS.
• Set the browse file customization definition file.
• Engineering of SIOS:
• Use the SIOS Engineering window to browse the OPC server.
• An OPC DA server definition file is automatically generated.
• Load the OPC DA server definition file to the SIOS.
• Manually copy the “OPC DA server definition file” to the Download Master HIS (the
Configurator of CAMS for HIS runs), and then “Download” it using the Configurator of
CAMS for HIS.
l Alarm Engineering
Perform alarm engineering for CAMS for HIS.
If necessary, use the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder or CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder to
perform engineering tasks such as setting attributes for SIOS A&E messages and defining
alarm groupings.
After the engineering, save the changes and download the items common to the project to
equalize the definitions with each HIS in the project.
l Connection with OPC A&E Server

Set an HIS representing each project and connect it with the applicable OPC A&E server.
l Manual Copying of OPC DA Server Definition File

Manually copy the required files.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the procedure of manually copying OPC DA server definition file, refer to:
B4.4, “CAMS for HIS Engineering” of CENTUM CS 3000/STARDOM Integration Engineering Guide (TI
34P0K41-01E)
l Specification of Identical Tag Names in the Multiple Project Connection

Builder
When sharing the results of operations on SIOS A&E messages between projects, set "Allow
identical tag names" to [No] on the Identical Tag Names tab of the Multiple Project Connection
Builder.
TIP If you set "Allow identical tag names" to [Yes], control the engineering information between projects accord-
ingly.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the setting for identical tag names, refer to:
"■ Selecting “Yes”/“No” for “Allow Identical Tag Names” and Defining a List of Projects to be Connected"
in 6.3.1, “Engineering Upper Projects” in the Optional Functions Reference (IM 33K03N10-50E)
l Alarm Messages Received via STARDOM FCN/FCJ OPC Server

The table below summarizes consolidated engineering for alarm messages received via a
STARDOM FCN/FCJ OPC A&E server.
This table covers process alarms and system alarms without SIOS instrument tag.

Table B3-2 Consolidated Alarm Engineering for alarm messages received via a STARDOM FCN/FCJ
OPC A&E server
Consolidated alarm engineering Action on HIS
Alarm message
management
function (Mes-
sage Monitor of
Message type CAMS for HIS, Output device Output device
Item Set value
System Mes- (printer) (buzzer)
sage Banner,
CAMS for HIS
historical view-
er)
OPC(STAR- AlarmPriority Unsetting Displayed. Output. The buzzer
DOM)Process does not rum-
alarms ble.
Critical Displayed. Output regard- The buzzer
less of the does not rum-
High AlarmPriority ble.
Medium setting.
Low
Logging Not dis-
played(*1)
Reference Not dis-
played(*2)
the system.
Detection Enable Follow the Follow the The buzzer
[AlarmPriority] [AlarmPriority] does not rum-
setting. setting. ble.
Disable Not displayed Not output.
(*3)
OPC(STAR- AlarmPriority Unsetting Displayed. Output. The buzzer
DOM)System does not rum-
alarms ble.
Critical Displayed. Output regard- The buzzer
less of the does not rum-
High AlarmPriority ble.
Medium setting.
Low
Logging Not displayed
(*1)
Reference Not displayed
(*2)
the system.
Detection Enable Follow the Follow the The buzzer
[AlarmPriority] [AlarmPriority] does not rum-
setting. setting. ble.
Disable Not displayed Not output.
(*3)
either.

SEE
ALSO For more information about the process alarms of SIOS instrument, refer to:
B2.3, “Consolidated Alarm Engineering for CENTUM Process Alarms” on page B2-19
l Alarm Messages Received from OPC Server

• AlarmPriority setting
Process alarms of SIOS instrument tags (when STARDOM is connected) are handled in
the same manner as CENTUM process alarms. For other OPC alarms, printer output and
buzzer rumbling are controlled according to the attributes at the generation origin.
• Message mark color setting
Message mark colors cannot be set.
• Detection setting
Just like CENTUM process alarms, you can suppress alarm messages by setting Detec-
tion to Disable.

<B3.1 Revision up and Version up> B3-14
B3.1 Revision up and Version up

This section explain the Migration Tool and Revision Coexistence Environment.

B3.1.1 Migration Tool

This section explains the specification of the Migration Tool which converts a CAMS for HIS
database of an earlier revision created with the Configurator of CAMS for HIS, to a CAMS for
HIS Builder database for R4.02 or later.
n Function of Tool
This Tool provides a function to load a CAMS for HIS database of a revision earlier than
R4.02 and merges it with CAMS for HIS Builders of R4.02 or later.
A function overview of the Tool is illustrated below.
Migration Tool
CAMS for HIS Alarm

Start Save
Group Builder
CAMS for HIS Alarm

Start Save
Builder
Load Navigator Merge
CAMS for HIS Shelf
Start Save
Builder
CAMS for HIS R4.02 or later

CAMS for HIS Message
database of Start Save CAMS for HIS
earlier revision Monitor Definition Builder database
Generation
Automatically imported
to each builder
Intermediate files
Figure B3.1.1-1 Overview of Migration Tool
l Check and edit the migration results

Use a CAMS for HIS Builder to check and edit the migration results.
Each CAMS for HIS Builder started by the Tool has a function to display differences in data
before and after the migration to allow the user to check the loaded portions.
The CAMS for HIS Builder specifications that apply during the migration are explained later.
IMPORTANT
A database created by an earlier version of Configurator of CAMS for HIS that earlier than
R4.02 contains the engineering information that has downloaded to the HIS and the working
files of CAMS for HIS generated before the downloading. This tool can only acquire the engi-
neering information that has downloaded to the HIS.

l Source CAMS for HIS Database

The source CAMS for HIS database is acquired from the Configurator of CAMS for HIS run-
ning on the “Download Master” HIS. If there are multiple Download Masters, or specifically
when the system consists of multiple equalization scope, run the Tool multiple times to merge
data one by one with the R4.02 or later version CAMS for HIS database.
n Workflow
The following explains the migration workflow using the Tool.
l Backup of Earlier Revision

• Start the Configurator of CAMS for HIS on the HIS where CAMS for HIS engineering
tasks were performed on the project of an earlier revision (= HIS set as the “Download
Master”).
• Select Tools - Backup in the Configurator of CAMS for HIS menu and back up the CAMS
for HIS database to an appropriate medium.
l Revision Up of Project
Update the revisions of ENG PC and HIS to R4.02 or later.
l Startup of Migration Tool

Start the Tool from the ENG PC. The initial Tool screen appears. All builders that are referenc-
ing or editing the project to be migrated to (destination project) must be closed.
l Specification of Destination Project

As the destination project, specify one project registered in the ENG PC. The current project
cannot be specified as the destination project.
l Loading of CAMS for HIS Database of Earlier Revision

Use the Tool to specify the folder of the source CAMS for HIS database that has been backed
up, and select “Load.”
l Converting to Database
Generates the intermediate files for database conversion.
l Checking/Saving in CAMS for HIS Builder

• The Tool starts CAMS for HIS Builders one by one. The user uses each CAMS for HIS
Builder to check the information imported by the Tool and make corrections, if necessary.
• The user performs a save operation in the CAMS for HIS Builder to shut down the builder.
• Once the builder shuts down, the Tool starts the next CAMS for HIS Builder. The user
checks information/makes corrections in the same manner.
l Close Tool and Download to HIS

• When all processes are completed in the four CAMS for HIS Builder, the Tool displays a
screen indicating that the processes are complete and then close the tool.
• Download the common system items in the System View to the HIS.

B3.1.2 Detailed Specifications of Migration Tool

This Chapter explains the detailed specifications of the Tool.
n Builders during Migration

Download operation is disabled in any CAMS for HIS Builder started during the migration. To
perform a download to the HIS, shut down the Migration Tool and then download items com-
mon to the project in the System view, or restart each CAMS for HIS Builder and perform a
download in the builder.
n Migration of User-defined Attributes

The following explains cases of specifications where an error will occur when user-defined at-
tributes are migrated among alarm definitions.
l Length of User-defined Attribute Name

If the name of a user-defined attribute exceeds 50 characters, the applicable attribute will not
be merged. The user can check the error log of the Tool to identify the names of attributes
that were not merged.
l Number of User-defined Attributes

If the total number of user-defined attributes including those already present in the R4.02 or
later CAMS for HIS database exceeds 50, none of the user-defined attributes in the conver-
sion source will be merged. The user can check the error log of the Tool to identify the names
of attributes that were not merged.
l Overwriting of User-defined Attributes

If a user-defined attribute of the same name as a user-defined attribute already present in the
R4.02 or later CAMS for HIS database exists among the existing user-defined attributes in the
conversion source, the situation will be handled as follows:
• If the existing user-defined attribute is a character string
The user-defined attribute will be merged.
• If the existing user-defined attribute is a numerical value or combo-box
The user-defined attribute will not be merged because the type is different. The user can
check the error log of the Tool to identify the names of attributes that were not merged.

B3.1.3 Operating Specifications

This section describes the detailed operating procedure.
n Startup of Tool
Start the Tool from the Start menu.
From the [Start] menu of Windows, select [Program] – [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] – [CAMS for
HIS Migration Tool].
The configuration of each screen of the Tool is shown below.
Navigator pane Project display pane Input/display pane
CAMS for HIS Migration Tool
Start migration Specified project: PJT1
Specify project
Convert database
Confirm conversion log
Import database
Confirm import log
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Definition
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder Specify a backup folder for conversion source and click “Next.”
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Alarm Definition Database folder must be located under the folder you specified.
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder Browse...
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Shelf Definition
Starting CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition
Starting CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder
Commit database
Committing database
Migration Completed Back Next Cancel
Button pane
Figure B3.1.3-1 Window Configuration
The Navigator pane shows a flow of migration processing.

The Project display pane shows the name of the specified project and the source folder.
Initial screen that appears when the Tool is started
Start migration
Specify project
Convert database
Import database
Confirm import log
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder Welcome to CAMS for HIS Migration Tool.
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Alarm Definition CAMS for HIS Migration Tool configures the settings to perform migration.
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder Click “Next.”
Commit database
Committing database
Migration Completed Next Cancel
Figure B3.1.3-2 Initial Window
Click [Next] to switch to the next screen. Clicking [Cancel] shuts down the Tool.
A list of projects registered in the System View is shown.

Start migration Select a project and click “Next.”
Specify project
Select Project Name Location
Convert database
MYPJT E:\CENTUMVP\eng\BKProject\MYPJT
PJT04 E:\CENTUMVP\eng\BKProject\PJT04
Import database
PJT1 E:\CENTUMVP\eng\BKProject\PJT1
Confirm import log
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Alarm Definition
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder
Commit database
Committing database
Figure B3.1.3-3 Project Specification Window
Select one project in the conversion destination and then click [Next]. Click [Back] to return to
the previous screen. Clicking [Cancel] shuts down the Tool. The current project cannot be
designated as the conversion destination project.
Conversion Source Database Specification Screen is shown
Start migration Specified project: PJT1
Specify project
Convert database
Import database
Confirm import log
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder Specify a backup folder for conversion source and click “Next.”
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Alarm Definition Database folder must be located under the folder you specified.
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder Browse...
Commit database
Committing database
Figure B3.1.3-4 Conversion Source Database Load Window
Specify the folder of the conversion source CAMS for HIS database of an earlier revision.
Click [Browse…] to open the folder selection dialog box. Specify the folder acquired by the
backup function of the Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
After the folder has been specified, click [Next] to start conversion. Otherwise, click [Back] to
return to the previous screen.
The conversion processing log is shown.

Start migration Specified project: PJT03 Source database folder: F:\CENTUMVP\CAMS
Specify project
Log Type Migration Step
Convert database
Error Warning Message Convert Import Commit
Import database Alarm Group Alarm Shelf Message Monitor System
Confirm import log
8/3/2010 2:21:44 PM Info: Conversion of alarm definition started.
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Definition 8/3/2010 2:21:44 PM Info: Conversion of alarm process definition completed.
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder 8/3/2010 2:21:44 PM Info: Conversion of system alarm definition completed.
8/3/2010 2:21:44 PM Info: Conversion of operator guide message definition completed.
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Alarm Definition 8/3/2010 2:21:44 PM Info: Conversion of alarm definition completed.
Commit database
Committing database
Migration Completed Save... Next Cancel
Figure B3.1.3-5 Conversion Log Check Window
The log for each builder can be checked in the tab of the corresponding builder.
Select check boxes in the [Log Type] and [Migration Steps] to display applicable logs. If a
check box is not selected, only the corresponding log disappears. All the check boxes are se-
lected by default.
Click [Save] to open the file save dialog box where you can save the contents of the log dis-
played in the current tab to a desired folder as a text file.
Check the log and then click [Next] to start Import process. Clicking [Cancel] shuts down the
Tool.
When the import processing is complete, the completion message shown below appears.
Start migration Specified project: PJT04 Source detabase folder: E:\Backup
Specify project
Convert database
Import database
Confirm import log
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder Import finished.
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Alarm Definition Click “Next.”
Commit database
Committing database
Figure B3.1.3-6 Import Processing Completion Window
Click [Next] to proceed to the next step.

The conversion result log is shown. The log for each builder can be checked in the tab of the
corresponding builder.

Specify project
Convert database
Confirm import log
8/3/2010 2:24:19 PM Info: Import of system information started.
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Definition 8/3/2010 2:24:19 PM Info: Copied Alarm Rule Assistant Definition File: DecisionSupport.csv.
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder 8/3/2010 2:24:19 PM Info: Copied Plant Class Definition File: PlantClass.csv.
8/3/2010 2:24:19 PM Info: Import of system information completed.
Commit database
Committing database
Migration Completed Save... Next Cancel
Figure B3.1.3-7 Import Log Check Window
lected by default.
Click [Save] to open the file save dialog box where you can save the contents of the log dis-
played in the current tab to a desired folder as a text file.
Check the log and then click [Next]. Clicking [Cancel] shuts down the Tool.
Whether or not each CAMS for HIS Builder must be started is shown.
Start migration Specified project: PJT04 Source database folder: E:\Backup
Specify project
Convert database
Import database
Confirm import log
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder. Click “Next.”
Modify and save with CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder if need.
When you exit CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder, the next step starts.
Commit database
Committing database
Figure B3.1.3-8 CAMS for HIS Builder Startup Window
If it is necessary, click [Next] to start an applicable CAMS for HIS Builder. The following
screen appears while a Builder is being started.

Specify project
Convert database
Import database
Confirm import log
Running CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder.
Commit database
Committing database
Figure B3.1.3-9 CAMS for HIS Builder Starting Window
When each CAMS for HIS builder is shut down, the Tool automatically proceeds to the next
step.
This way, the Alarm Group Builder, Alarm Builder, Shelf Builder and Message Monitor Set-
tings Builder are started one by one.
If an error occurred at the time of import, make corrections using each CAMS for HIS Builder,
if necessary. After the necessary corrections have been made, save the CAMS for HIS Build-
er.
If no corrections are necessary, shut down each CAMS for HIS Builder right away.
Database Confirmation Screen is shown.
Specify project
Convert database
Import database
Confirm import log
Committing database.
Click “Commit” to reflect changes in the project database.
Click “Cancel” to exit without reflecting changes.
Commit database
Committing database
Migration Completed Commit Cancel
Figure B3.1.3-10 Database Confirmation Window
Clicking the [Commit] button on the confirmation screen updates the CAMS for HIS database
of the specified project.
When confirmation processing is completed, logs of confirmation result are displayed in the
Migration Completion screen. Logs can be checked in a tab provided for each builder.
lected by default.
The initial display of logs is automatically scrolled to the top of [Generation Log].

Specify project
Convert database
Confirm import log
8/3/2010 2:26:09 PM Info: Conversion of system information started.
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Definition 8/3/2010 2:26:09 PM Info: Conversion of system information completed.
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder 8/3/2010 2:26:12 PM Info: Import of system information started.
8/3/2010 2:26:12 PM Info: Copied Alarm Rule Assistant Definition File: DecisionSupport.csv.
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Alarm Definition 8/3/2010 2:26:12 PM Info: Copied Plant Class Definition File: PlantClass.csv.
Starting CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder 8/3/2010 2:26:12 PM Info: Import of system information completed.
8/3/2010 2:26:18 PM Info: Generation started.
Confirm and save CAMS for HIS Shelf Definition 8/3/2010 2:26:20 PM Info: Generation completed.
Commit database
Committing database
Migration Completed Save... Close
Figure B3.1.3-11 Migration Completion Window
Click [Save] to open the file save dialog box where you can save the currently displayed log to
a desired folder as a text file.
Clicking [Close] shuts down the application.

B3.1.4 Engineering in Revision Coexistence Environment

This section provides the information about an environment where both HISs of versions earli-
er than R4.02 and HISs of R4.02 or later versions are present. The following items are descri-
bed:
• Preconditions for operation
• Operating specifications for execution in a coexistence environment
• Equalization of database
• Engineering procedure
n Precondition for Operation

The preconditions for operation in environments where the system coexists with old revisions
are explained for each component.
l ENG
• The version of ENG must be upgraded to the latest.
• CAMS databases whose version is earlier than R4.02 must be converted to databases of
R4.02 or later using the Migration Tool.
• In environments where the system coexists with old versions, operate the system by ena-
bling “Generate R3/R4.01 compatible database” in the CAMS for HIS tab of the Proper-
ties dialog box of a project of the System View.
• If a user and/or user group was added or deleted in the Security Builder, save the infor-
mation in either one of the CAMS for HIS builders.
• If an alarm group was deleted and saved in the Alarm Group Builder and then an alarm
group of the same name was added, save the information in the CAMS for HIS Alarm
builder.
SEE
ALSO For more information about migration, refer to:
B3.1.1, “Migration Tool” on page B3-15
l Download Master
• Select a download master from HISs with the latest version. Specify only one download
master within the redundancy ring.
• The download master must be running when performing download in ENG.
• Engineering cannot be performed using the configurator of CAMS for HIS provided by re-
visions before R4.02. Since databases generated by configurators are not compatible
with ENG databases, engineering by the CAMS for HIS builders and engineering by con-
figurators cannot coexist within the same redundancy ring.
l HIS of Revision Earlier than R4.02

• HISs whose revision is upgraded to R3.08.70 will be referred to as the R3 HIS in this sec-
tion. Make sure that all HISs whose revision is older than R3.08.70 must be upgraded to
R3.08.70.
• Since new functions implemented in revisions of R4.02 and later do not run on HISs
whose revision is earlier than R4.02, the operation and monitoring function is different
from HISs whose revision is R4.02 or later. The differences include operation at recover-
ing from alarm, security by function restriction level, and security in HIS-TSE environ-
ment.

n Operating Specifications for Execution in Coexistence Environment

The operating specifications for execution vary between an HIS prior to R4.02 version and
HIS of R4.02 or later versions.
l Restoration of Alarm Statuses at Start

When started, each HIS acquires events that occurred while the HIS was down (alarm occur-
rence, recovery and confirmation operation) from other HIS in the equalization scope. Alarm
statuses are restored based on the acquired information.
How this information is acquired varies between an HIS prior to R4.02 versions and HIS of
R4.02 or later versions.
• An HIS prior to R4.02 version acquires this information from the CAMS for HIS historical
file in the adjacent HIS in the equalization scope.
• An HIS of R4.02 or later versions acquires this information from the CAMS for HIS histori-
cal file in other HIS of R4.02 or later versions in the equalization scope.
Accordingly, the contents may vary between the historical file of an HIS earlier than R4.02
version and HIS of R4.02 or later versions. This may result in the following phenomena.
• The alarm statuses at start vary between an HIS prior to R4.02 version and HIS of R4.02
or later versions. For example, equalizing within Operator-control Station Group of R4.02
or later versions may result in the different system alarms shown as not yet confirmed on
one station and already confirmed on another.
• The contents of the CAMS for HIS historical file shown in the Historical Viewer vary be-
tween an HIS prior to R4.02 version and HIS of R4.02 or later version.
n Equalization of database
The figure below shows an example of equalization in a coexistence environment where both
HIS prior to R4.02 version and HIS of R4.02 or later versions are present.

■ Legend
R3 : R3.08.70 or R4.01 R5 : R5.01
R3 environment
User operation System
operation
Import of CENTUM VP database HIS#1

ENG (Download Master) HIS#2 HIS#3
R3 R3 R3 R3
Project Configurator of
database CAMS for HIS
Equalization Equalization
Creation Download
SystemView Equalization
DB scope DB DB
Load
Revision up
ENG
R5
An example of system configuration where
CAMS for ENG, HIS#1 and HIS#2 are updated to R5 R3/R5 coexistence environment
HIS migration while HIS#3 is still running
function
Conversion
HIS#1
(Download Master) HIS#2 HIS#3
CAMS for HIS
Builder R5 R5 R3
Configurator of
Save CAMS for HIS
(not used) Equalization Equalization
CAMS Generation
DB
Project R3 Equalization R3 R3
database DB scope DB DB
R3 Copy Runtime files are not equalized
DB for the R3 HIS
Creation
R5 R3 R5 R3 R5
SystemView DB DB DB DB DB
Runtime
files
download
equalize equalize equalize
Figure B3.1.4-1 Example of Equalization in a Coexistence Environment
For the system in a mixed environment, the database of CAMS for HIS can be equalized as
follows:
1. Perform the CAMS for HIS engineering works on the PC where system builders are in-
stalled.
2. Execute “Save” on the CAMS for HIS builder so as to generate the two types of databa-
ses for HISs prior to R4.02 version and for HISs of R4.02 or later versions.
3. Execute “Download” on CAMS for HIS builder or “Download Project Common Section” on
System View, the HIS will start to equalize the generated two types of databases, howev-
er, the database for CS 3000 R3 HIS cannot be equalized.

4. The download master of HIS of R4.02 or later versions can equalize the database for
HISs earlier than R4.02 version HISs prior to R4.02 version within its equalization scope.
n Engineering Procedure
• A CAMS for HIS database prior to R4.02 version must be converted to an R4.02 or later
version database using the migration function of a CAMS for HIS Builder For migration,
• In a coexistence environment where HISs prior to R4.02 version are also present, open
the “Project Property” dialog in the System View and select the [Create R3/R4.01 Com-
patible Database] in the [CAMS for HIS] tab.
• Select a Download Master from among HISs of R4.02 or later versions.
• Specify only one Download Master in the equalization scope.
• The Download Master must be running when a download is performed by the ENG.
SEE
ALSO For more information about migration, refer to:

B3.1.5 Upgrading CAMS for HIS

The Windows OS supported by CENTUM VP R5 are different from those supported by CS
3000; therefore, you need to install the CENTUM VP software anew on a computer running
the OS supported by CENTUM VP R5 and then transfer the existing project database. Also,
the structure of CAMS for HIS database was changed from the version of R3.08.50. Conse-
quently, when upgrading a version of CAMS for HIS older than R3.08.50 to R5.01, the up-
grading procedure is slightly different from upgrading a R3.08.50 or newer version CAMS for
HIS.
IMPORTANT
The program for upgrading CS 3000 projects and of CENTUM VP software must be installed
on an OS with which R5 performance is guaranteed. You need to set up Windows before the
installation.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the workflow of upgrading from CS 3000 to CENTUM VP R5, refer to:
“■ Workflow of the Upgrade” in C6.1.1, “Procedures for the Upgrade” in the CENTUM VP Installation (IM
33K01C10-50E)
n Upgrading from A Version Older than R3.08.50 to R5.01

When upgrading from a version older than R3.08.50 to R5.01, a downloading needs to be
performed using the previous Configurator of CAMS for HIS.
1. Back up the necessary project database of CS 3000.
2. Back up the data of each software package except for CAMS for HIS. Back up the neces-
sary data of each software package except for CAMS for HIS used in each CS 3000 HIS.
3. Disable the CAMS for HIS functions in the HIS Utility, and then restart the computer.
4. Back up the data of CAMS for HIS in each CS 3000 HIS. Back up all the files in the fol-
lowing CAMS for HIS folder.
CAMS for HIS folder: <CS 3000 installation folder>\CAMS
TIP If you do not need CAMS for HIS historical data, you don’t have to back up files in the following folder.
CAMS for HIS historical data folder: <CS 3000 installation folder>\CAMS\hist
5. For the rest of steps, you need to work on a computer running the OS supported by
CENTUM VP R5. Install the CENTUM VP software to the HIS used as the downloading
master.
6. Shutdown all the HISs within the equalization scope and then restart the HIS used as the
downloading master first.
7. Restore CS 3000 package data except for the data of CAMS for HIS.
8. Confirm that CAMS for HIS is disabled and then restore the data of CAMS for HIS. You
need to restore the following folders and files from the backup data to the same locations
under the <CENTUM VP installation folder>.
Folders:
CAMS\Client (CAMS for HIS Message Monitor data)
CAMS\configurator (CAMS for HIS configurator data)
CAMS\database (CAMS for HIS run-time data base)
CAMS\defhist (CAMS for HIS database backup)

CAMS\hist (CAMS for HIS Historical Data)
CAMS\ScenarioFiles (Scenario files of CAMS for HIS Alarm Generator Tools )
CAMS\Viewer (CAMS for HIS Historical Viewer data)
Files:
CAMS\CAMSCapture.bin (Setup OPC A&E server)
CAMS\ServerConfig.xml (Setup CAMS for HIS Server)
CAMS\SystemScopeDefinition.bin (Setup Equalization Scope)
9. After restore is completed, enable the CAMS for HIS functions in the HIS Utility, and then
restart the computer.
10. Start the previous version Configurator of CAMS for HIS. Execute the following command
at the command prompt.
<CENTUM VP Installed Folder>\CAMS\CAMSConfigurator.exe -o
11. After command execution is completed successfully, back up the data of CAMS for HIS
by using CAMS for HIS configurator which is used in step 10.
12. Start the HIS in which Standard Builder Function is installed, and then restore the CS
3000 project database that was created before the upgrade in an appropriate location.
13. From the Start menu, select [All Programs] > [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] > [Project’s Attri-
bution Utility].
The Project’s Attribution Utility starts.
14. Register the project database in the System View.
15. From the Start menu, select [All Programs] > [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] > [System View].
The System View starts, and the project database is upgraded automatically to the new
version.
16. Use the CAMS for HIS migration tool to convert the data of CAMS for HIS that was
backed up in step 11.
17. Download the project common section to HIS used as the downloading master from the
HIS in which Standard Builder Function is installed.
18. Upgrade other HISs that are not used as the downloading master and then restart HISs.
19. Restore the data for each package except for the data of CAMS for HIS in each HIS.
20. Restore the data for CAMS for HIS in each HIS using same procedure as step 8 and 9.
21. Download the project common section to HISs from the HIS in which Standard Builder
Function is installed.
22. Confirm that CAMS for HIS is enabled in HIS utility of each HIS.
23. Start the CAMS for HIS Index File Generator in each HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to install the CENTUM VP software, refer to:
B4.6, “Installing the CENTUM VP Software” in the CENTUM VP Installation (IM 33K01C10-50E)
For more information about CAMS for HIS Migration Tool, refer to:
n Upgrading from A Version of R3.08.50 or Newer to R5.01

1. Back up the necessary project database of CS 3000.

2. Back up the data of each software package except for CAMS for HIS. Back up the neces-
sary data of each software package except for CAMS for HIS used in each CS 3000 HIS.
3. Disable the CAMS for HIS functions in the HIS Utility, and then restart the computer.
4. Back up the database of CAMS for HIS in each CS 3000 HIS. Back up all the files in the
following CAMS for HIS folder.
CAMS for HIS folder: <CS 3000 installation folder>\CAMS
TIP If you do not need CAMS for HIS historical data, you don’t have to back up files in the following folder.
CAMS for HIS historical data folder: <CS 3000 installation folder>\CAMS\hist
5. For the rest of steps, you need to work on a computer running the OS supported by
CENTUM VP R5. Install the CENTUM VP software to the HIS used as the downloading
master.
6. Restore CS 3000 package data except for the database of CAMS for HIS.
7. Confirm that CAMS for HIS is disabled and then restore the database of CAMS for HIS.
You need to restore the following folders and files from the backup data to the same loca-
tions under the <CENTUM VP installation folder>.
Folders:
CAMS\Client (CAMS for HIS Message Monitor data)
CAMS\configurator (CAMS for HIS Configurator data)
CAMS\database (CAMS for HIS run-time data base)
CAMS\defhist (CAMS for HIS database backup)
CAMS\hist (CAMS for HIS Historical Data)
CAMS\ScenarioFiles (Scenario files of CAMS for HIS Alarm Generator Tools )
CAMS\Viewer (CAMS for HIS Historical Viewer data)
Files:
CAMS\CAMSCapture.bin (Setup OPC A&E server)
CAMS\ServerConfig.xml (Setup CAMS for HIS Server)
CAMS\SystemScopeDefinition.bin (Setup Equalization Scope)
8. After restore is completed, enable the CAMS for HIS functions in the HIS Utility, and then
restart the computer.
9. Start the HIS in which Standard Builder Function is installed, and then restore the CS
3000 project database that was created before the upgrade in an appropriate location.
10. From the Start menu, select [All Programs] > [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] > [Project’s Attri-
bution Utility].
The Project’s Attribution Utility starts.
11. Register the project database in the System View.
12. From the Start menu, select [All Programs] > [YOKOGAWA CENTUM] > [System View].
The System View starts, and the project database is upgraded automatically to the new
version.
13. Use the CAMS for HIS migration tool to convert the CAMS for HIS Configurator data that
was backed up in step 4.
14. Download the project common section to HIS used as the downloading master from the
HIS in which Standard Builder Function is installed.

15. Upgrade other HISs which are not used as the downloading master and then restart
HISs .
16. Restore the data for each package except for the database of CAMS for HIS in each HIS.
17. Restore the data for CAMS for HIS in each HIS using same procedure as step 7 and 8.
18. Download the project common section to HISs from the HIS in which Standard Builder
Function is installed.
19. Confirm that CAMS for HIS is enabled in HIS utility of each HIS.
20. Start the CAMS for HIS Index File Generator in each HIS.
SEE
ALSO For more information about how to install the CENTUM VP software, refer to:
B4.6, “Installing the CENTUM VP Software” in the CENTUM VP Installation (IM 33K01C10-50E)
For more information about CAMS for HIS Migration Tool, refer to:

<B3.2 CAMS for HIS Engineering Flow when Connected Multiple Projects> B3-32
B3.2 CAMS for HIS Engineering Flow when

Connected Multiple Projects
This section explains how to share the engineering information of alarms or the results of op-
eration in CAMS for HIS with other projects.
SEE
ALSO For more information about engineering for multiple project connection, refer to:
6.3, “Multiple Project Engineering” in the Optional Functions Reference (IM 33K03N10-50E)
n Settings for Sharing the engineering information of alarms or the

Results of Operation in CAMS for HIS with Other Projects
Set the following in Project Property. Set them in all HISs in which the result of operation in
CAMS for HIS will be shared. Setting can be done either from the upper project or the lower
project.
1. In System View, right-click the applicable project, and then select [Properties (R)…].
2. Select the CAMS for HIS tab.
Properties
Name and Position Outline Constant Detailed Setting Graphic CAMS for HIS
Alarm action
Method Consolidated
Display Alarm status of suppressed tag

Detection=Disable Display alarm status in CAMS for HIS style
Priority=Logging/Reference Display alarm status in CAMS for HIS style
Suppression=ON Display alarm status in CAMS for HIS style
Create R3/R4.01 Compatible Database

Multiple Project Connection
Equalize the alarm event data and CAMS engineering data with connected project(M)
(Make sure that this option is also enabled in the connected project)
OK Cancel
Figure B3.2-1 CAMS for HIS Tab of Project Property
3. In [Multiple Project Connection], select the [Equalize the alarm event data and CAMS en-
gineering data with connected project (M)] check box. This check box is not selected by
default.
4. Click the [OK] button.
5. Download the project common section of System View.
When download is normally completed, a message dialog appears and each HIS runs
with new settings.
When this is set, the result of processing an A&E message of a project in CAMS for HIS will
also be conveyed to other projects. For example, when a process alarm message of the lower
project is displayed on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the upper project, the color of the
tag mark set in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder in the lower project will be reflected and dis-
played.

n Special Engineering Required in the Upper Project

In order to share the result of an operation in CAMS for HIS between the upper and lower
projects, display following builders in the upper project, and define the contents same as the
contents defined in the lower project.
• CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder
• Security builder
l How to Share Suppression Results

In order to share the results of starting and cancelling suppression among projects, create an
alarm group having the same name as the alarm group assigned to the target alarm source
also in the upper project. In the CAMS for HIS Alarm Group builder of the upper project, de-
fine [Alarm Group]. It is not necessary to define other items.
l How to Perform Operation and Monitoring with the Same Privilege from a
Different Project
In order for an operator who is performing operation and monitoring in the lower project to
perform operation and monitoring with the same privilege for Message Monitor of CAMS for
HIS even when logged in the upper project, define the privilege same as the privilege as-
signed to the applicable operator in CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition builder.
l How to Share Shelving Results

In order to share shelving results among projects, define the same shelf as the applicable
shelf in CAMS for HIS Shelf builder in the upper project.
Note, however, that only Continuous Shelving and One-Shot Shelving can share the shelving
results.
l Security for Each Project

For security, the security settings of own project are applied.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the relationship between multiple project connection and security, refer to:
6.2.2, “Security” in the Optional Functions Reference (IM 33K03N10-50E)
n Engineering Operations Utilizing the OtherProject Node in the Upper

Project
If an alarm source is defined in the OtherProject node of the upper project, the attributes de-
fined in the lower project are not utilized. These attribute values are utilized when the attrib-
utes are set in the upper project. When the process alarm message of the lower project is dis-
played on Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS in the upper project, for example, the color of
the tag mark set in the upper project will be reflected and displayed.
There are two types of procedures for defining an alarm source in the OtherProject node of
the upper project.
• Method to export/import CSV files
• Method to import CSV files prepared manually
These two methods will be explained below.

l Method to Export/Import CSV Files

This method exports the alarm source of the lower project and imports it in the upper project.
1. On the menu bar of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder of the lower project, click [File (F)] -
[External File (E)] - [Export (E)…].
The Export window appears.
2. In [Export], click the items to be exported, and export them.
A CSV file is created.
3. Display the CSV file created in step 2 above in Microsoft Excel, and save only the alarm
source to be customized in the upper project.
This completes the export operation.
4. On the menu bar of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder of the upper project, click [File (F)] -
[External File (E)] - [Import (P)…].
The Import window appears.
5. Click [Open…], select the desired CSV file, and then click [OK].
The Import window appears again.
6. In [Import], click the items to be imported, and click [Import…].
The Import (OtherProject) dialog appears.
7. In [ProjectID], enter the ProjectID of the lower project.
8. If there are duplicate tag names between the upper and lower projects, select the [Add a
project ID suffix to the tag name] check box.
9. Click [OK].
When a message dialog appears, click [OK].
This completes the import operation.
10. Edit the imported alarm source in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder as necessary, and then
save it.
11. Download the file.
l Method to Import CSV Files Prepared Manually

This method imports a CSV file manually prepared in the upper project.
1. Prepare a CSV file in Microsoft Excel.
At the beginning of the first line (A1), be sure to enter “AlarmSource.”
In column A of the second and subsequent rows, enter the engineering target alarm
source name of the lower project.
2. On the menu bar of the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder of the upper project, click [File (F)] -
[External File (E)] - [Import (P)...].
The Import window appears.
3. Click [Open], and select the desired CSV file.
The Import window appears again.
4. Click [Import].
The Import (OtherProject) dialog appears.
5. In [ProjectID], enter the ProjectID of the lower project.
6. If there are duplicate tag names between the upper and lower projects, select the [Add a
project ID suffix to the tag name] check box.
7. Click [OK].
When a message dialog appears, click [OK].
This completes the import operation.

8. Edit the imported alarm source in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder as necessary, and then
save it.
9. Download the file.
l How to Share User-defined Attributes

In order to share user-defined attributes defined in the CAMS for HIS Alarm builder with other
projects, set the same [Attribute name] and [Setting type] in the Add Attribute dialog box.
SEE
ALSO For more information about user-defined attributes and the Add Attribute dialog box, refer to:
l Defining Master Alarm Setpoint Values of OtherProject Node

If there are no functions to define the master alarm setpoint values on the local project side, it
is possible to use the OtherProject node of the host side project to define the master alarm
setpoint values on the local project side. Define alarm sources on the OtherProject node in
the host side project and then define the master alarm setpoint values.
If there are functions to define the master alarm setpoint values on the local project side, de-
fine the master alarm setpoint values on the local project side.
n Engineering Operations Utilizing the OPC Node in the Upper Project

In order to share A&E messages acquired via an OPC server, such as A&E messag-
es(*1)from PRM and STARDOM, with other projects, define the same alarm source in the
CAMS for HIS Alarm builder. Export files on the OPC node in the lower project first and then
import them to the OPC node in the upper project.
*1: Excluding alarms acquired by accessing with the SIOS instrument tags
n When the Lower Project Contains CENTUM Software Earlier than

R4.03.00
If the lower project contains CENTUM software packages earlier than R4.03.00(*1), special
engineering is required in the upper project.
1. Loading the alarm source of the lower project
2. Loading the user-defined alarm character string of the low project
3. Loading the plant hierarchy of the lower project
*1: The applicable software packages are Standard Operation and Monitoring Function and Standard Builder Function, for exam-
ple.
l Loading the Alarm Source of the Lower Project

If the applicable alarm source is engineered in the lower project, load the engineering con-
tents into the upper project.
SEE
ALSO For more information about the procedure, refer to:
“l Method to Export/Import CSV Files” on page B3-34

l Loading the User-defined Alarm Character String of the Lower Project

If a user-defined alarm character string has been changed in the lower project and downloa-
ded, perform the following operations in the upper project in order to reflect the change infor-
mation in the upper project as well.
1. Open Configurator of CAMS for HIS, and click [Tool] - [CENTUM VP Database Convert]
on the menu bar.
A message dialog appears.
2. Click [Convert].
The AlarmStatus.csv file will be created in (CENTUM VP installation folder)\CAMS\config-
urator\work\database\Client\Config\.
3. Copy the file created in step 2 above to (upper project name)\Common\CAMS_for_HIS
\CAMSAlm~EDF.
4. Open the User-defined Status Character String builder, save it, and then download it.
Perform the above steps 1 to 4 also when a user-defined alarm character string has been
changed in the lower project.
l Loading the Plant Hierarchy of the Lower Project

If the plant hierarchy has been changed in the lower project and downloaded, perform the fol-
lowing operations in the upper project in order to reflect the change information in the upper
project as well.
1. Open Configurator of CAMS for HIS, and click [Tool] - [CENTUM VP Database Convert]
on the menu bar.
A message dialog appears.
2. Click [Convert].
The PlantClass.csv file will be created in (CENTUM VP installation folder) \CAMS\config-
urator\work\database\Client\Config\.
3. Copy the file created in step 2 above to (upper project name)\Common\CAMS_for_HIS
\CAMSAlm~EDF.
4. Open the Security builder, save it, and then download it.
Perform the above steps 1 to 4 also when the plant hierarchy has been changed in the lower
project.

Ind-1
INDEX
A H
Alarm Action Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS
Project Property.........................................B1-2 Classification of Historical Data.................A8-8
Alarm Setpoint Management Display Pane............................................. A8-3
Alarm Setpoint Management.....................A1-3 Historical Data Displayed.......................... A8-8
Reflecting Current Alarm Setpoint Values to Historical Data not Displayed.................. A8-11
Master Setpoints.............................. B2-41 Search for Historical Data........................A8-11
Setting All Alarm Setpoint Values at Once........
......................................................... B2-39 M
C Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS
Display Panes........................................... A2-5
CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder
Starting in the Configuration Mode..........B1-80
Adding User-defined Attributes............... B1-31
to Call the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS..
Alarm Details Settings Screen.................B1-41 ........................................................... A2-3
Alarm List Settings Screen...................... B1-25 to Display Messages in the Tree View...... A4-2
Applying Alarm Rule Assistant................ B1-41 to Enable CAMS for HIS................. A2-2,B1-49
Contents Configured............................... B1-28 to Exit...................................................... A2-15
Creating Filters........................................ B1-33 to Retain Message Display Position..........A4-3
Creating the OPC A&E Server Program ID...... to Sort Messages...................................... A4-2
......................................................... B1-37
Exceptions to the Priorities......................B1-29 O
Setting Items............................................. B2-2
Operations Common to Builders
CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder
Adding a Row.......................................... B1-15
Display Example......................................B1-23
Downloading............................................B1-21
Setting Items............................................. B2-5
Exiting the Builder................................... B1-21
CAMS for HIS Message Monitor Definition Builder
Exporting................................................. B1-16
Importing................................................. B1-19
Setting Items............................................. B2-7
Print Instruction....................................... B1-16
CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder
Replacing................................................ B1-13
Returning to Default................................ B1-12
Setting Items............................................. B2-6
Searching................................................ B1-12
Configurator of CAMS for HIS........................ B1-78
Selecting a Column Item......................... B1-14
Managing the Download History............. B1-82
Self-Documentation.................................B1-16
Style Settings Dialog Box........................ B1-57
Setting All Cells at Once..........................B1-11
to Download Engineering Data and External
Starting the Builder....................................B1-6
Files..................................................B1-81
Undoing................................................... B1-12
to Load Engineering Information of Other Proj-
ects...................................................B1-84 Window Configuration............................... B1-7
to Start the Alarm Generator................... B1-81 Option Window............................................... B1-61

Blank Page
Rev-1
Revision Information
Title : Consolidated Alarm Management Software Reference
Manual No. : IM 33K03H20-50E
Aug. 2014/7th Edition/R5.04 or later*
*: Denotes the release number of the Software Product corresponding to the contents of this Manual.
The revised contents are valid until the next edition is issued.
Preface Descriptions of installation were modified.
A3.4 Description was added to "■ When Alarm Action is Set to [CENTUM original]".
A4.1 TIP was added to "■ Operation to Sort Messages".
A6.1 Information about tuning view was added to "Table A6.1-1 When Messages are Sup-
pressed on HIS"
B1.2.2 A reference link was modified.
B1.4.4 Some contents of the “■ Creating a Filter” were modified.
B1.6.4 "● Displaying Progress Information" was modified.
B1.6.6 Description was added to "■ Specifications of the Message Monitor of CAMS of HIS
(Function Check Mode)".
B2.1 Description of "Alarm Priority - modified" in "Table B2.1-2 CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder
Setting Items (2/4)" was modified.
The footnote of "Table B2.1-5 CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder Setting Items" was
corrected.
B2.2 Attributes were added to "Table B2.2-5 Message Attributes Displayed in the Select Col-
umns Dialog Box (2/2)".
B2.3 New section "● Tag Mark Shapes" was added.
B2.4 New section "● Shapes of system alarm marks" was added.
B3. New section "● Specification of Identical Tag Names in the Multiple Project Connection
Builder" was added.
B3.1.4 "release number" was changed to "revision number".
Apr. 2014/6th Edition/R5.03.20 or later
Preface Description of the caution symbol is modified.
A. The inside cover of chapter A was added.
A1. Some contents of the “■ System Configuration when Using CAMS for HIS” were deleted.
A2.2 “Table A2.2-1 List of Menu Items” was modified.
Some contents of the “● Details Pane” were modified.
A3.4 Title of the “■ When Alarm Inhibition (AOF) Mode is Set” was modified and the linked
page was added.
A4.2.4 New sections “● Maximum Number of Messages that can be Shelved”, “■ Operation to
Stop Continuous Shelving” were added.
Some contents of the “■ Operation to Stop Shelving” were modified.
A4.2.5 Some contents of the “■ Overview of Suppression” were modified.
New section “● Note Regarding the Behavior When Suppression is Cancelled” was add-
ed
A5. Some contents on saving text files on the details pane were added.

Rev-2
A6.1 Some contents of the “■ Actions of an HIS when Process Alarm Messages are Sup-
pressed” were modified.
A6.4 New messages were added on the “■ Messages Unique to CAMS for HIS”
New sections “● Messages Displayed when Alarm Suppression is Released”, “● Mes-
sages Displayed when Alarm Status is Corrected” were added
“Table A6.4-4 Actions when Recovering from the Alarm Status” was modified.
A7.1 New section “■ When the Lower Project Consists of CENTUM Software Earlier than
R5.03.20” was added
A8. “Figure A8-1 Display Example of the Historical Viewer of CAMS for HIS” was modified.
A8.3 “Table A8.3-2 Operations on CAMS for HIS Recorded as Operation Records”, “Table
A8.3-3 Operation Record Display Format of CAMS for HIS” were modified.
B. The inside cover of chapter B was added.
B1.2.1 Some contents of the “● Exporting”, “● Saving the Export Mapping Information”, “● Sav-
ing the Import Mapping Information” were modified.
B1.2.4 New sections “● Maximum Number of Alarm Sources that can be Engineered”, “● Ca-
pacity of Engineering Data File”, “● Defining Link Addresses as User-defined Attributes”
were added.
Some contents of the “■ Adding User-defined Attributes”, “■ Creating Filters”, “● Chang-
ing Filter Attributes”, “■ Creating the OPC A&E Server Program ID” were modified.
"Table B1.2.4-1 List of Attributes for Filter Condition”, “Table B1.2.4-2 Explanation of the
Engineering Report Dialog Box”, “Figure B1.2.4-9 Filter Properties” were modified.
B1.3 Some contents of the “■ Items Set in the CAMS for HIS Tab” were modified.
New sections "● How to include Exaopc Stations to an equalization scope" and "● After
clicking [Cancel] on the Detailed Setting dialog box" were added.
Title and some contents of the “■ Required Settings When Enhanced Security Level is
Applied to Internet Explorer” were modified.
B1.4.2 Some contents on setting to display the alarm attributes on the details pane were added.
B1.4.4 Some contents of the “■ Creating a Filter” were modified.
B2.1 “Table B2.1-3 Set Items in CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder (3/4)”, “Table B2.1-4 Set Items in
CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder (4/4)” were modified.
Some contents of the “■ List of CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder Setting Items”, “■ List
of CAMS for HIS Shelf Builder Setting Items”, “■ List of CAMS for HIS Message Monitor
Definition Builder Setting Items” were modified.
B2.3 “Table B2.3-1 Concept of Alarm Engineering” was modified.
Some contents of the “● Alarm Status Display on Faceplate”, “■ Customization of Tag
Mark Color” were modified.
B3. "Table B3-1 Consolidated Alarm Engineering for alarm messages received via a PRM
OPC A&E server" was modified.
Postface The "■ For Questions and More Information" is changed.
Delete the "■ Printed by"
Jun. 2013/5th Edition/R5.03 or later
Preface The preface text is modified.
A2. Some contents of the "■ Overview of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS" were added.
"Figure A2-1 Display Example of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS" was modified.
"Figure A2.2-23 Display Example of Shelves Pane" was modified.
A3.4 A section of "● Alarm Status Transition when Auto Clear is Set to [None] or [Disable] and
Alarms Continuously Shelved are Recovered" was deleted.

Rev-3
A section of "● Alarm Status Transition when Auto Clear is Set to [Enable] and Alarms Con-
tinuously Shelved are Recovered" was deleted.
Some contents of the "■ When Alarm Action is Set to [CENTUM original]" were deleted.
Some contents of the "■ When a Function Block is set to Alarm Inhibition (AOF) Mode"
were deleted.
A4.2.1 Some contents of the "● Filter Types" were modified.
A4.2.2 Some contents of the "■ Dynamic Filtering Operation" were modified.
A4.2.4 Some contents of the "■ Information Displayed in Shelf" were added.
A4.2.5 Some contents of the "■ Overview of Suppression" were added.
A6.1 The style of "Table A6.1-1 When Messages are Suppressed on HIS" were modified.
A9.2 "Figure A9.2-2 Example of Master Setpoint Value Displayed with Asterisks" was modified.
B1.2.1 "Table B1.2.1-2 CAMS for HIS Builder Menu List" was modified.
Some contents of the "● Setting All Cells at Once" were modified.
B1.3 New sections "■ Required Settings for Windows Server 2003", "● Setting Trusted Sites", "●
Setting Proxy Server" were added.
B1.4 "Figure B1.4.3-5 Shelves Pane Tab" was modified.
B1.6.1 Some contents of the "Function Check Execution Task Flow" were modified.
B2.2 Some contents of the "Table B2.2-1 Items Set in the Shelving Pane Tab", "Table B2.2-4
Message Attributes Displayed in the Select Columns Dialog Box (1/2)", "Table B2.2-5 Mes-
sage Attributes Displayed in the Select Columns Dialog Box (2/2)" were modified.
B3.1.1 "Figure B3.1.1-1 Overview of Migration Tool" was modified.
Nov. 2012/4th Edition/R5.02.07 or later
A2. "Figure Display Example of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS" was modified.
"Figure Display Example of Shelves Pane" was modified.
A3.4 Some contents of the "■ When Alarm Action is Set to [Consolidated] and then Auto Clear is
Set to [None] or [Disable]" were modified.
New sections "● Alarm Status Transition when Auto Clear is Set to [None] or [Disable] and
Alarms Continuously Shelved are Recovered", "● Alarm Status Transition when Auto Clear
is Set to [Enable] and Alarms Continuously Shelved are Recovered" were added.
Some contents of the "■ When Alarm Action is Set to [CENTUM original]" were added.
New section "■ When a Function Block is set to Alarm Inhibition (AOF) Mode" was added.
A4.2 Some contents of the "■ Information Displayed in Shelf" were added.
B1.4 "Figure Shelves Pane Tab" was modified.
B2.1 Some contents of the "Table Set Items in CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder (2/4)", "Table Set
Items in CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder (3/4)", "Table CAMS for HIS Alarm Group Builder Set-
ting Item" were modified.
B2.2 Some contents of the "Table Items Set in the Shelving Pane Tab", "Table Message Attrib-
utes Displayed in the Select Columns Dialog Box (1/2)" were modified.
Jun. 2012/3rd Edition/R5.02.00 or later
A1. A new section "■ Operation when the Number of Messages has Exceeded the Maximum
Number that can be Stored by CAMS for HIS" was added.
A section of "■ Alarm Setpoint Management" was deleted.
Some contents of the "■ Alarm Setpoint Management of CAMS for HIS" were modified and
added.
A3. All revised.

Rev-4
A4.2.4 Some contents of the "● Continuous Shelving" were deleted.
A5.1 Some contents of the "● Specifying Text File for Displays in Details Pane" were modified
and added.
A5.2 Some contents of the "■ Setting Required to Enter Texts in the Message Monitor of CAMS
for HIS" were modified and added.
A8. The chapter title was changed.
A8.2 Some contents of the "● Details Pane" were modified and added.
A8.3 Some contents of the "■ Historical Data not Displayed on the Historical Viewer of CAMS for
HIS" were modified and added.
A9. All revised.
B1.1 The section title "Tag Alarm Status Type is Selectable - Message Suppression" was
changed to "Message Suppression Operation in which the Type of the Tag's Alarm Status
Display can be Selected."
Some contents of that were modified and added.
Some contents of the "● Case in which This Check Box is Selected Automatically" were
modified and added.
B1.2.1 Some contents of the "● Menu Bar" were modified and added.
Some contents of the "● Toolbar" were added.
B1.2.4 A new section "■ Importing Alarm Setpoint Value Difference Information" was added.
A new section "■ Setting of All Alarm Setpoint Values at Once" was added.
Sections of "■ Advanced Settings when Defining Engineering Information", "● Import Alarm
Setpoint Values" were deleted.
B1.4.4 Some contents of the lead was modified.
Some contents of the "■ Creating a Filter" were added.
B2.1 Some contents of the "Table Set Items in CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder (3/4)", "Table Set
Items in CAMS for HIS Alarm Builder (4/4)" were modified and added.
B2.3 Some contents of the "■ Setting of Shelving Attribute" were modified and added.
Some contents of the "Table Change the Alarm Priority: Change Medium-priority Alarm to
High-priority Alarm" were added.
Some contents of the "Table Change the Alarm Detection: Change Detection to Disable
(2/2)" were modified.
B2.5 All revised.
B2.6 Some contents of the "Table Relationship of CAMS for HIS Builder and Other Builders (1/3)"
were deleted.
Some contents of the "Table Relationship of CAMS for HIS Builder and Other Builders (2/3)"
were modified and added.
Some contents of the "● Control Drawing Builder (Tag Definition) and CAMS for HIS Alarm
Builder" were modified and added.
B3. Some contents of the "● Changing Download Master" were added.
Some contents of the "● Alarm Messages Received via STARDOM FCN/FCJ OPC Server"
were deleted.
B3.2 The section title "To define the Master Alarm Setpoint Values of OtherProject Node" was
changed to "Defining Master Alarm Setpoint Values of OtherProject Node."
Some contents of that were modified and added.
Dec. 2011/2nd Edition/R5.01.10 or later
B1.5 Some contents of the TIP were deleted.

Rev-5
B3. Descriptions about procedure to start operation test of CAMS for HIS on multiple HISs are
added.
Sep. 2011/1st Edition/R5.01 or later
Newly published
n For Questions and More Information

Online Query: A query form is available from the following URL.
http://www.yokogawa.com/dcs/
n Written by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
n Published by Yokogawa Electric Corporation
2-9-32 Nakacho, Musashino-shi, Tokyo 180-8750, JAPAN

Blank Page

Im33k03h20-50e - Alarm Management

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Im33k03h20-50e - Alarm Management

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Consolidated Alarm

CENTUM VP Document Map

Field Control Stations Function Blocks Function Blocks Function Blocks

Function Blocks Human Interface Human Interface Engineering

SEBOL Communication with Communication with Communication

Optional Functions Communication with Compliance with Generic Subsystem

System Integration Unified Gateway Engineering Test

Engineering CENTUM FOUNDATION fieldbus

Operation and Monitoring

HIS Operation Operating Messages

Communication Devices Migrated-FCS(FIO)

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

Safety Precautions for Use

Indicates the OFF position of a power on/off switch.

n Notes on Handling User's Manuals

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

n Warning and Disclaimer

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

Identifies instructions that must be observed to prevent dam-

Identifies additional information.

Identifies referenced content.

l Commonly Used Conventions throughout the User's Manuals

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

l Conventions Used to Show Key or Button Operations

l Conventions Used in Command Syntax or Program Statements

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

Copyright and Trademark Notices

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

Consolidated Alarm Management Software Reference

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

Consolidated Alarm Management Software Reference

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

A. Message Monitoring Using CAMS

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

A1. CAMS for HIS Overview

n What is CAMS for HIS?

n Purpose of CAMS for HIS

n Differences Between the Conventional Alarm Management and

n Operation when the Number of Messages has Exceeded the

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

n System Configuration when Using CAMS for HIS

ENG HIS HIS (Download Master) HIS

PRM OPC Server OPC Server

Figure A1-1 A System Implemented with CAMS for HIS

n How to Use CAMS for HIS

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

n Alarm Setpoint Management of CAMS for HIS

Compare master and current

CAMS for HIS Alarm setpoint Current alarm

ENG HIS Control Station

Set All Alarm setpoints

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

n Terminology of CAMS for HIS

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

A2. Main Operations on Message

n Overview of the Message Monitor of CAMS for HIS

Shelving Date Source Message

IM 33K03H20-50E 7th Edition : Aug.08,2014-00

A2.1 How to Start the Message Monitor of